Order No: PAPAMY1905037CE

Air-to-Water Hydromodule + Tank

Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit
WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5
WH-UD05JE5
WH-UD07JE5
WH-UD09JE5

Destination
Europe
Turkey

WARNING
This service information is designed for experienced repair technicians only and is not designed for use by the general public.
It does not contain warnings or cautions to advise non-technical individuals of potential dangers in attempting to service a product.
Products powered by electricity should be serviced or repaired only by experienced professional technicians. Any attempt to
service or repair the products dealt with in this service information by anyone else could result in serious injury or death.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

There are special components used in this equipment which are important for safety. These parts are marked by in the Schematic
Diagrams, Circuit Board Diagrams, Exploded Views and Replacement Parts List. It is essential that these critical parts should be
replaced with manufacturer’s specified parts to prevent shock, fire or other hazards. Do not modify the original design without permission
of manufacturer.

PRECAUTION OF LOW TEMPERATURE

In order to avoid frostbite, be assured of no refrigerant leakage during the installation or repairing of refrigerant circuit.

CAUTION
R32 REFRIGERANT – This Air-to-Water Hydromodule + Tank contains and operates with refrigerant R32.
THIS PRODUCT MUST ONLY BE INSTALLED OR SERVICED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
Refer to National, State, Territory and local legislation, regulations, codes, installation & operation manuals, before the
installation, maintenance and/or service of this product.

© Panasonic Corporation 2019.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.  Safety Precautions .............................................4  14.  Operation and Control .................................. 130 
2.  Precaution For Using R32 Refrigerant .............7  14.1  Basic Function .......................................... 130 
14.2  Water Pump .............................................. 140 
3.  Specifications ...................................................12 
14.3  Indoor Unit Safety ..................................... 143 
3.1  WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5 .............12  14.4  Auto Restart Control ................................. 143 
3.2  WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD05JE5 .............16  14.5  Indication Panel ........................................ 143 
3.3  WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5 .............20  14.6  Indoor Back-Up Heater Control ................ 144 
3.4  WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD09JE5 .............24  14.7  Tank Heater Control.................................. 146 
14.8  Base Pan Heater Control (Optional) ......... 147 
4.  Features.............................................................28  14.9  Force Heater Mode ................................... 147 
5.  Location of Controls and Components ..........29  14.10 Powerful Operation ................................... 149 
14.11 Quiet Operation......................................... 149 
5.1  Indoor Unit ...................................................29  14.12 Sterilization Mode ..................................... 150 
5.2  Outdoor Unit.................................................48  14.13 Outdoor Ambient Thermo OFF Control .... 150 
6.  Dimensions .......................................................49  14.14 Alternative Outdoor Ambient Sensor Control ..
................................................................. 151 
6.1  Indoor Unit ...................................................49  14.15 Force DHW mode ..................................... 151 
6.2  Outdoor Unit.................................................50  14.16 SMART DHW mode .................................. 152 
7.  Refrigeration and Water Cycle Diagram ........52  14.17 Anti Freeze Control ................................... 152 
14.18 Solar Operation (Optional) ........................ 153 
8.  Block Diagram ..................................................53  14.19 Boiler Bivalent Control .............................. 155 
8.1  WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5 14.20 External Room Thermostat Control (Optional)
WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD05JE5 .............53  ................................................................. 157 
8.2  WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5 14.21 Three Ways Valve Control ........................ 158 
WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD09JE5 .............54  14.22 Two Ways Valve Control........................... 158 
14.23 External OFF/ON Control ......................... 159 
9.  Wiring Connection Diagram ............................55  14.24 External Compressor Switch (Optional PCB) ..
9.1  Indoor Unit ...................................................55  ................................................................. 160 
9.2  Outdoor Unit.................................................56  14.25 Heat/Cool Switch (Optional PCB) ............. 160 
14.26 SG Ready Control (Optional PCB) ........... 161 
10.  Electronic Circuit Diagram ..............................58  14.27 Demand Control (Optional PCB) .............. 163 
10.1  Indoor Unit ...................................................58  14.28 Holiday Mode ............................................ 163 
10.2  Outdoor Unit.................................................59  14.29 Dry Concrete ............................................. 164 
14.30 Flow Sensor .............................................. 164 
11.  Printed Circuit Board .......................................61 
15.  Protection Control (WH-UD03JE5
11.1  Indoor Unit ...................................................61  WH-UD05JE5)................................................. 165 
11.2  Outdoor Unit.................................................63 
15.1  Protection Control for All Operations ........ 165 
12.  Installation Instruction .....................................66  15.2  Protection Control for Heating Operation.........
12.1  Indoor Floor Area Requirement ...................66  ................................................................. 167 
12.2  Indoor Unit ...................................................69  15.3  Protection Control for Cooling Operation .........
12.3  Outdoor Unit.................................................79  ................................................................. 168 
12.4  Appendix ......................................................83  16.  Protection Control (WH-UD07JE5
12.5  Service and maintenance ..........................109  WH-UD09JE5)................................................. 169 
13.  Installation and Servicing Air Conditioner 16.1  Protection Control for All Operations ........ 169 
using R32 ........................................................110  16.2  Protection Control for Heating Operation.........
13.1  About R32 Refrigerant ...............................110  ................................................................. 171 
13.2  Characteristics of R32 Refrigerant.............110  16.3  Protection Control for Cooling Operation .........
13.3  Refrigerant piping installation • Tools used in ................................................................. 172 
services ......................................................112  17.  Servicing Guide ............................................. 173 
13.4  New installation, Relocation, Repairing of
Refrigerant Cycle System The Procedures ..... 17.1  How to take out Front Plate ...................... 173 
..................................................................116  17.2  Test Run ................................................... 173 
13.5  Piping installation of R32 ...........................117  17.3  Expansion Vessel Pre Pressure Checking ......
13.6  Installation, Relocation, and Service..........118  ................................................................. 173 
13.7  Repairing of refrigerant cycle / Brazing point ... 17.4  Pump Down Procedures ........................... 174 
..................................................................122  17.5  How To Adjust Pump Speed ..................... 175 
13.8  <Reference> Analysis method for no error 17.6  How To Unlock Cool Mode ....................... 176 
code, no cooling / no warming ...................128 
2
 17.7  EEPROM Factory Default Data Setup
Procedure .................................................. 177 
17.8  Dry Concrete Setup ................................... 178 
18.  Maintenance Guide ........................................ 180 
18.1  Maintenance for Magnetic Water Filter Set .....
.................................................................. 183 
19.  Troubleshooting Guide .................................. 185 
19.1  Refrigeration Cycle System ....................... 185 
19.2  Relationship between the Condition of the Air-
to-Water Heatpump Indoor and Outdoor Units
and Pressure and Electric Current ............ 186 
19.3  Breakdown Self Diagnosis Function .......... 187 
19.4  Error Codes Table ..................................... 189 
19.5  Self-diagnosis Method ............................... 191 
20.  Disassembly and Assembly Instructions .... 239 
20.1  To Remove Front Plate and Top Plate ...... 239 
20.2  To Remove Pressure Gauge ..................... 240 
20.3  To Remove Remote Control ...................... 240 
20.4  To Remove RCCB ..................................... 241 
20.5  To Remove Electronic Controller............... 241 
20.6  To Remove Flow Switch and Air Purge Valve .
.................................................................. 242 
20.7  To Remove Water Pump ........................... 242 
20.8  To Remove Bottle Complete ..................... 243 
20.9  To Remove Water Filter ............................ 243 
21.  Technical Data ................................................ 244 
21.1  Operation Characteristics .......................... 244 
21.2  Heating Capacity Table ............................. 268 
21.3  Cooling Capacity Table ............................. 269 
22.  Exploded View and Replacement Parts List .....
......................................................................... 270 
22.1  Indoor Unit ................................................. 270 
22.2  Outdoor Unit .............................................. 274 

 Specifications, designs and contents in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice.

3
1. Safety Precautions
 Read the following “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully before installation of Air-To-Water Hydromodule + Tank
(here after referred to as “Tank Unit”).
 Electrical works and water installation works must be done by licensed electrician and licensed water system
installer respectively. Be sure to use the correct rating and main circuit for the model to be installed.
 The caution items stated here must be followed because these important contents are related to safety. The
meaning of each indication used is as below.
Incorrect installation due to ignorance or negligence of the instructions will cause harm or damage, and the
seriousness is classified by the following indications.
 Please leave this installation manual with the unit after installation.

WARNING This indication shows the possibility of causing death or serious injury.

CAUTION This indication shows the possibility of causing injury or damage to properties only.

 The items to be followed are classified by the symbols:

Symbol with white background denotes item that is PROHIBITED.

Symbol with dark background denotes item that must be carried out.

 Explanation of symbols displayed on the indoor unit or outdoor unit.

This symbol shows that this equipment uses a flammable refrigerant. If the refrigerant is leaked, together with an
WARNING
external ignition source, there is a possibility of ignition.

CAUTION This symbol shows that the Installation Manual should be read carefully.

CAUTION This symbol shows that a service personnel should be handling this equipment with reference to the Installation Manual.

CAUTION This symbol shows that there is information included in the Operation Manual and/or Installation Manual.

 Carry out test run to confirm that no abnormality occurs after the installation. Then, explain to user the operation,
care and maintenance as stated in instructions. Please remind the customer to keep the operating instructions for
future reference.
 If there is any doubt about the installation procedure or operation, always contact the authorized dealer for advice
and information.

WARNING

Do not use means to accelerate the defrosting process or to clean, other than those recommended by the manufacturer. Any unfit
1.
method or using incompatible material may cause product damage, burst and serious injury.
Do not install outdoor unit near handrail of veranda. When installing outdoor unit at veranda of high rise building, child may climb up to
2.
outdoor unit and cross over the handrail and causing accident.
Do not use unspecified cord, modified cord, joint cord or extension cord for power supply cord. Do not share the single outlet with
3.
other electrical appliances. Poor contact, poor insulation or over current will cause electrical shock or fire.

4. Do not tie up the power supply cord into a bundle by band. Abnormal temperature rise on power supply cord may happen.

5. Do not insert your fingers or other objects into the unit, high speed rotating fan may cause injury.

6. Do not sit or step on the unit, you may fall down accidentally.

7. Keep plastic bag (packaging material) away from small children, it may cling to nose and mouth and prevent breathing.

When install or relocate outdoor unit, do not let any substance other than the specified refrigerant, e.g. air etc. mix into refrigerant
8.
cycle (piping). Mixing of air etc. will cause abnormal high pressure in refrigeration cycle and result in explosion, injury etc.

9. Do not use pipe wrench to install refrigerant piping. It might deform the piping and cause the unit to malfunction.

10. Do not purchase unauthorized electrical parts for installation, service, maintenance and etc.. They might cause electrical shock or fire.

Do not modify the wiring of outdoor unit for installation of other components (i.e. heater, etc). Overloaded wiring or wire connection
11.
points may cause electrical shock or fire.

4
 WARNING
Do not pierce or burn as the appliance is pressurized. Do not expose the appliance to heat, flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition.
12.
Else, it may explode and cause injury or death.

13. Do not add or replace refrigerant other than specified type. It may cause product damage, burst and injury etc.

Do not place containers with liquids on top of the Tank Unit. It may cause Tank Unit damage and/or fire could occurs if they leak or
14.
spill onto the Tank Unit.
Do not use joint cable for Tank Unit / Outdoor Unit connection cable. Use specified Tank Unit / Outdoor Unit connection cable, refer to
instruction 4 CONNECT THE CABLE TO THE TANK UNIT and connect tightly for Tank Unit / Outdoor Unit connection. Clamp the
15.
cable so that no external force will be acted on the terminal. If connection or fixing is not perfect, it will cause heat up or fire at the
connection.
For electrical work, follow the local wiring standard, national regulation, legislation and this installation instructions. An independent
16. circuit and single outlet must be used. If electrical circuit capacity is not enough or defect found in the electrical work, it will cause
electrical shock or fire.
Engage authorized dealer or specialist for installation. If installation done by the user is incorrect / defective, it will cause water
17.
leakage, electrical shock or fire.
For water circuit installation work, follow to relevant European and national regulations (including EN61770) and local plumbing and
18.
building regulation codes.
 This is a R32 model, use piping, flare nut and tools which is specified for R32 refrigerant. Using of existing (R22) piping, flare nut
and tools may cause abnormally high pressure in the refrigerant cycle (piping), and possibly result in explosion and injury.
19.
 Thickness for copper pipes used with R32 must be more than 0.8 mm. Never use copper pipes thinner than 0.8 mm.
 It is desirable that the amount of residual oil is less than 40 mg/10 m.
When installing or relocating Tank Unit, do not let any substance other than the specified refrigerant, eg. air etc. mix into refrigeration
20.
cycle (piping). Mixing of air etc. will cause abnormal high pressure in refrigeration cycle and result in explosion, injury etc.
For refrigeration system work, install according to this installation instructions strictly. If installation is defective, it will cause water
21.
leakage, electrical shock or fire.
Install at a strong and firm location which is able to withstand weight of the set. If the strength is not enough or installation is not
22.
properly done, the set will drop and cause injury.
Do not use joint cable for outdoor connection cable. Use specified outdoor connection cable, refer to instruction 5 CONNECT THE
23. CABLE TO THE OUTDOOR UNIT and connect tightly for outdoor connection. Clamp the cable so that no external force will be acted
on the terminal. If connection or fixing is not perfect, it will cause heat up or fire at the connection.
Wire routing must be properly arranged so that control board cover is fixed properly. If control board cover is not fixed perfectly, it will
24.
cause fire or electrical shock.
This equipment is strongly recommended to be installed with Residual Current Device (RCD) on-site according to the respective
25.
national wiring rules or country-specific safety measures in terms of residual current.
During installation, install the refrigerant piping properly before running the compressor. Operation of compressor without fixing
26. refrigeration piping and valves at opened position will cause suck-in of air, abnormal high pressure in refrigeration cycle and result in
explosion, injury etc.

During pump down operation, stop the compressor before removing the refrigeration piping. Removal of refrigeration piping while
27. compressor is operating and valves are opened will cause suck-in of air, abnormal high pressure in refrigeration cycle and result in
explosion, injury etc.
Tighten the flare nut with torque wrench according to specified method. If the flare nut is over tightened, after a long period, the flare
28.
may break and cause refrigerant gas leakage.
After completion of installation, confirm there is no leakage of refrigerant gas. It may generate toxic gas when the refrigerant contacts
29.
with fire.
Ventilate the room if there is refrigerant gas leakage during operation. Extinguish all fire sources if present. It may cause toxic gas
30.
when the refrigerant contacts with fire.
Use the attached accessories parts and specified parts for installation. Otherwise, it will cause the set to fall, water leakage, fire or
31.
electrical shock.

32. Only use the supplied or specified installation parts. Else, it may causes unit vibrate, fall, water leakage, electrical shock or fire.

33. If there is any doubt about the installation procedure or operation, always contact the authorized dealer for advice and information.

34. Select a location where in case of water leakage, the leakage will not cause damage to other properties

When installing electrical equipment at wooden building of metal lath or wire lath, in accordance with electrical facility standard, no
35.
electrical contact between equipment and building is allowed. Insulator must be installed in between.
Any work carried out on the Tank Unit / Outdoor Unit after removing any panels which is secured by screws, must be carried out under
36.
the supervision of authorized dealer and licensed installation contractor.

37. This system is multi supply appliance. All circuits must be disconnected before accessing the unit terminals.

For cold water supply has a backflow regulator, check valve or water meter with check valve, provisions for thermal expansion of
38.
water in the hot water system must be provided. Otherwise it will cause water leakage.

5
 WARNING
The piping installation work must be flushed before Tank Unit is connected to remove contaminants. Contaminants may damage the
39.
Tank Unit components.
This installation may be subjected to building regulation approval applicable to respective country that may require to notify the local
40.
authority before installation.
The Tank Unit must be shipped and stored in upright condition and dry environment. It may laid on its back when being moved into the
41.
building.
Work done to the Tank Unit after remove the front plate cover that secured by screws, must be carried out under the supervision of
42.
authorized dealer, licensed installation contractor, skilled person and instructed person.

43. Be aware that refrigerants may not contain an odour.

This unit must be properly earthed. The electrical earth must not be connected to a gas pipe, water pipe, the earth of lightening rod or
44. a telephone. Otherwise there is a danger of electrical shock in the event of an insulation breakdown or electrical earth fault in the
outdoor unit.

CAUTION

Do not install the Tank Unit / Outdoor Unit at place where leakage of flammable gas may occur. In case gas leaks and accumulates at
1.
surrounding of the unit, it may cause fire.

2. Prevent liquid or vapor from entering sumps or sewers since vapor is heavier than air and may form suffocating atmospheres.

Do not release refrigerant during piping work for installation, re-installation and during repairing a refrigeration parts. Take care of the
3.
liquid refrigerant, it may cause frostbite.

4. Do not install this appliance in a laundry room or other high humidity location. This condition will cause rust and damage to the unit.

Make sure the insulation of power supply cord does not contact hot part (i.e. refrigerant piping, water piping) to prevent from insulation
5.
failure (melt).

6. Do not touch the sharp aluminium fin, sharp parts may cause injury.

Do not apply excessive force to water pipes that may damage the pipes. If water leakage occurs, it will cause flooding and damage to
7.
other properties.

8. Do not transport the Tank Unit with water inside the unit. It may cause damage to the unit.

Carry out drainage piping as mentioned in installation instructions. If drainage is not perfect, water may enter the room and damage
9.
the furniture.
Select an installation location which is easy for maintenance.
10. Incorrect installation, service or repair of this Tank Unit / Outdoor Unit may increase the risk of rupture and this may result in loss
damage or injury and/or property.
Power supply connection to Tank Unit.
 Power supply point should be in easily accessible place for power disconnection in case of emergency.
 Must follow local national wiring standard, regulation and this installation instruction.
 Strongly recommended to make permanent connection to a circuit breaker.
11. - Power Supply 1: For WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5, use approved 15/16A 2-poles circuit breaker with a minimum contact gap
of 3.0mm.
For WH-UD07JE5 and WH-UD09JE5, use approved 25A 2-poles circuit breaker with a minimum contact gap of
3.0mm.
- Power Supply 2: Use approved 16A 2-poles circuit breaker with a minimum contact gap of 3.0mm.

12. Ensure the correct polarity is maintained throughout all wiring. Otherwise, it will cause electrical shock or fire.

After installation, check the water leakage condition in connection area during test run. If leakage occurs, it will cause damage to other
13.
properties.

14. If the Tank Unit not operates for long time, the water inside the Tank Unit should be drained.

Installation work.
15. It may need three or more people to carry out the installation work. The weight of Tank Unit / Outdoor Unit might cause injury if carried
by one person.

16. Keep any required ventilation openings clear of obstruction.

6
2. Precaution For Using R32 Refrigerant
 The basic installation work procedures are the same as conventional refrigerant (R410A, R22) models.
However, pay careful attention to the following points:

When connecting flare at indoor side, make sure that the flare connection is used only once, if torqued up and released, the flare must
be remade. Once the flare connection was torqued up correctly and leak test was made, thoroughly clean and dry the surface to
1. remove oil, dirt and grease by following instructions of silicone sealant. Apply neutral cure (Alkoxy type) & ammonia-free silicone
sealant that is non-corrosive to copper & brass to the external of the flared connection to prevent the ingress of moisture on both the
gas & liquid sides. (Moisture may cause freezing and premature failure of the connection)
The appliance shall be stored, installed and operated in a well ventilated room with comply to Indoor Floor Area Requirement and
2. without any continuously operating ignition source. Keep away from open flames, any operating gas appliances or any operating
electric heater. Else, it may explode and cause injury or death.
Refer to “PRECAUTION FOR USING R32 REFRIGERANT” in outdoor unit installation manual for other precautions that need to pay
3.
attention to.

WARNING
Since the working pressure is higher than that of refrigerant R22 models, some of the piping and installation and service tools
are special.
1. Especially, when replacing a refrigerant R22 model with a new refrigerant R32 model, always replace the conventional piping
and flare nuts with the R32 and R410A piping and flare nuts on the outdoor unit side.
For R32 and R410A, the same flare nut on the outdoor unit side and pipe can be used.
The mixing of different refrigerants within a system is prohibited. Models that use refrigerant R32 and R410A have a different
2. charging port thread diameter to prevent erroneous charging with refrigerant R22 and for safety.
Therefore, check beforehand. [The charging port thread diameter for R32 and R410A is 12.7 mm (1/2 inch).]
Ensure that foreign matter (oil, water, etc.) does not enter the piping.
3.
Also, when storing the piping, securely seal the opening by pinching, taping, etc. (Handling of R32 is similar to R410A.)
Operation, maintenance, repairing and refrigerant recovery should be carried out by trained and certified personnel in the use of
4. flammable refrigerants and as recommended by the manufacturer. Any personnel conducting an operation, servicing or
maintenance on a system or associated parts of the equipment should be trained and certified.
Any part of refrigerating circuit (evaporators, air coolers, AHU, condensers or liquid receivers) or piping should not be located in
5.
the proximity of heat sources, open flames, operating gas appliance or an operating electric heater.
The user/owner or their authorized representative shall regularly check the alarms, mechanical ventilation and detectors, at
6.
least once a year, where as required by national regulations, to ensure their correct functioning.

7. A logbook shall be maintained. The results of these checks shall be recorded in the logbook.

8. In case of ventilations in occupied spaces shall be checked to confirm no obstruction.

Before a new refrigerating system is put into service, the person responsible for placing the system in operation should ensure
that trained and certified operating personnel are instructed on the basis of the instruction manual about the construction,
9.
supervision, operation and maintenance of the refrigerating system, as well as the safety measures to be observed, and the
properties and handling of the refrigerant used.
The general requirement of trained and certified personnel are indicated as below:
a) Knowledge of legislation, regulations and standards relating to flammable refrigerants; and,
b) Detailed knowledge of and skills in handling flammable refrigerants, personal protective equipment, refrigerant leakage
10.
prevention, handling of cylinders, charging, leak detection, recovery and disposal; and,
c) Able to understand and to apply in practice the requirements in the national legislation, regulations and Standards; and,
d) Continuously undergo regular and further training to maintain this expertise.
Air-to-Water Heatpump piping in the occupied space shall be installed in such a way to protect against accidental damage in
11.
operation and service.

12. Precautions shall be taken to avoid excessive vibration or pulsation to refrigerating piping.

Ensure protection devices, refrigerating piping and fittings are well protected against adverse environmental effects (such as the
13.
danger of water collecting and freezing in relief pipes or the accumulation of dirt and debris).
Expansion and contraction of long runs piping in refrigerating systems shall be designed and installed securely (mounted and
14.
guarded) to minimize the likelihood hydraulic shock damaging the system.

15. Protect the refrigerating system from accidental rupture due to moving furniture or reconstruction activities.

To ensure no leaking, field-made refrigerant joints indoors shall be tightness tested. The test method shall have a sensitivity of 5
16. grams per year of refrigerant or better under a pressure of at least 0,25 times the maximum allowable pressure (>1.04MPa, max
4.15MPa). No leak shall be detected.

7
 CAUTION
Installation (Space)
 Must ensure the installation of pipe-work shall be kept to a minimum. Avoid use dented pipe and do not allow acute
bending.
 Must ensure that pipe-work shall be protected from physical damage.
 Must comply with national gas regulations, state municipal rules and legislation. Notify relevant authorities in accordance
with all applicable regulations.
1.
 Must ensure mechanical connections be accessible for maintenance purposes.
 In cases that require mechanical ventilation, ventilation openings shall be kept clear of obstruction.
 When disposal of the product, do follow to the precautions in #12 and comply with national regulations.
 In case of field charge, the effect on refrigerant charge caused by the different pipe length has to be quantified, measured
and labelled.
 Always contact to local municipal offices for proper handling.
Servicing
2-1. Service personnel
 Any qualified person who is involved with working on or breaking into a refrigerant circuit should hold a current valid
certificate from an industry-accredited assessment authority, which authorizes their competence to handle refrigerants
safely in accordance with an industry recognized assessment specification.
 Servicing shall only be performed as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Maintenance and repair requiring the
assistance of other skilled personnel shall be carried out under the supervision of the person competent in the use of
flammable refrigerants.
 Servicing shall be performed only as recommended by the manufacturer.
 The system is inspected, regularly supervised and maintained by a trained and certified service personnel who is employed
by the person user or party responsible.
 Ensure the actual refrigerant charge is in accordance with the room size within which the refrigerant containing parts are
installed.
 Ensure refrigerant charge not to leak.
2-2. Work
 Prior to beginning work on systems containing flammable refrigerants, safety checks are necessary to ensure that the risk
of ignition is minimised.
For repair to the refrigerating system, the precautions in #2-2 to #2-8 must be followed before conducting work on the
system.
 Work shall be undertaken under a controlled procedure so as to minimize the risk of a flammable gas or vapour being
present while the work is being performed.
 All maintenance staff and others working in the local area shall be instructed and supervised on the nature of work being
carried out.
 Avoid working in confined spaces. Always ensure away from source, at least 2 meter of safety distance, or zoning of free
space area of at least 2 meter in radius.
 Wear appropriate protective equipment, including respiratory protection, as conditions warrant.
2.  Keep all sources of ignition and hot metal surfaces away.
2-3. Checking for presence of refrigerant
 The area shall be checked with an appropriate refrigerant detector prior to and during work, to ensure the technician is
aware of potentially flammable atmospheres.
 Ensure that the leak detection equipment being used is suitable for use with flammable refrigerants, i.e. non sparking,
adequately sealed or intrinsically safe.
 In case of leakage/spillage happened, immediately ventilate area and stay upwind and away from spill/release.
 In case of leakage/spillage happened, do notify persons down wind of the leaking/spill, isolate immediate hazard area and
keep unauthorized personnel out.
2-4. Presence of fire extinguisher
 If any hot work is to be conducted on the refrigerating equipment or any associated parts, appropriate fire extinguishing
equipment shall be available at hand.
 Have a dry powder or CO2 fire extinguisher adjacent to the charging area.
2-5. No ignition sources
 No person carrying out work in relation to a refrigerating system which involves exposing any pipe work that contains or
has contained flammable refrigerant shall use any sources of ignition in such a manner that it may lead to the risk of fire or
explosion. He/She must not be smoking when carrying out such work.
 All possible ignition sources, including cigarette smoking, should be kept sufficiently far away from the site of installation,
repairing, removing and disposal, during which flammable refrigerant can possibly be released to the surrounding space.
 Prior to work taking place, the area around the equipment is to be surveyed to make sure that there are no flammable
hazards or ignition risks.
 “No Smoking” signs shall be displayed.
2-6. Ventilated area
 Ensure that the area is in the open or that it is adequately ventilated before breaking into the system or conducting any hot
work.
 A degree of ventilation shall continue during the period that the work is carried out.
 The ventilation should safely disperse any released refrigerant and preferably expel it externally into the atmosphere.

8
 CAUTION
2-7. Checks to the refrigerating equipment
 Where electrical components are being changed, they shall be fit for the purpose and to the correct specification.
 At all times the manufacturer’s maintenance and service guidelines shall be followed.
 If in doubt consult the manufacturer’s technical department for assistance.
 The following checks shall be applied to installations using flammable refrigerants.
- The actual refrigerant charge is in accordance with the room size within which the refrigerant containing parts are installed.
- The ventilation machinery and outlets are operating adequately and are not obstructed.
- If an indirect refrigerating circuit is being used, the secondary circuit shall be checked for the presence of refrigerant.
- Marking to the equipment continues to be visible and legible. Markings and signs that are illegible shall be corrected.
- Refrigerating pipe or components are installed in a position where they are unlikely to be exposed to any substance
which may corrode refrigerant containing components, unless the components are constructed of materials which are
inherently resistant to being corroded or are properly protected against being so corroded.
2. 2-8. Checks to electrical devices
 Repair and maintenance to electrical components shall include initial safety checks and component inspection procedures.
 Initial safety checks shall include but not limit to:-
- That capacitors are discharged: this shall be done in a safe manner to avoid possibility of sparking.
- That there is no live electrical components and wiring are exposed while charging, recovering or purging the system.
- That there is continuity of earth bonding.
 At all times the manufacturer’s maintenance and service guidelines shall be followed.
 If in doubt consult the manufacturer’s technical department for assistance.
 If a fault exists that could compromise safety, then no electrical supply shall be connected to the circuit until it is
satisfactorily dealt with.
 If the fault cannot be corrected immediately but it is necessary to continue operation, an adequate temporary solution shall
be used.
 The owner of the equipment must be informed or reported so all parties are advised thereinafter.
Repairs to sealed components
 During repairs to sealed components, all electrical supplies shall be disconnected from the equipment being worked upon
prior to any removal of sealed covers, etc.
 If it is absolutely necessary to have an electrical supply to equipment during servicing, then a permanently operating form
of leak detection shall be located at the most critical point to warn of a potentially hazardous situation.
 Particular attention shall be paid to the following to ensure that by working on electrical components, the casing is not
altered in such a way that the level of protection is affected. This shall include damage to cables, excessive number of
3. connections, terminals not made to original specification, damage to seals, incorrect fitting of glands, etc.
 Ensure that apparatus is mounted securely.
 Ensure that seals or sealing materials have not degraded such that they no longer serve the purpose of preventing the
ingress of flammable atmospheres.
 Replacement parts shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications.

The use of silicon sealant may inhibit the effectiveness of some types of leak detection equipment.
NOTE:
Intrinsically safe components do not have to be isolated prior to working on them.

Repair to intrinsically safe components

 Do not apply any permanent inductive or capacitance loads to the circuit without ensuring that this will not exceed the
permissible voltage and current permitted for the equipment in use.
 Intrinsically safe components are the only types that can be worked on while live in the presence of a flammable
4.
atmosphere.
 The test apparatus shall be at the correct rating.
 Replace components only with parts specified by the manufacturer. Unspecified parts by manufacturer may result ignition
of refrigerant in the atmosphere from a leak.
Cabling
 Check that cabling will not be subject to wear, corrosion, excessive pressure, vibration, sharp edges or any other adverse
5. environmental effects.
 The check shall also take into account the effects of aging or continual vibration from sources such as compressors or
fans.
Detection of flammable refrigerants
6.  Under no circumstances shall potential sources of ignition be used in the searching or detection of refrigerant leaks.
 A halide torch (or any other detector using a naked flame) shall not be used.

9
 CAUTION
The following leak detection methods are deemed acceptable for all refrigerant systems.
 No leaks shall be detected when using detection equipment with a sensitivity of 5 grams per year of refrigerant or better
under a pressure of at least 0,25 times the maximum allowable pressure (>1.04MPa, max 4.15MPa). For example, a
universal sniffer.
 Electronic leak detectors may be used to detect flammable refrigerants, but the sensitivity may not be adequate, or may
need re-calibration.
(Detection equipment shall be calibrated in a refrigerant-free area.)
 Ensure that the detector is not a potential source of ignition and is suitable for the refrigerant used.
7.  Leak detection equipment shall be set at a percentage of the LFL of the refrigerant and shall be calibrated to the refrigerant
employed and the appropriate percentage of gas (25 % maximum) is confirmed.
 Leak detection fluids are also suitable for use with most refrigerants, for example, bubble method and fluorescent method
agents. The use of detergents containing chlorine shall be avoided as the chlorine may react with the refrigerant and
corrode the copper pipe-work.
 If a leak is suspected, all naked flames shall be removed/extinguished.
 If a leakage of refrigerant is found which requires brazing, all of the refrigerant shall be recovered from the system, or
isolated (by means of shut off valves) in a part of the system remote from the leak.
The precautions in #8 must be followed to remove the refrigerant.
Removal and evacuation
 When breaking into the refrigerant circuit to make repairs – or for any other purpose – conventional procedures shall be
used.
However, it is important that best practice is followed since flammability is a consideration.
The following procedure shall be adhered to:

• remove refrigerant -> • purge the circuit with inert gas -> • evacuate -> • purge with inert gas ->
• open the circuit by cutting or brazing

8.  The refrigerant charge shall be recovered into the correct recovery cylinders.
 The system shall be purged with OFN to render the appliance safe. (remark: OFN = oxygen free nitrogen, type of inert gas)
 This process may need to be repeated several times.
 Compressed air or oxygen shall not be used for this task.
 Purging shall be achieved by breaking the vacuum in the system with OFN and continuing to fill until the working pressure
is achieved, then venting to atmosphere, and finally pulling down to a vacuum.
 This process shall be repeated until no refrigerant is within the system.
 When the final OFN charge is used, the system shall be vented down to atmospheric pressure to enable work to take
place.
 This operation is absolutely vital if brazing operations on the pipe work are to take place.
 Ensure that the outlet for the vacuum pump is not close to any potential ignition sources and there is ventilation available.
Charging procedures
 In addition to conventional charging procedures, the following requirements shall be followed.
- Ensure that contamination of different refrigerants does not occur when using charging equipment.
- Hoses or lines shall be as short as possible to minimize the amount of refrigerant contained in them.
- Cylinders shall be kept in an appropriate position according to the instructions.
- Ensure that the refrigerating system is earthed prior to charging the system with refrigerant.
9. - Label the system when charging is complete (if not already).
- Extreme care shall be taken not to over fill the refrigerating system.
 Prior to recharging the system it shall be pressure tested with OFN (refer to #7).
 The system shall be leak tested on completion of charging but prior to commissioning.
 A follow up leak test shall be carried out prior to leaving the site.
 Electrostatic charge may accumulate and create a hazardous condition when charging and discharging the refrigerant.
To avoid fire or explosion, dissipate static electricity during transfer by grounding and bonding containers and equipment
before charging/discharging.

10
 CAUTION
Decommissioning
 Before carrying out this procedure, it is essential that the technician is completely familiar with the equipment and all its
details.
 It is recommended good practice that all refrigerants are recovered safely.
 Prior to the task being carried out, an oil and refrigerant sample shall be taken in case analysis is required prior to re-use of
recovered refrigerant.
 It is essential that electrical power is available before the task is commenced.
a) Become familiar with the equipment and its operation.
b) Isolate system electrically.
c) Before attempting the procedure ensure that:

• mechanical handling equipment is available, if required, for handling refrigerant cylinders;

• all personal protective equipment is available and being used correctly;
10. • the recovery process is supervised at all times by a competent person;
• recovery equipment and cylinders conform to the appropriate standards.

d) Pump down refrigerant system, if possible.

e) If a vacuum is not possible, make a manifold so that refrigerant can be removed from various parts of the system.
f) Make sure that cylinder is situated on the scales before recovery takes place.
g) Start the recovery machine and operate in accordance with instructions.
h) Do not over fill cylinders. (No more than 80 % volume liquid charge).
i) Do not exceed the maximum working pressure of the cylinder, even temporarily.
j) When the cylinders have been filled correctly and the process completed, make sure that the cylinders and the
equipment are removed from site promptly and all isolation valves on the equipment are closed off.
k) Recovered refrigerant shall not be charged into another refrigerating system unless it has been cleaned and checked.
 Electrostatic charge may accumulate and create a hazardous condition when charging or discharging the refrigerant.
To avoid fire or explosion, dissipate static electricity during transfer by grounding and bonding containers and equipment
before charging/discharging.
Labelling
 Equipment shall be labelled stating that it has been de-commissioned and emptied of refrigerant.
11.
 The label shall be dated and signed.
 Ensure that there are labels on the equipment stating the equipment contains flammable refrigerant.
Recovery
 When removing refrigerant from a system, either for servicing or decommissioning, it is recommended good practice that
all refrigerants are removed safely.
 When transferring refrigerant into cylinders, ensure that only appropriate refrigerant recovery cylinders are employed.
 Ensure that the correct number of cylinders for holding the total system charge are available.
 All cylinders to be used are designated for the recovered refrigerant and labelled for that refrigerant (i.e. special cylinders
for the recovery of refrigerant).
 Cylinders shall be complete with pressure relief valve and associated shut-off valves in good working order.
 Recovery cylinders are evacuated and, if possible, cooled before recovery occurs.
 The recovery equipment shall be in good working order with a set of instructions concerning the equipment that is at hand
and shall be suitable for the recovery of flammable refrigerants.
 In addition, a set of calibrated weighing scales shall be available and in good working order.
12.
 Hoses shall be complete with leak-free disconnect couplings and in good condition.
 Before using the recovery machine, check that it is in satisfactory working order, has been properly maintained and that
any associated electrical components are sealed to prevent ignition in the event of a refrigerant release.
Consult manufacturer if in doubt.
 The recovered refrigerant shall be returned to the refrigerant supplier in the correct recovery cylinder, and the relevant
Waste Transfer Note arranged.
 Do not mix refrigerants in recovery units and especially not in cylinders.
 If compressors or compressor oils are to be removed, ensure that they have been evacuated to an acceptable level to
make certain that flammable refrigerant does not remain within the lubricant.
 The evacuation process shall be carried out prior to returning the compressor to the suppliers.
 Only electric heating to the compressor body shall be employed to accelerate this process.
 When oil is drained from a system, it shall be carried out safely.

11
3. Specifications
3.1 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5
Item Unit Outdoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Condition
A35W7
(Ambient/Water)
kW 3.20
Cooling Capacity
BTU/h 10900
kcal/h 2750
W/W 3.52
Cooling EER
kcal/hW 3.02
Condition
A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
kW 3.20 3.20
Heating Capacity
BTU/h 10900 10900
kcal/h 2750 2750
W/W 5.33 3.64
Heating COP
kcal/hW 4.58 3.13
Low Temperature Application (W35)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Pdesign kW 4.0 4.0 3.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -10 / -10 -20 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 6.20 / 245 5.07 / 200 4.00 / 157
Annual Consumption kWh 862 1631 1848
Class A++ A++ A++
Medium Temperature Application (W55)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Heating Erp
Pdesign kW 4.0 3.0 2.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -10 / -10 -20 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 4.20 / 165 3.47 / 136 2.83 / 110
Annual Consumption kWh 1274 1788 1740
Class A++ A++ A+
DHW
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
COP/nwh (W/W)/% 3.88 / 155 3.30 / 132 2.48 / 99
AEC kWh 640 760 994
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 45 Heating: 44
Heating: 60
Power Level dB Cooling: 61
Heating: 55***
Cooling: 33.9 (1200)
Air Flow m3/min (ft3/min)
Heating: 28.9 (1020)
Refrigeration Control Device Expansion Valve
Refrigeration Oil cm3 FW50S (450)
R32, 0.90 (31.8) (Pre-charged)
Refrigerant kg (oz)
R32, 1.20 (42.4) (Maximum)
GWP 675
F-GAS
CO2eq (ton) (Precharged/Maximum) 0.608 / 0.810
Height mm (inch) 622 (24-1/2)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 824 (32-15/32)
Depth mm (inch) 298 (11-24/32)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 37 (82)

12
 Item Unit Outdoor Unit
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 12.70 (1/2)
Standard Length m (ft) 7 (23.0)
Pipe Length Range m (ft) 3 (9.8) ~ 25 (82.0)
I/D & O/D Height Difference m (ft) 20 (65.6)
Additional Gas Amount g/m (oz/ft) 20 (0.2)
Refrigeration Charge Less m (ft) 10 (32.8)
Type Hermetic Motor
Compressor Motor Type Brushless (6-poles)
Rated Output kW 0.90
Type Propeller Fan
Material PP
Motor Type DC (8-poles)
Fan
Input Power W 20 (Heating) / 23 (Cooling)
Output Power W 40
Cooling: 840
Fan Speed rpm
Heating: 720
Fin material Aluminium (Pre Coat)
Fin Type Corrugated Fin
Heat Exchanger
Row × Stage × FPI 2 × 28 × 19
Size (W × H × L) mm 36.4 × 588 × 827.7 : 856.3
Ø Single
Power Source (Phase, Voltage, Cycle) V 230
Hz 50
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Input Power (Ambient/Water)
kW Cooling: 0.91 Heating: 0.60 Heating: 0.88
Maximum Input Power For Heatpump System kW 2.59
Power Supply 1 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 12.0 / 2.59k
Power Supply 2 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 13.0 / 3.00k
Power Supply 3 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) —/—/—
Starting Current A 2.9
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Running Current (Ambient/Water)
A Cooling: 4.3 Heating: 2.9 Heating: 4.2
Maximum Current For Heatpump System A 12.0
Power Factor Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Power factor means total figure of compressor and (Ambient/Water)
outdoor fan motor. % Cooling: 92 Heating: 90 Heating: 91
Number of core -
Power Cord
Length m (ft) -
Thermostat Electronic Control
Protection Device Electronic Control

13
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Cooling: 10 / 43
Outdoor Ambient °C (min./max.)
Heating: -20 / 35
Cooling: 5 / 20
Operation Range
Heating (Tank): - / 65*,
Water Outlet °C (min./max.)
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 55 (Below Ambient -15 °C) **
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 60 (Above Ambient -10 °C) **
Cooling: 5.0
Internal Pressure Differential kPa
Heating: 5.0
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 28 Heating: 28
Power Level dB Cooling: 41 Heating: 41
Depth mm (inch) 717 (28-7/32)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 598 (23-17/32)
Height mm (inch) 1800 (70-27/32)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 122 (269)
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Refrigerant Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 12.70 (1/2)
Room mm (inch) 31 (1-1/4)
Water Pipe Diameter
Shower mm (inch) 19 (3/4)
Water Drain Hose Inner Diameter mm (inch) 12.00 (17/36)
Motor Type DC Motor
Pump
Input Power W 34
Type Brazed Plate
No. of Plates 36
Hot Water Coil
Size (W x H x L) mm 68 × 333 × 121
Cooling: 9.2 (0.6)
Water Flow Rate l/min (m3/h)
Heating: 9.2 (0.6)
Pressure Relief Valve Water Circuit kPa Open: 300, Close: 210 and below
Type VVX20 [Electronic pulse]
Flow Switch
Measuring range l/min 5 ~ 60
Pressure Release Valve kPa Open: 800, Close: 640 and below
Protection Device A Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (30 ~ 40)
Volume I 10
Expansion Vessel
MWP bar 3
Capacity of Integrated Electric Heater / OLP TEMP kW/°C 3.00 / 80
Tank Volume (Spec / Nett) L 200 / 185
Max. Tank Water Set Temperature °C 65
2
Tank Coil Surface m 1.8

Maximum Working Heat/Cool Bar 3.0

Pressure Tank Circuit Bar 8.0
Tank Unit Bar 3.5
Operating Pressure
Expansion Relief Valve Bar 8.0
Expansion Vessel Pre-charge Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5
Pressure Reducing Valve Set Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5

14
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
Material EN-1.4521
Pressure Vessel Volume L 185
Design Pressure Bar 10
Material EN-1.4521
Diameter mm 22
Heat Exchanger Thickness mm 0.8
Surface Area m2 1.8
Total Length m 25

Note:
 Cooling capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 35°C Dry Bulb with controlled indoor water inlet
temperature of 12°C and water outlet temperature of 7°C.
 Heating capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 7°C Dry Bulb (44.6°F Dry Bulb), 6°C Wet Bulb
(42.8°F Wet Bulb) with controlled indoor water inlet temperature of 30°C and water outlet temperature of 35°C.
 Specifications are subjected to change without prior notice for further improvement.
 * Above 55°C, only possible with backup heater operation.
 ** Between outdoor ambient -10 °C and -15 °C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60 °C to
55 °C.
 *** The sound power level is measured with accordance to EN12102 under conditions of the EN14825.

15
3.2 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD05JE5
Item Unit Outdoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Condition
A35W7
(Ambient/Water)
kW 4.50
Cooling Capacity
BTU/h 15300
kcal/h 3870
W/W 3.00
Cooling EER
kcal/hW 2.58
Condition
A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
kW 5.00 4.20
Heating Capacity
BTU/h 17100 14300
kcal/h 4300 3610
W/W 5.00 3.18
Heating COP
kcal/hW 4.30 2.73
Low Temperature Application (W35)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Pdesign kW 4.0 5.0 3.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -10 / -10 -20 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 6.20 / 245 5.07 / 200 4.00 / 157
Annual Consumption kWh 862 2038 1848
Class A++ A++ A++
Medium Temperature Application (W55)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Heating Erp
Pdesign kW 4.0 4.0 2.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -10 / -10 -20 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 4.20 / 165 3.47 / 136 2.83 / 110
Annual Consumption kWh 1274 2385 1740
Class A++ A++ A+
DHW
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
COP/nwh (W/W)/% 3.88 / 155 3.30 / 132 2.48 / 99
AEC kWh 640 760 994
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 48 Heating: 47
Heating: 64
Power Level dB Cooling: 64
Heating: 55***
Cooling: 39.6 (1400)
Air Flow m3/min (ft3/min)
Heating: 31.8 (1120)
Refrigeration Control Device Expansion Valve
Refrigeration Oil cm3 FW50S (450)
R32, 0.90 (31.8) (Pre-charged)
Refrigerant kg (oz)
R32, 1.20 (42.4) (Maximum)
GWP 675
F-GAS
CO2eq (ton) (Precharged/Maximum) 0.608 / 0.810
Height mm (inch) 622 (24-1/2)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 824 (32-15/32)
Depth mm (inch) 298 (11-24/32)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 37 (82)

16
 Item Unit Outdoor Unit
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 12.70 (1/2)
Standard Length m (ft) 7 (23.0)
Pipe Length Range m (ft) 3 (9.8) ~ 25 (82.0)
I/D & O/D Height Difference m (ft) 20 (65.6)
Additional Gas Amount g/m (oz/ft) 20 (0.2)
Refrigeration Charge Less m (ft) 10 (32.8)
Type Hermetic Motor
Compressor Motor Type Brushless (6-poles)
Rated Output kW 0.90
Type Propeller Fan
Material PP
Motor Type DC (8-poles)
Fan
Input Power W 22 (Heating) / 27 (Cooling)
Output Power W 40
Cooling: 980
Fan Speed rpm
Heating: 800
Fin material Aluminium (Pre Coat)
Fin Type Corrugated Fin
Heat Exchanger
Row × Stage × FPI 2 × 28 × 19
Size (W × H × L) mm 36.4 × 588 × 827.7 : 856.3
Ø Single
Power Source (Phase, Voltage, Cycle) V 230
Hz 50
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Input Power (Ambient/Water)
kW Cooling: 1.50 Heating: 1.00 Heating: 1.32
Maximum Input Power For Heatpump System kW 2.59
Power Supply 1 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 12.0 / 2.59k
Power Supply 2 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 13.0 / 3.00k
Power Supply 3 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) —/—/—
Starting Current A 4.7
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Running Current (Ambient/Water)
A Cooling: 6.8 Heating: 4.7 Heating: 6.1
Maximum Current For Heatpump System A 12.0
Power Factor
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Power factor means total figure of compressor and %
Cooling: 96 Heating: 93 Heating: 94
outdoor fan motor.
Number of core -
Power Cord
Length m (ft) -
Thermostat Electronic Control
Protection Device Electronic Control

17
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Cooling: 10 / 43
Outdoor Ambient °C (min./max.)
Heating: -20 / 35
Cooling: 5 / 20
Operation Range
Heating (Tank): - / 65*,
Water Outlet °C (min./max.)
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 55 (Below Ambient -15 °C) **
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 60 (Above Ambient -10 °C) **
Cooling: 9.0
Internal Pressure Differential kPa
Heating: 10.0
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 28 Heating: 28
Power Level dB Cooling: 41 Heating: 41
Depth mm (inch) 717 (28-7/32)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 598 (23-17/32)
Height mm (inch) 1800 (70-27/32)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 122 (269)
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Refrigerant Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 12.70 (1/2)
Room mm (inch) 31 (1-1/4)
Water Pipe Diameter
Shower mm (inch) 19 (3/4)
Water Drain Hose Inner Diameter mm (inch) 12.00 (17/36)
Motor Type DC Motor
Pump
Input Power W 37
Type Brazed Plate
No. of Plates 36
Hot Water Coil
Size (W x H x L) mm 68 × 333 × 121
Cooling: 12.9 (0.8)
Water Flow Rate l/min (m3/h)
Heating: 14.3 (0.9)
Pressure Relief Valve Water Circuit kPa Open: 300, Close: 210 and below
Type VVX20 [Electronic pulse]
Flow Switch
Measuring range l/min 5 ~ 60
Pressure Release Valve kPa Open: 800, Close: 640 and below
Protection Device A Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (30 ~ 40)
Volume I 10
Expansion Vessel
MWP bar 3
Capacity of Integrated Electric Heater / OLP TEMP kW/°C 3.00 / 80
Tank Volume (Spec / Nett) L 200 / 185
Max. Tank Water Set Temperature °C 65
2
Tank Coil Surface m 1.8

Maximum Working Heat/Cool Bar 3.0

Pressure Tank Circuit Bar 8.0
Tank Unit Bar 3.5
Operating Pressure
Expansion Relief Valve Bar 8.0
Expansion Vessel Pre-charge Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5
Pressure Reducing Valve Set Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5

18
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
Material En-1.4521
Pressure Vessel Volume L 185
Design Pressure Bar 10
Material EN-1.4521
Diameter mm 22
Heat Exchanger Thickness mm 0.8
Surface Area m2 1.8
Total Length m 25

Note:
 Cooling capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 35°C Dry Bulb with controlled indoor water inlet
temperature of 12°C and water outlet temperature of 7°C.
 Heating capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 7°C Dry Bulb (44.6°F Dry Bulb), 6°C Wet Bulb
(42.8°F Wet Bulb) with controlled indoor water inlet temperature of 30°C and water outlet temperature of 35°C.
 Specifications are subjected to change without prior notice for further improvement.
 * Above 55°C, only possible with backup heater operation.
 ** Between outdoor ambient -10 °C and -15 °C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60 °C to
55 °C.
 *** The sound power level is measured with accordance to EN12102 under conditions of the EN14825.

19
3.3 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5
Item Unit Outdoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Condition
A35W7
(Ambient/Water)
kW 6.70
Cooling Capacity
BTU/h 22800
kcal/h 5760
W/W 3.03
Cooling EER
kcal/hW 2.61
Condition
A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
kW 7.00 6.85
Heating Capacity
BTU/h 23900 23400
kcal/h 6020 5890
W/W 4.76 3.41
Heating COP
kcal/hW 4.10 2.93
Low Temperature Application (W35)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Pdesign kW 7.0 6.0 7.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -10 / -10 -15 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 5.75 / 227 4.90 / 193 4.18 / 164
Annual Consumption kWh 1627 2532 4132
Class A++ A++ A++
Medium Temperature Application (W55)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Heating Erp
Pdesign kW 6.0 7.0 6.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -7 / -10 -15 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 4.07 / 160 3.32 / 130 2.98 / 116
Annual Consumption kWh 1971 4354 4967
Class A++ A++ A+
DHW
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
COP/nwh (W/W)/% 3.50 / 140 3.00 / 120 2.47 / 99
AEC kWh 714 833 1013
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 49 Heating: 50
Heating: 68
Power Level dB Cooling: 67
Heating: 59***
Cooling: 55.0 (1942)
Air Flow m3/min (ft3/min)
Heating: 45.3 (1599)
Refrigeration Control Device Expansion Valve
Refrigeration Oil cm3 FW50S (900)
R32, 1.27 (44.8) (Pre-charged)
Refrigerant kg (oz)
R32, 2.27 (80.1) (Maximum)
GWP 675
F-GAS
CO2eq (ton) (Precharged/Maximum) 0.857 / 1.532
Height mm (inch) 795 (31-5/16)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 875 (34-15/32)
Depth mm (inch) 320 (12-5/8)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 61 (135)

20
 Item Unit Outdoor Unit
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 15.88 (5/8)
Standard Length m (ft) 7 (23.0)
Pipe Length Range m (ft) 3 (9.8) ~ 50 (164.0)
I/D & O/D Height Difference m (ft) 30 (98.4)
Additional Gas Amount g/m (oz/ft) 25 (0.3)
Refrigeration Charge Less m (ft) 10 (32.8)
Type Hermetic Motor
Compressor Motor Type Brushless (4-poles)
Rated Output kW 1.70
Type Propeller Fan
Material PP
Motor Type DC (8-poles)
Fan
Input Power W —
Output Power W 60
Cooling: 700
Fan Speed rpm
Heating: 580
Fin material Aluminium (Pre Coat)
Fin Type Corrugated Fin
Heat Exchanger
Row × Stage × FPI 2 × 30 × 19
Size (W × H × L) mm 38.1 × 762.0 × 865.8 : 895.8
Ø Single
Power Source (Phase, Voltage, Cycle) V 230
Hz 50
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Input Power (Ambient/Water)
kW Cooling: 2.21 Heating: 1.47 Heating: 2.01
Maximum Input Power For Heatpump System kW 3.47
Power Supply 1 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 15.9 / 3.47k
Power Supply 2 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 13.0 / 3.00k
Power Supply 3 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) —/—/—
Starting Current A 6.9
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Running Current (Ambient/Water)
A Cooling: 10.1 Heating: 6.8 Heating: 9.2
Maximum Current For Heatpump System A 15.9
Power Factor Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Power factor means total figure of compressor and (Ambient/Water)
outdoor fan motor. % Cooling: 95 Heating: 94 Heating: 95
Number of core -
Power Cord
Length m (ft) -
Thermostat Electronic Control
Protection Device Electronic Control

21
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Cooling: 10 / 43
Outdoor Ambient °C (min./max.)
Heating: -20 / 35
Cooling: 5 / 20
Operation Range
Heating (Tank): - / 65*,
Water Outlet °C (min./max.)
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 55 (Below Ambient -15 °C) **
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 60 (Above Ambient -10 °C) **
Cooling: 16.0
Internal Pressure Differential kPa
Heating: 17.0
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 28 Heating: 28
Power Level dB Cooling: 41 Heating: 41
Depth mm (inch) 717 (28-7/32)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 598 (23-17/32)
Height mm (inch) 1800 (70-27/32)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 122 (269)
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Refrigerant Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 15.88 (5/8)
Room mm (inch) 31 (1-1/4)
Water Pipe Diameter
Shower mm (inch) 19 (3/4)
Water Drain Hose Inner Diameter mm (inch) 12.00 (17/36)
Motor Type DC Motor
Pump
Input Power W 40
Type Brazed Plate
No. of Plates 36
Hot Water Coil
Size (W x H x L) mm 68 × 333 × 121
Cooling: 19.2 (1.2)
Water Flow Rate l/min (m3/h)
Heating: 20.1 (1.2)
Pressure Relief Valve Water Circuit kPa Open: 300, Close: 210 and below
Type VVX20 [Electronic pulse]
Flow Switch
Measuring range l/min 5 ~ 60
Pressure Release Valve kPa Open: 800, Close: 640 and below
Protection Device A Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (30 ~ 40)
Volume I 10
Expansion Vessel
MWP bar 3
Capacity of Integrated Electric Heater / OLP TEMP kW / °C 3.00 / 80
Tank Volume (Spec / Nett) L 200 / 185
Max. Tank Water Set Temperature °C 65
2
Tank Coil Surface m 1.8

Maximum Working Heat/Cool Bar 3.0

Pressure Tank Circuit Bar 8.0
Tank Unit Bar 3.5
Operating Pressure
Expansion Relief Valve Bar 8.0
Expansion Vessel Pre-charge Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5
Pressure Reducing Valve Set Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5

22
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
Material En-1.4521
Pressure Vessel Volume L 185
Design Pressure Bar 10
Material EN-1.4521
Diameter mm 22
Heat Exchanger Thickness mm 0.8
Surface Area m2 1.8
Total Length m 25

Note:
 Cooling capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 35°C Dry Bulb with controlled indoor water inlet
temperature of 12°C and water outlet temperature of 7°C.
 Heating capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 7°C Dry Bulb (44.6°F Dry Bulb), 6°C Wet Bulb
(42.8°F Wet Bulb) with controlled indoor water inlet temperature of 30°C and water outlet temperature of 35°C.
 Specifications are subjected to change without prior notice for further improvement.
 * Above 55°C, only possible with backup heater operation.
 ** Between outdoor ambient -10 °C and -15 °C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60 °C to
55 °C.
 *** The sound power level is measured with accordance to EN12102 under conditions of the EN14825.

23
3.4 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD09JE5
Item Unit Outdoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Condition
A35W7
(Ambient/Water)
kW 7.60
Cooling Capacity
BTU/h 25900
kcal/h 6540
W/W 2.90
Cooling EER
kcal/hW 2.50
Condition
A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
kW 9.00 7.00
Heating Capacity
BTU/h 30700 23900
kcal/h 7740 6020
W/W 4.48 3.40
Heating COP
kcal/hW 3.85 2.92
Low Temperature Application (W35)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Pdesign kW 7.0 7.0 7.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -10 / -10 -15 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 5.75 / 227 4.90 / 193 4.18 / 164
Annual Consumption kWh 1627 2949 4132
Class A++ A++ A++
Medium Temperature Application (W55)
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
Heating Erp
Pdesign kW 6.0 7.0 6.0
Tbivalent/TOL °C 2/2 -7 / -10 -15 / -22
SCOP/ns (W/W)/% 4.07 / 160 3.32 / 130 2.98 / 116
Annual Consumption kWh 1971 4354 4967
Class A++ A++ A+
DHW
Warmer Average Colder
Application Climate
COP/nwh (W/W)/% 3.50 / 140 3.00 / 120 2.47 / 99
AEC kWh 714 833 1013
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 50 Heating: 51
Heating: 69
Power Level dB Cooling: 68
Heating: 59***
Cooling: 55.0 (1942)
Air Flow m3/min (ft3/min)
Heating: 53.4 (1885)
Refrigeration Control Device Expansion Valve
Refrigeration Oil cm3 FW50S (900)
R32, 1.27 (44.8) (Pre-charged)
Refrigerant kg (oz)
R32, 2.27 (80.1) (Maximum)
GWP 675
F-GAS
CO2eq (ton) (Precharged/Maximum) 0.857 / 1.532
Height mm (inch) 795 (31-5/16)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 875 (34-15/32)
Depth mm (inch) 320 (12-5/8)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 61 (135)

24
 Item Unit Outdoor Unit
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 15.88 (5/8)
Standard Length m (ft) 7 (23.0)
Pipe Length Range m (ft) 3 (9.8) ~ 50 (164.0)
I/D & O/D Height Difference m (ft) 30 (98.4)
Additional Gas Amount g/m (oz/ft) 25 (0.3)
Refrigeration Charge Less m (ft) 10 (32.8)
Type Hermetic Motor
Compressor Motor Type Brushless (4-poles)
Rated Output kW 1.70
Type Propeller Fan
Material PP
Motor Type DC (8-poles)
Fan
Input Power W —
Output Power W 60
Cooling: 700
Fan Speed rpm
Heating: 680
Fin material Aluminium (Pre Coat)
Fin Type Corrugated Fin
Heat Exchanger
Row × Stage × FPI 2 × 30 × 19
Size (W × H × L) mm 38.1 × 762.0 × 865.8 : 895.8
Ø Single
Power Source (Phase, Voltage, Cycle) V 230
Hz 50
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Input Power (Ambient/Water)
kW Cooling: 2.62 Heating: 2.01 Heating: 2.06
Maximum Input Power For Heatpump System kW 3.47
Power Supply 1 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 15.9 / 3.47k
Power Supply 2 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) 1Ø / 13.0 / 3.00k
Power Supply 3 : Phase (Ø) / Max. Current (A) / Max. Input Power (W) —/—/—
Starting Current A 9.2
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Running Current (Ambient/Water)
A Cooling: 11.6 Heating: 9.2 Heating: 9.4
Maximum Current For Heatpump System A 15.9
Power Factor Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
Power factor means total figure of compressor and (Ambient/Water)
outdoor fan motor. % Cooling: 98 Heating: 95 Heating: 95
Number of core -
Power Cord
Length m (ft) -
Thermostat Electronic Control
Protection Device Electronic Control

25
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
EN 14511
Performance Test Condition
EN 14825
Cooling: 10 / 43
Outdoor Ambient °C (min./max.)
Heating: -20 / 35
Cooling: 5 / 20
Operation Range
Heating (Tank): - / 65*,
Water Outlet °C (min./max.)
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 55 (Below Ambient -15 °C) **
Heating (Circuit): 20 / 60 (Above Ambient -10 °C) **
Cooling: 20.0
Internal Pressure Differential kPa
Heating: 26.0
Condition
A35W7 A7W35 A2W35
(Ambient/Water)
Noise Level dB (A) Cooling: 28 Heating: 28
Power Level dB Cooling: 41 Heating: 41
Depth mm (inch) 717 (28-7/32)
Dimension Width mm (inch) 598 (23-17/32)
Height mm (inch) 1800 (70-27/32)
Net Weight kg (lbs) 122 (269)
Liquid mm (inch) 6.35 (1/4)
Refrigerant Pipe Diameter
Gas mm (inch) 15.88 (5/8)
Room mm (inch) 31 (1-1/4)
Water Pipe Diameter
Shower mm (inch) 19 (3/4)
Water Drain Hose Inner Diameter mm (inch) 12.00 (17/36)
Motor Type DC Motor
Pump
Input Power W 42
Type Brazed Plate
No. of Plates 36
Hot Water Coil
Size (W x H x L) mm 68 × 333 × 121
Cooling: 21.8 (1.3)
Water Flow Rate l/min (m3/h)
Heating: 25.8 (1.5)
Pressure Relief Valve Water Circuit kPa Open: 300, Close: 210 and below
Type VVX20 [Electronic pulse]
Flow Switch
Measuring range l/min 5 ~ 60
Pressure Release Valve kPa Open: 800, Close: 640 and below
Protection Device A Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker (30 ~ 40)
Volume I 10
Expansion Vessel
MWP bar 3
Capacity of Integrated Electric Heater / OLP TEMP kW / °C 3.00 / 80
Tank Volume (Spec / Nett) L 200 / 185
Max. Tank Water Set Temperature °C 65
2
Tank Coil Surface m 1.8

Maximum Working Heat/Cool Bar 3.0

Pressure Tank Circuit Bar 8.0
Tank Unit Bar 3.5
Operating Pressure
Expansion Relief Valve Bar 8.0
Expansion Vessel Pre-charge Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5
Pressure Reducing Valve Set Pressure (DHW Circuit) Bar 3.5

26
 Item Unit Indoor Unit
Material En-1.4521
Pressure Vessel Volume L 185
Design Pressure Bar 10
Material EN-1.4521
Diameter mm 22
Heat Exchanger Thickness mm 0.8
Surface Area m2 1.8
Total Length m 25

Note:
 Cooling capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 35°C Dry Bulb with controlled indoor water inlet
temperature of 12°C and water outlet temperature of 7°C.
 Heating capacities are based on outdoor air temperature of 7°C Dry Bulb (44.6°F Dry Bulb), 6°C Wet Bulb
(42.8°F Wet Bulb) with controlled indoor water inlet temperature of 30°C and water outlet temperature of 35°C.
 Specifications are subjected to change without prior notice for further improvement.
 * Above 55°C, only possible with backup heater operation.
 ** Between outdoor ambient -10 °C and -15 °C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60 °C to
55 °C.
 *** The sound power level is measured with accordance to EN12102 under conditions of the EN14825.

27
4. Features
 Inverter Technology
o Energy saving

 High Efficiency

 Environment Protection
o Non-ozone depletion substances refrigerant (R32)

 Long Installation Piping

o Long piping up to 25 meter (UD03/05JE5), 50 meter (UD07/09JE5) with height difference 20 meter (UD03/05JE5), 30
meter (UD07/09JE5)

 Easy to use control panel

o Auto mode
o Holiday mode
o Dry concrete function
o Weekly timer setting

 A-class energy efficiency pump

o Water pump speed can be set by selection at control panel

 Improved deice cycle

 Protection Feature
o Random auto restart after power failure for safety restart operation
o Gas leakage protection
o Prevent compressor reverse cycle
o Inner protector to protect compressor

 Serviceability Feature
o Breakdown Self Diagnosis function
o System Status Check Buttons for servicing purpose
o System Pumpdown Button for servicing purpose

28
5. Location of Controls and Components
5.1 Indoor Unit
5.1.1 Remote Controller buttons and display

Buttons / Indicator 3
Quick Menu button
1 (For more details, refer to the separate
Quick Menu Guide.)
Back button
2
Returns to the previous screen
3 LCD Display
Main Menu button
4
For function setup
ON/OFF button
5
Starts/Stops operation 4
2
Operation indicator
6 Illuminates during operation, blinks during
alarm.

1 5
6

Cross key buttons

Selects an item.
Up

Left Right

Press centre
Down
Enter button
Fixes the selected content.

No glove

No pen

29
 2 3 4

7
Display
1 Mode selection

*1, *2 AUTO • Depending on the preset outdoor *1, *2 COOL • COOL operation is either turned
temperature, the system selects ON or OFF.
HEAT or *1, *2 COOL operation • The outdoor unit provides cooling
mode. to the system.
Auto Heat Auto Cool
*1, *2 AUTO • Depending on the preset outdoor *1, *2 COOL • The outdoor unit provides cooling
+ TANK temperature, the system selects + TANK to the system.
HEAT + TANK or *1, *2 COOL + • The outdoor unit provides heating
TANK operation mode. when boiling tank.
Auto Heat Auto Cool
HEAT • HEAT operation is either turned TANK • TANK operation is either turned
ON or OFF. ON or OFF.
• The outdoor unit provides heat to • The outdoor unit provides heat to
the system. the water tank.
HEAT • The outdoor unit provides heat to * The direction icons point to the currently
+ TANK the water tank and the system. active mode.
• This mode can be selected only
when the water tank is installed. • Room operation / Tank operation.

• Deice operation.

2 Operation icons
The status of operation is displayed.
Icon will not display (under operation OFF screen) whenever operation is OFF except weekly timer.
Holiday operation status Weekly Timer operation status Quiet operation status
Zone: Room Thermostat Demand Control or
Powerful operation status
→Internal sensor status SG ready or SHP status
Room Heater status Tank Heater status Solar status
Bivalent status
(Boiler)
*1 The system is locked to operate without COOL mode. It can be unlocked only by authorised installers or our authorised service partners.
*2 Only displayed when COOL mode is unlocked (This means when COOL mode is available).

3 Temperature of each zone

4 Time and day
5 Water Tank temperature
6 Outdoor temperature
7 Sensor type/Set temperature type icons
Water Temperature Water Temperature
Pool only
→Compensation curve →Direct
Room Thermostat Room Thermostat
Room Thermistor
→External →Internal
30
5.1.2 Initialization

Before starting to install the various menu settings, please initiate the Remote Controller by selecting the language of
operation and installing the date and time correctly.
When power is turned on for the first time, it becomes the setting screen automatically. It can also be set from personal
setting of the menu.
Selecting the language LCD blinking
Wait while the display is initializing.
When initializing screen ends, it turns to
normal screen.
When any button is pressed, language
setting screen appears.

1 Scroll with and to select the language.

2 Press to confirm the selection.

Setting the clock

1 Select with or how to display the time,
either 24h or am/pm format (for example, 15:00
or 3:00 pm).

2 Press to confirm the selection.

3 Use and to select year, month, day, hour

and minutes. (Select and move with and
press to confirm.)

4 Once the time is set, time and day will appear

on the display even if the Remote Controller is
turned OFF.

31
5.1.3 Quick Menu

After the initial settings have been completed, you can select a quick menu from the following options and edit the setting.
1 Press to display the quick menu.

Force DHW Powerful Quiet Force Heater

Weekly Timer Force Defrost Error Reset R/C Lock

2 Use to select menu.

3 Press to turn on/off the select menu.

5.1.4 Menus (For user)

Select menus and determine settings according to the system

available in the household. All initial settings must be done by an
authorised dealer or a specialist. It is recommended that all alterations
of the initial settings are also done by an authorised dealer or a
specialist.
• After initial installation, you may manually adjust the settings.
• The initial setting remains active until the user changes it.
• The Remote Controller can be used for multiple installations.
• Ensure the operation indicator is OFF before setting.
• The system may not work properly if set wrongly.
Please consult an authorised dealer.

To display <Main Menu>:

To select menu:
To confirm the selected content:

Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

1 Function setup
1.1 Weekly timer
Once the weekly timer is set up, Timer setup
User can edit from Quick Menu. Select day of the week and
To set up to 6 patterns of set the patterns needed
operation on a daily basis. (Time / Operation ON/OFF / Mode)
• Disabled if Heat-Cool SW is Timer copy
select “Yes” or if Force Heater
is on. Select day of the week

32
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

1.2 Holiday timer

To save energy, a holiday OFF
period may be set to either turn
OFF the system or lower the ON
temperature during the period. Holiday start and end.
Date and time
OFF or lowered temperature
• Weekly timer setting may be temporarily disabled during Holiday timer setting
but it will be restored once the Holiday timer is completed.
1.3 Quiet timer
To operate quietly during the Time to start Quiet :
preset period. Date and time
6 patterns may be set.
Level 0 means the mode is off. Level of quietness:
0~3
1.4 Room heater
To set the room heater ON or
OFF
OFF.
1.5 Tank heater
To set the tank heater ON or
OFF
OFF.
1.6 Sterilization
To set the auto sterilization ON
ON
or OFF.
• Do not use the system during sterilization in order to prevent scalding with hot water, or overheating of shower.
• Ask an authorised dealer to determine the level of sterilization function field settings according to the local laws and
regulations.
1.7 DHW mode (Domestic Hot Water)
To set the DHW mode to
Standard or Smart.
• Standard mode have faster
DHW Tank heat up time. Standard
Meanwhile Smart mode
take longer time to heat up
DHW time with lower energy
consumption.
To set the tank sensor to Top
or Center.
• Selection of the tank sensor
to top slow down the start of
boiling up the tank and reduce Top
power consumption.
Please change this selection
to “Center” when the hot water
becomes insufficient.

33
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

2 System check
2.1 Energy monitor
Present or historical chart of Present
energy consumption, generation Select and retrieve
or COP. Historical chart
Select and retrieve
• COP= Coefficient of Performance.
• For historical chart, the period is selected from 1 day/1 week/1year.
• Energy consumption (kWh) of heating, *1, *2 cooling, tank and total may be
retrieved.
• The total power consumption is an estimated value based on AC 230 V and
may differ from value measured by precise equipment.
2.2 System information
Shows all system information in Actual system information of 10 items:
each area. Inlet / Outlet / Zone 1 / Zone 2 / Tank /
Buffer tank / Solar / Pool / COMP
frequency / Pump flowrate
Select and retrieve
2.3 Error history
• Refer to Troubleshooting for
error codes.
• The most recent error code is Select and retrieve
displayed at the top.

2.4 Compressor
Shows the compressor
performance.
Select and retrieve

2.5 Heater
Total hours of ON time for
Room heater/Tank heater.
Select and retrieve

3 Personal setup
3.1 Touch sound
Turns the operation sound ON/
ON
OFF.
3.2 LCD contrast
Sets the screen contrast.

*1 The system is locked to operate without COOL mode. It can be unlocked only by authorised installers or our authorised service partners.
*2 Only displayed when COOL mode is unlocked (This means when COOL mode is available).

34
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

3.3 Backlight
Sets the duration of screen
backlight.
1 min

3.4 Backlight intensity

Sets screen backlight
brightness.
4

3.5 Clock format

Sets the type of clock display.

24h

3.6 Date & Time

Sets the present date and time.

Year / Month / Day / Hour / Min

3.7 Language
Sets the display language for ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / DEUTSCH /
the top screen. ITALIANO / ESPAÑOL / DANISH /
SWEDISH / NORWEGIAN /
• For Greek, please refer to the POLISH / CZECH / NEDERLANDS /
English version. TÜRKÇE / SUOMI / MAGYAR /
SLOVENŠČINA / HRVATSKI
3.8 Unlock password
4 digit password for all the
settings.
0000

4 Service contact
4.1 Contact 1 / Contact 2
Preset contact number for
installer.
Select and retrieve

35
5.1.5 Menus (For installer)

Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

5 Installer setup System setup

5.1 Optional PCB connectivity
To connect to the external PCB
No
required for servicing.
• If the external PCB is connected (optional), the system will have following additional functions:
1 Buffer tank connection and control over its function and temperature.
2 Control over 2 zones (including the swimming pool and the function to heat water in it).
3 Solar function (the solar thermal panels connected to either the DHW (Domestic Hot Water) Tank or the Buffer Tank.
• DHW is not applicable for WH-ADC *models.
4 External compressor switch.
5 External error signal.
6 SG ready control.
7 Demand control.
8 Heat-Cool SW

5.2 Zone & Sensor

To select the sensors and to Zone
select either 1 zone or 2 zone • After selecting 1 or 2 zone system, proceed
system. to the selection of room or swimming pool.
• If the swimming pool is selected, the
temperature must be selected for
T temperature between 0°C ~ 10 °C.
Sensor

* For room thermostat, there is a further

selection of external or internal.

5.3 Heater capacity

To reduce the heater power if
unnecessary.*
3 kW / 6 kW / 9kW

* Options of kW vary depending

on the model.
5.4 Anti freezing
To activate or deactivate the
water freeze prevention when Yes
the system is OFF
5.5 DHW capacity
To select tank heating capacity
to variable or standard. Variable
capacity heat up tank with
fast mode and keep the tank Variable
temperature with efficient mode.
While standard capacity heat up
tank with rated heating capacity.

36
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

5.6 Buffer tank connection

To connect tank to the system No
and if selected YES, to set
T temperature. Yes
• The optional PCB connectivity
must be selected YES to
enable the function.
• If the optional PCB Set T for Buffer
5 °C
connectivity is not selected, Tank
the function will not appear on
the display.
5.7 Base pan heater
To select whether or not No
optional base pan heater is
connected. Yes
* Type A - The base pan heater
activates only during
deice operation.
* Type B - The base pan heater Set base pan heater
A
activates when outdoor type*.
ambient temperature is
5 °C or lower.
5.8 Alternative outdoor sensor
To select an alternative outdoor
No
sensor.
5.9 Bivalent connection
To select to enable or disable
No
bivalent connection.
Yes
To select either auto control
pattern or SG ready input
control pattern.
Auto
* This selection only display
to select when optional pcb
connection set to Yes.

37
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

To select a bivalent connection Yes Auto

to allow an additional heat
source such as a boiler to heat- Set outdoor
up the buffer tank and domestic temperature for
-5 °C
hot water tank when heatpump turn ON Bivalent
capacity is insufficient at low connection.
outdoor temperature. The
bivalent feature can be set-up Yes After selecting the outdoor temperature
either in alternative mode Control pattern
(heatpump and boiler operate Alternative / Parallel / Advanced parallel
alternately), or in parallel
mode (both heatpump and • Select advanced parallel for bivalent use of
boiler operate simultaneously), the tanks.
or in advance parallel mode
(heatpump operates and boiler Control pattern Alternative
turns on for buffer-tank and/or
Option to set external
domestic hot water depending
pump either ON or
on the control pattern setting
OFF during bivalent
options). OFF
operation. Set to ON
if system is simple
bivalent connection.
Control pattern Advanced parallel
Heat Selection of the tank

• “Heat” implies Buffer Tank and “DHW”

implies Domestic Hot Water Tank.

Control pattern Advanced parallel Heat Yes

• Buffer Tank is activated only after selecting

“Yes”.

Set the temperature

-8 °C threshold to start the
bivalent heat source.

Delay timer to start

the bivalent heat
0:30
source
(in hour and minutes).

Set the temperature

-2 °C threshold to stop the
bivalent heat source.

38
 Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

Delay timer to stop

the bivalent heat
0:30
source
(in hour and minutes).

Control pattern Advanced parallel DHW Yes

• DHW Tank is activated only after selecting

“Yes”.

Delay timer to start

the bivalent heat
0:30
source
(in hour and minutes).

SG ready input control for Yes SG ready

bivalent system follow below
input condition.
SG signal Operation pattern Option to set external
Vcc-bit1 Vcc-bit2 pump either ON or
Heat Pump OFF,
Open Open
Boiler OFF OFF during bivalent
OFF
Short Open
Heat Pump ON, operation. Set to ON
Boiler OFF if system is simple
Heat Pump OFF,
Open Short
Boiler ON
bivalent connection.
Heat Pump ON,
Short Short
Boiler ON

5.10 External SW

No

5.11 Solar connection

• The optional PCB connectivity
No
must be selected YES to
enable the function.
Yes
• If the optional PCB
connectivity is not selected,
the function will not appear on
the display. Buffer tank Selection of the tank
• DHW is not applicable for
WH-ADC *models.
Yes After selecting the tank

Set T ON
10 °C
temperature

39
 Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

Yes After selecting the tank T ON temperature

Set T OFF
5 °C
temperature

Yes After selecting the tank T ON temperature T OFF temperature

Set Antifreeze
5 °C
temperature

Yes After selecting the tank T ON temperature T OFF temperature

After setting the antifreeze temperature

80 °C Set Hi limit

5.12 External error signal

No

5.13 Demand control

No

5.14 SG ready

No

Yes

Capacity (1) & (2)

of DHW (in %),
120 %
Heat (in %) and
Cool (in °C)

5.15 External compressor SW

No

5.16 Circulation liquid

To select whether to circulate
water or glycol in the system.
Water

40
 Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

5.17 Heat-Cool SW

No

5.18 Force heater

To turn on Force heater either
manually (by default) or
automatically. Manual

5.19 Force defrost

If auto selection is set, outdoor
unit will start defrost operation
Manual
if long heating hour operate
during low outdoor temperature.
5.20 Defrost signal
To turn on defrost signal to stop
fan coil during defrost operation.
(If defrost signal set to yes, No
bivalent function will not
available to use)
5.21 Pump flowrate
To set variable flow pump
control or fix pump duty control. T

6 Installer setup Operation setup

To access to the four major
functions or modes. 4 main modes

Heat / *1, *2 Cool / *1, *2 Auto / Tank

6.1 Heat
To set various water & ambient
temperatures for heating. Water temp. for heating ON /
Outdoor temp. for heating OFF /
T for heating ON /
Heater ON/OFF

Water temp. for heating ON

Heating ON
temperatures in
Compensation curve
compensation curve
or direct input.

*1 The system is locked to operate without COOL mode. It can be unlocked only by authorised installers or our authorised service partners.
*2 Only displayed when COOL mode is unlocked (This means when COOL mode is available).

41
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

Water temp. for heating ON Compensation curve

Input the 4
temperature points
X axis: -5 °C, 15 °C
(2 on horizontal X
Y axis: 55 °C, 35 °C
axis, 2 on vertical Y
axis).
• Temperature range: X axis: -20 °C ~ 15 °C, Y axis: See below
• Temperature range for the Y axis input:
1. WH-UD model: 20 °C ~ 60 °C
2. WH-UH model & Back up heater is enabled: 25 °C ~ 65 °C
3. WH-UH model & Back up heater is disabled: 35 °C ~ 65 °C
4. WH-UX model: 20 °C ~ 60 °C
• If 2 zone system is selected, the 4 temperature points must also be input for Zone
2.
• “Zone 1” and “Zone 2” will not appear on the display if only 1 zone system.
Water temp. for heating ON Direct

Temperature for
35 °C
heating ON

• Min. ~ Max. range is conditional as follows:

1. WH-UD model: 20 °C ~ 60 °C
2. WH-UH model & Back up heater is enabled: 25 °C ~ 65 °C
3. WH-UH model & Back up heater is disabled: 35 °C ~ 65 °C
4. WH-UX model: 20 °C ~ 60 °C
• If 2 zone system is selected, temperature set point must input for Zone 2.
• “Zone 1” and “Zone 2” will not appear on the display if only 1 zone system.
Outdoor temp. for heating OFF

Temperature for
24 °C
heating OFF

T for heating ON
Set T for heating
ON.
* This setting will not
5 °C
available to set when
pump flowrate set to
Max. duty.
Heater ON/OFF
Heater ON/OFF Outdoor temp. for heater ON

Temperature for
0 °C
heater ON

42
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

Heater ON/OFF Delay time for heater ON

Delay time for heater

0:30 min
to turn on

Heater ON/OFF Water temperature for heater ON

Setting of water
temperature to turn
-4 °C
on from water set
temperature.

Heater ON/OFF Water temperature for heater OFF

Setting of water
temperature to turn
-2 °C
off from water set
temperature.

6.2 *1, *2 Cool

To set various water & ambient Water temperatures for cooling ON
temperatures for cooling. and T for cooling ON.

Water temp. for cooling ON

Cooling ON
temperatures in
Compensation curve
compensation curve
or direct input.

Water temp. for cooling ON Compensation curve

Input the 4
temperature points
X axis: 20 °C, 30 °C
(2 on horizontal X
Y axis: 15 °C, 10 °C
axis, 2 on vertical Y
axis)
• If 2 zone system is selected, the 4 temperature points must also be input for Zone
2.
• “Zone 1” and “Zone 2” will not appear on the display if only 1 zone system.

*1 The system is locked to operate without COOL mode. It can be unlocked only by authorised installers or our authorised service partners.
*2 Only displayed when COOL mode is unlocked (This means when COOL mode is available).

43
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

Water temp. for cooling ON Direct

Set temperature for

10 °C
Cooling ON

• If 2 zone system is selected, temperature set point must input for Zone 2.
• “Zone 1” and “Zone 2” will not appear on the display if only 1 zone system.
T for cooling ON
Set T for cooling ON
* This setting will not
5 °C available to set when
pump flowrate set to
Max. duty.
6.3 *1, *2 Auto
Automatic switch from Heat to Outdoor temperatures for switching from Heat
Cool or Cool to Heat. to Cool or Cool to Heat.

Outdoor temp. for (Heat to Cool) /

Outdoor temp. for (Cool to Heat)

Outdoor temp. for (Heat to Cool)

Set outdoor
temperature for
15 °C
switching
from Heat to Cool.

Outdoor temp. for (Cool to Heat)

Set outdoor
temperature for
10 °C
switching
from Cool to Heat.

6.4 Tank
Setting functions for the tank.
Floor operation time (max) /
Tank heat up time (max) /
Tank re-heat temp. /
Sterilization

• The display will show 3 functions at a time.

Floor operation time (max)

Maximum time for

8:00 floor operation
(in hours and minutes)

*1 The system is locked to operate without COOL mode. It can be unlocked only by authorised installers or our authorised service partners.
*2 Only displayed when COOL mode is unlocked (This means when COOL mode is available).

44
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

Tank heat up time (max)

Maximum time for

1:00 heating the tank
(in hours and minutes)

Tank re-heat temp.

Set temperature to
-8 °C perform reboil of tank
water.

Sterilization
Sterilization may be
set for 1 or more days
of the week.
Monday
Sun / Mon / Tue /
Wed / Thu / Fri / Sat
Sterilization: Time
Time of the selected
day(s) of the week to
12:00 sterilize the tank

0:00 ~ 23:59

Sterilization: Boiling temp.

Set boiling
65 °C temperatures for
sterilize the tank.

Sterilization: Ope. time (max)

Set sterilizing time

0:10
(in hours and minutes)

7 Installer setup Service setup

7.1 Pump maximum speed
To set the maximum speed of Setting the flow rate, max. duty and operation
the pump. ON/OFF of the pump.
Flow rate: XX:X L/min
Max. Duty: 0x40 ~ 0xFE,
Pump: ON/OFF/Air Purge

45
Menu Default Setting Setting Options / Display

7.2 Pump down

To set the pump down Pump down operation
operation.

ON

7.3 Dry concrete

To dry the concrete (floor, walls, Edit to set the temperature of dry concrete.
etc.) during construction.

Do not use this menu for any ON / Edit

other purposes and in period
other than during construction
Edit
Heating temperature
for drying the
Stages: 1 concrete.
Temperature: 25 °C Select the desired
stages: 1 ~ 10,
range: 1 ~ 99
ON
Confirm the setting temperatures of dry
concrete for each stage.

7.4 Service contact

To set up to 2 contact names
Service engineer’s name and contact number.
and numbers for the User.

Contact 1 / Contact 2

Contact 1 / Contact 2
Contact name or number.

Name / phone icon

Input name and number

Contact name: alphabet a ~ z.

Contact number: 1 ~ 9

46
5.1.6 Main Components

16 e f

11
13

9 10
7 1 8
14

15
4

17
20 5-1
5-2 19 h b a d g c

18

6
2
12

21

i
1 Remote Controller 11 Air Purge Valve Connector name
2 Water Pump 12 Pressure Relief Valve a Water Inlet (From Space

3 Control Board Cover 13 Flow Sensor Heating / Cooling)

b Water Outlet (To Space
4 Main PCB 14 Water Pressure Gauge
Heating / Cooling)
5-1 Single Phase RCCB/ELCB 15 Front Plate c Cold Water Inlet (Domestic
(Main Power) 16 Top Plate Hot Water Tank)
5-2 Single Phase RCCB/ELCB 17 Right Plate d Hot Water Outlet (Domestic
(Backup Heater) 18 Left Plate Hot Water Tank)
e Refrigerant Gas
6 Magnetic Water Filter Set 19 Rear Plate
f Refrigerant Liquid
7 Heater Assembly 20 Tank Sensor (Not Visible) g Domestic Hot Water Tank
8 3-Way Valve 21 Safety Relief Valve Discharge (Drain Tap)
9 Overload Protector (Not Visible) Type: Ball Valve
h Pressure Relief Valve Drainage
10 Expansion Vessel
i Drain Water Hole

47
5.2 Outdoor Unit
Air inlet (rear)

Air inlet (side)

Air outlet

UD03_05JE5

Air inlet (rear)

Air inlet (side)

Air outlet

UD07_09JE5

48
6. Dimensions
6.1 Indoor Unit

598 717
295
167

Temperature
and Pressure
Relief Valve
1800

1332
234
230

FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW

269
51 496 51 204
102

141
544

Adjustable
Feet [1]
position
74

BOTTOM VIEW TOP VIEW

Unit: mm

49
6.2 Outdoor Unit
6.2.1 WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5

<Top View>
Space necessary for
824 68.5
installation
21.9 (124) 540 160 53.4

32
100 mm

100 mm

97
167
1000 mm

330
Anchor Bolt Pitch
540 x 330

<Side View> <Side View>

<Front View> 37 298

622
69 61
(23)

Unit: mm

50
6.2.2 WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5

<Top View>
Space necessary for
875 70
installation

38
27.5 131 613 131
100 mm

82
152
100 mm

360.5
1000 mm

Anchor Bolt Pitch

360.5 × 613

<Side View>
59 320
<Side View> <Front View>

795
64

75
25
70

3-way valve at Gas side

(Low Pressure)
Unit :mm 2-way valve at Liquid side
(High Pressure)

51
7. Refrigeration and Water Cycle Diagram
OUTDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT

AIR PURGE FLOOR HEATING

VALVE WATER OUTLET

3-WAY
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
VALVE
WATER OUTLET
TEMP. SENSOR
EXPANSION LIQUID
STRAINER VALVE STRAINER SIDE FLOW SWITCH
MUFFLER BACKUP HEATER
(UD03/05JE5) SANITARY HOT
RECEIVER REFRIGERANT WATER OUTLET
2-WAY TEMP. HEX WATER OUTLET
(UD07/09JE5)
VALVE SENSOR TEMP. SENSOR
PIPE TEMP.
SENSOR
WATER TANK
TEMP.
WATER TANK SENSOR 2
AIR TEMP.
HEAT EXCHANGER TEMP.
SENSOR
SENSOR 1
WATER TANK

HEAT EXCHANGER

WATER INLET
TEMP. SENSOR PRESSURE
EVA. GAUGE
EXIT
TEMP.
SENSOR GAS EXPANSION
SIDE VESSEL
CAPILLARY SANITARY COLD
TUBE WATER INLET
HIGH PRESSURE 4-WAY VALVE
SENSOR HIGH PRESSURE 3-WAY WATER
SWITCH VALVE DISCHARGE
WATER PUMP VALVE

DISCHARGE DISCHARGE
TEMP. SHUT SHUT
MUFFLER VALVE VALVE
SENSOR FILTER FLOOR HEATING
TANK TEMP. WATER INLET
SENSOR
(UD07/09JE5 ONLY)

COMPRESSOR

Model Piping size Rated Length (m) Min. Max.

Pre-charged Max Additional
For Heat For Piping Piping
Refrigerant Elevation Refrigerant
Tank Unit Outdoor Unit Gas Liquid Pump Hydromodule Length Length
(kg) (m) (g/m)
Indoor Unit + Tank (m) (m)
WH-UD03JE5
Ø12.70 mm Ø6.35 mm
and 0.90 7 7 20 3 25 20
(1/2") (1/4")
WH-UD05JE5
ADC0309*
WH-UD07JE5
Ø15.88 mm Ø6.35 mm
and 1.27 7 7 30 3 50 25
(5/8") (1/4")
WH-UD09JE5

Example: WH-UD03JE5
If piping length is 15m, the quantity of additional refrigerant should be 100g. [(15-10)m x 20 g/m = 100g]

52
 8.1
8. Block Diagram

INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT

FUSE1 SUB
ELCB
FUSE3
L
RY-V2 RY-V3 REACTOR
N SSR1 SSR200 SSR201 SSR202 SSR203 SSR204 SSR205 SSR206 SSR207 1
SC M
FUSE1 SEN1 FUSE8 FUSE6
POWER SUPPLY 1

WATER
PUMP
CIRCUIT

NOISE FILTER
1-phase WATER M M IC19
PUMP 1~ M M M M M M M
AC230V 50Hz 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~

2-WAYS 3-WAYS EXTRA WATER WATER POOL SOLAR MIXING MIXING MS MS

VALVE VALVE PUMP PUMP PUMP WATER WATER VALVE VALVE
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 TH1 3~ 3~
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 PUMP PUMP SC
NTC
WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD05JE5
WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5

NOISE FILTER
2
4-WAYS

53
VALVE
FUSE5

RY-HT (L3) PTC

3 PTC2 RY-AC

BACKUP HEATER RY-PWR

ELCB
RY-BOOSTER
L
BOOSTER HEATER
N

POWER SUPPLY 2
1-phase
AC230V 50Hz
 8.2

INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT

NTC

FUSE1 SUB
ELCB
L FUSE
RY-V2 RY-V3 PTC REACTOR
N SSR1 SSR200 SSR201 SSR202 SSR203 SSR204 SSR205 SSR206 SSR207
SC M
POWER SUPPLY 1 FUSE

WATER
PUMP
CIRCUIT

NOISE FILTER
1-phase WATER M M 1
PUMP 1~ M M M M M M M
AC230V 50Hz 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1~
NTC
RY-HT2 RY-HOT
2-WAYS 3-WAYS EXTRA WATER WATER POOL SOLAR MIXING MIXING M
VALVE VALVE PUMP PUMP PUMP WATER WATER VALVE VALVE NOISE
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 FILTER U
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 PUMP PUMP

SC
4 WAY
WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5
WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD09JE5

CR3
VALVE MS
2
BASE PAN
3~

54
HEATER

RY-HT (L3)
3

BACKUP HEATER

ELCB
RY-BOOSTER
L
BOOSTER HEATER
N

POWER SUPPLY 2
1-phase
AC230V 50Hz
 RED WHITE OLP
9.1
80±3°C
BL
ELCB
BL (L1 )
(N1 )

1 1 230V 30A~40A
REACTOR
R R I n=30mA

POWER SUPPLY 2
LEAD WIRE FIXING FOR HEATER
W W G 2 2 W

Single phase AC230V 50Hz

2 1 BL GROUNDING
2 1 W
ELCB
Indoor Unit

W W
(L) BL
L2 L1 G03 BL
(WHT) (WHT) (GRN) A B TERMINAL BOARD
(N) W

(BLK)

(RED)
(WHT)

AC2-L3

HT1-L3
AC2-N2
FUSE1 FUSE3 W
230V 30A~40A T3.15A L250V
BL AC1-L3 T6.3A L250V NOISE
I n=30mA RECTIFICATION
(BLK) FILTER BACKUP HEATER (3kW)

POWER SUPPLY 1
CIRCUIT

RY-HT (L3)
NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT CN6
W AC1-N CIRCUIT

Single phase AC230V 50Hz

(WHT) SIGNAL OLP BOOSTER
GROUNDING DETECTION HEATER
CIRCUIT
TERMINAL ROOM TEMP.
BOARD ZONE1
G01
1 G (GRN)
(BL) CN5
2 OUTDOOR AIR
(W) COMMUNICATION SW1 SW2 SENSOR
CIRCUIT
3 R DATA
(R) (RED) TANK
G G02 SENSOR
(GRN)

TO OUTDOOR UNIT
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER
NOISE CN4
9. Wiring Connection Diagram

FILTER
(MAIN)
GROUNDING RECTIFICATION EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT CONTROL 1
W 7 7 W 1
BLUE BL BL 4 BL
4 4
BLUE WATER M R 3 3 R 5 WATER CONTROL
PUMP BR 2 2 BR 6 PUMP BL PANEL
BLACK B 1 1 B 7 CIRCUIT
CN-PUMP1

55
(WHT) CN3
BLACK RY-CONTACT1
BOILER CONTACT / DEFROST SIGNAL
SSR1
MIXING MIXING EXTRA PUMP
ROOM THERMO 2 ROOM THERMO 1 VALVE 1 VALVE 2
LEAD WIRE FIXING FOR OLP N OPEN CLOSE N OPEN CLOSE
L N COOL HEAT L N COOL HEAT
OLP
80±3°C
1 B
CN-OLP 1
ACN (WHT) 2 B

RY-V2
RY-V3
CN209 CN201 CN202 CN203 (WHT) W 3
1 BR
POOL WATER ACL BL W
SSR202 1 CN-PWR CN-FLWSEN B FLOW
PUMP (BLK) (BLK)
SIGNAL SIGNAL (WHT) BL SENSOR
DETECTION DETECTION W 5 4
SOLAR WATER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 1
SSR203 W CN-CNT 1
PUMP 3 (WHT) t˚ WATER OUTLET TEMP. SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
CN-TH1

(YLW)
W
W (WHT) t˚ REFRIGERANT TEMP. SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
1 SIGNAL
ERROR 4 t˚

SSR204
SSR205
SSR206
SSR207
DETECTION WATER INLET TEMP. SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
SIGNAL RY1 CIRCUIT 6
1 W 1 CN-PWR2
CN-TH3 1 t˚ HEX WATER OUTLET TEMP. SENSOR
CN208 2 W 2 (BLU)

(YLW)
(WHT) 2 (THERMISTOR)
WATER PUMP

CN-PWR202 CN-COMM
ZONE 1 SSR200 1 W 2 CN-PWR4 1
CN-TH2 t˚ TANK TEMP. SENSOR 1 (THERMISTOR)
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER CN-PWR204 2
(YLW) W 1 (BLK) (WHT) t˚ TANK TEMP. SENSOR 2 (THERMISTOR)
(SUB) 3 4
WATER PUMP
ZONE 2 SSR201 DCN
(BLU) B 3 CN-PWR3
1 DCP (GRN)
CN-CNT (RED) R 1
(WHT) CN205 CN204 CN207 CN206 CN210
5
N

CLOSE
OPEN

CN1 CN2

VCC BIT2 BIT1 REMARKS:

BR BL B
DC DC W : WHITE BR : BROWN
GND 10V CLOSE OPEN N HEAT COOL N L
O : ORANGE G : GREEN
2-WAY ROOM THERMO 1

ZONE2

ZONE 1

ZONE 2
M R : RED GR : GRAY

ZONE 1
SWITCH

SENSOR
SENSOR

SENSOR
VALVE
EXTERNAL 1~
COMP. SW
B : BLUE Y/G : YELLOW/GREEN

SG SIGNAL

SIGNAL
HEAT/COOL

POOL TEMP.
DEMAND

ROOM TEMP.

ROOM TEMP.
SOLAR TEMP.
OPTIONAL

BUFFER TANK
BL : BLACK ELCB : EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER

WATER TEMP.
WATER TEMP.
3-WAY Y : YELLOW
VALVE
9.2 Outdoor Unit
9.2.1 WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5
TO INDOOR UNIT
REACTOR

GRY GRY
TERMINAL 1 2 3
BOARD (BLACK) (WHITE) (RED) RAT2 RAT1 OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER (GRY) (GRY) (THERMISTOR)
1
t°
DATA (RED) CN-TH1
RED (WHT)
t°
FUSE8 COMMUNICATION 4
PIPING TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NOISE FILTER T3.15A CIRCUIT (THERMISTOR)
AC-BLK FUSE1 CIRCUIT L250V
BLK (BLK) (20A 250V)
EVAPORATOR EXIT
CN-TH3 1 TEMPERATURE SENSOR
WHT AC-WHT (WHT) RECTIFICATION (YLW) 2
CIRCUIT (THERMISTOR)
t°
GRN FG1 (GRN) FUSE6 FUSE5
(20A 250V) (20A 250V) 1
SWITCHING
GRN FG2 (GRN) POWER SUPPLY CN-STM1 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COIL
CIRCUIT (WHT) M (EXPANSION VALVE)

PFC RECTIFICATION
OPTIONAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 1
RY-HT2 CN-HOT ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
1 BLU HT2 (BLU) (WHT) COIL (4-WAY VALVE)
FUSE3 3
3 BLU ACN2 (BLU) T3.15A
L250V
BASE PAN
HEATER CN-MTR2 Q1
(WHT)
1 10
W U(RED) RED
FAN MS 3 P U
MOTOR
3~
U
V
V(BLU) BLU MS COMPRESSOR
14
5
V
W
W(YLW) YLW 3~
YELLOW (YLW) 16 N
IC19

BLUE (BLU) RED (RED) 1 BLK

CN-MTR1 1 1
CN-HPS HIGH PRESSURE
(RED) WHT 2
(TRADEMARK) (RED) 3 3
SENSOR
3
COMPRESSOR TERMINAL 4
RED
THE PARENTHESIZED LETTERS ARE
INDICATED ON TERMINAL COVER. RED
CN-PSW 1
(WHT) 2 HIGH PRESSURE
SWITCH
RED
REMARKS;
BLACK: (BLK) BLUE: (BLU) CN-DIS 1 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
WHITE: (WHT) RED: (RED) (WHT) 2 SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
YELLOW: (YLW) GRAY: (GRY) t°
GREEN: (GRN) BROWN: (BRW)
ORANGE: (ORG)
YELLOW/GREEN: (YLW/GRN)

Resistance of Compressor Windings

MODEL WH-UD03JE5 / WH-UD05JE5
CONNECTION 9RD138ZAB21
U-V 2.215 Ω
V-W 2.194 Ω
U-W 2.208 Ω
Note: Resistance at 20°C of ambient temperature.

56
9.2.2 WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5
YELLOW REMARKS:
BLU : BLUE
REACTOR BLK : BLACK
WHT : WHITE
BLUE RED RED : RED
GRY BLK YLW : YELLOW
2 1 TRADEMARK GRY : GRAY
2 1 GRN : GREEN
COMP. TERMINAL ORG : ORANGE
GRN GRY BLK
FG1
(GREEN) L2-I L2-O
ACL1 (GRAY) (BLACK)
BLK (BLACK) Q10 COMPRESSOR
CN-BLK AC-BLK (RED) U
P U RED 1 1 RED
(BLACK) BLK (BLACK)
TERMINAL FUSE3 (BLUE) V BLU 2 2 BLU
(25A 250V) V MS
BOARD NOISE FILTER
ACN1 CIRCUIT CN-WHT AC-WHT (YELLOW) W YLW 3 3 YLW 3~
W
N
WHT (WHITE) (WHITE) WHT (WHITE)
1
TO INDOOR UNIT

(BLK)
2 FUSE2 RED
(WHT) COM3 CN-PSW 1 HIGH
COMMUNICATION T3.15A (WHITE) 2 PRESSURE
3 RED (RED) L250V RED SWITCH
CIRCUIT
(RED) WHT RECTIFICATION
1 1

(YELLOW)

(YELLOW)
CIRCUIT

CN-COM

CN-COM
WHT
PFC 1 RED
WHT
CIRCUIT 4 BLK
4
WHT
4 CN-FM WHT M FAN MOTOR
CONTROL (WHITE) BLU
BOARD ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER FUSE1 YLW
7
YLW/GRN (NOISE FILTER) T2.5A L250V
OUTDOOR AIR TEMP. SENSOR
(THERMISTOR)
1
CN-TH1 t
CONTROL CABINET CN-HT2 (WHITE) t
SWITCHING
BOARD SIDE
BASE PAN 1 (BLACK) RY-HT2
RECTIFICATION POWER 4
PIPING TEMP. SENSOR
PLATE SUPPLY
HEATER CIRCUIT (THERMISTOR)
OPTIONAL 3 CIRCUIT
CN-TANK 1 COMP. TEMPERATURE
(WHITE) t SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
RY-HOT 3
BLK 1
HIGH 1 CN-TH3 1 EVA. EXIT TEMP. SENSOR
PRESSURE 2 WHT CN-HPS (YELLOW) t (THERMISTOR)
SENSOR 3 (RED) 2
3 ELECTRONIC CR3
RED 4 CONTROLLER
1
(MAIN)
CN-EV ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
DISCHARGE TEMP. SENSOR
t
1 CN-DIS (WHITE)
M COIL
(THERMISTOR) (EXPANSION VALVE)
2 (WHITE)
6
CN-HOT
(BLUE) 1

3 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COIL
(4-WAYS VALVE)

Resistance of Compressor Windings

MODEL WH-UD07JE5 / WH-UD09JE5
CONNECTION 9KD240XBB21
U-V 0.720 Ω
U-W 0.726 Ω
V-W 0.708 Ω
Note: Resistance at 20°C of ambient temperature.

57
 RED WHITE OLP
80±3°C
BL
ELCB

BL (L 1 )

(N 1 )

1 1 230V 30A~40A
REACTOR I n=30mA
R R
POWER SUPPLY 2
LEAD WIRE FIXING FOR HEATER
W W G 2 2 W
Single phase AC230V 50Hz

2 1 BL GROUNDING
W
2 1
ELCB W W
(L) BL
L2 L1 G03 BL
10.1 Indoor Unit

(WHT) (WHT) (GRN) A B TERMINAL BOARD

(N) W

(BLK)
12V

(RED)
(WHT)

AC2-L3
AC2-N2

HT1-L3
5V
FUSE 1 FUSE 3 5V W
230V 30A~40A T6.3A L250V T3.15A L250V
BL AC1-L3 NOISE C121
I n=30mA
FILTER RECTIFICATION 1u CN6
(BLK) BACKUP HEATER (3kW)

POWER SUPPLY 1
RY-HT (L3)
NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT R143 R141
W AC1-N 6.49k 6.49k OLP BOOSTER

Single phase AC230V 50Hz

2
(WHT) SIGNAL HEATER

GROUNDING DETECTION 3
R94 CIRCUIT
ROOM TEMP.
4
TERMINAL C65 C89 ZONE 1
BOARD 5V 1u
G01
1 G2 CN5
G (GRN)
(BL) A B 4
OUTDOOR AIR
2 SW1 C98 3 SENSOR
(W) COMMUNICATION SW2 1u
R95
CIRCUIT 2
3 R DATA G2 TANK
(R) (RED) 1 SENSOR

G G02

TO OUTDOOR UNIT
(GRN)
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER G2 CN4
5V
1
NOISE (MAIN) R1 EXTERNAL
GROUNDING RECTIFICATION FILTER PC1 10k
4 1 2 CONTROL 1
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT R25
W 7 7 W 1
1k 3 2 C123 3 BL
BLUE CONTROL
BL 4 4 BL 4 ZD2 1u
BLUE WATER M 3 C31 4 BL PANEL
R 3 R 5 WATER R24
PUMP BR 2 2 BR 6 PUMP 0.01u 10k
BLACK B 1 1 B 7 CIRCUIT
C93
CN-PUMP1 100p
(WHT)
10. Electronic Circuit Diagram

BLACK CN3
RY-CONTACT1

BOILER CONTACT / DEFROST SIGNAL

SSR1

EXTRA PUMP

58
LEAD WIRE FIXING FOR OLP

12V CN-OLP1 OLP

MIXING MIXING (WHT)
80±3°C
ROOM THERMO 2 ROOM THERMO 1 VALVE 1 VALVE 2
1 B
N OPEN CLOSE N OPEN CLOSE
L N COOL HEAT L N COOL HEAT

RY-V2
RY-V3
5V 2 B

5V
CN-FLWSEN
12V 5V_2
(WHT)
ACN C88 C91
CN201 CN202 CN203 (WHT) W 3 1u 220u 1 BR
CN209
L3 L4 5V C92 W
B FLOW
POOL WATER ACL BL 0.1u
SSR202 1 CN-PWR SENSOR
PUMP (BLK) (BLK) G2 BL
SIGNAL SIGNAL R130 4
C222 C221 C48 SIGNAL
DETECTION DETECTION CN-COMM *C57 R81 R86 10k
1000p 1000p 0.1u DETECTION
SOLAR WATER CIRCUIT CIRCUIT (YLW) W 10k 10k *R166 R128 R132 R135 R139 R140
SSR203 5 CIRCUIT
PUMP 1 820 20k 820 20k 20k 20k
W CN-TH1
5V
W 3 (WHT)

SSR204
SSR205
SSR206
SSR207
ERROR C61 C63
W
SIGNAL RY1 1000p 1000p 1
4 1 t˚
+ C282 WATER OUTLET TEMP. SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
CN208 220u CN-CNT t˚ REFRIGERANT TEMP. SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
(WHT)
t˚ WATER INLET TEMP. SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
WATER PUMP 20V
SSR200 CN-PWR202 CN-PWR2 6
ZONE 1 20V
(YLW) (BLU)
CN-TH3
1 W 1 (WHT)
WATER PUMP
ZONE 2 SSR201 2 W 2 1
C294 HEX WATER OUTLET TEMP. SENSOR
5V 5V *R279 t˚
1u G2 (THERMISTOR)
1 NONE 2
CN-CNT *R280 G2 5V_2 CN-TH2
(WHT) NONE CN-PWR204
(WHT)
(YLW)
5 1 W 2
1
t˚ TANK TEMP. SENSOR 1 (THERMISTOR)
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER C201 W 1
3 CN-PWR4 t˚
(SUB) 220u TANK TEMP. SENSOR 2 (THERMISTOR)
(BLK) 4
C73 C79 C81 C84 C90
DCN
(BLU) 1u 1u 1u 1u 1u
B 3
12V G2
IC204 R 1 G2
DCP
3 1 (RED) CN-PWR3
CLOSE
OPEN
N

G6
(GRN) CN2
+ GND 2 + CN1
C248 C244 C245
1000u 0.01u 3300u
CN205 CN204 CN207 CN206 CN210
BR BL B

HEAT COOL N L
CLOSE OPEN N
ROOM THERMO 1
2-WAY M
VCC BIT2 BIT1 VALVE 1~
DC DC
GND 10V

ZONE 1

ZONE 2
3-WAY

ZONE 2
SWITCH

ZONE 1

SENSOR
SENSOR

SENSOR
COMP. SW
VALVE

EXTERNAL

SG SIGNAL
HEAT/COOL

POOL TEMP.

ROOM TEMP.

ROOM TEMP.
SIGNAL
SOLAR TEMP.

BUFFER TANK
WATER TEMP.
WATER TEMP.
DEMAND
OPTIONAL
10.2 Outdoor Unit
10.2.1 WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5
TO INDOOR UNIT
REACTOR

GRY GRY
TERMINAL 1 2 3
BOARD (BLACK) (WHITE) (RED) RAT2 RAT1 5V
(GRY) (GRY)

DATA (RED) R22 + C98

RED R21 470u
7.5k 15k
1% 10V
FUSE8 COMMUNICATION 1%
NOISE FILTER T3.15A CIRCUIT
AC-BLK FUSE1 CIRCUIT L250V C9 C10
(BLK) (20A 250V) 1u 1u
BLK 10V
10V
WHT AC-WHT (WHT) RECTIFICATION G5
CIRCUIT G5 OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CN-TH1
(THERMISTOR)
GRN FG1 (GRN) 1
FUSE6 FUSE5 t°
(20A 250V) (20A 250V) SWITCHING
GRN FG2 (GRN) POWER SUPPLY t°
CIRCUIT
4 PIPING TEMPERATURE SENSOR
5V G5 (THERMISTOR)

R28
PFC RECTIFICATION 7.5k CN-TH3
OPTIONAL CIRCUIT CIRCUIT Yellow
RY-HT2 1%
1 EVAPORATOR EXIT
1 BLU HT2 (BLU) TEMPERATURE SENSOR
C99 (THERMISTOR)
2 t°
3 BLU ACN2 (BLU) 1u
BASE PAN 10V G5
HEATER G5
*IC8 *CN-STM1
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER 4 15 1
3 16
2 17 M ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COIL
(EXPANSION VALVE)
1 18
15V
6

10
C921
0.1u COMMON
GND
*IC8
FUSE3 50V
T3.15A 9
L250V
G4A *CN-HOT 1
16V *Q55 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
3 COIL
S
(4-WAY VALVE)
D
*C108

K
K
G *D57 *D59
*R143

A
A
*R137
G4A

K
*D58

A
CN-MTR2 Q1
(WHT)
1 10
W U(RED) RED
FAN MS 3 P U
MOTOR
3~
U
V
V(BLU) BLU MS COMPRESSOR
14
V
W
W(YLW) YLW 3~
5 16 N R148
IC19 1k
1/10W CN-HPS
5% Red 1
BLK
C115 1 HIGH PRESSURE
CN-MTR1 1000p R157 3 WHT 2
R403 20k SENSOR
Red 50V 5V 3
1 1k 1/10W 4 RED
G6 G6 5%
C414
5V 0.01u 5V + C111
C100
3 50V 100u 1u
C401 16V
0.1u G6 16V
25V Q56
E
G5 G5
10k
B
4.7k R135 15V
10k
R124 C -50V C Q57 1/8W
10k -100mA 4.7k B 5% 1
1/10W RED
HIGH PRESSURE
5% 10k C119 R155 2
50V SWITCH
G6 0.01u 10k CN-PSW
100mA RED
E 50V 1/10W
5%

G4
5V
*CN-DIS
1
DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
2 t°
C244
R37 1u
10V

G5

59
10.2.2 WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5
REACTOR

GRY BLK
2 1
2 1

GRN GRY BLK

FG1
(GREEN) L2-I L2-O
ACL1 (GRAY) (BLACK)
BLK (BLACK) Q10 COMPRESSOR
CN-BLK AC-BLK (RED) U
P U RED 1 1 RED
(BLACK) BLK (BLACK)
FUSE3
TERMINAL
(25A 250V) NOISE FILTER V
(BLUE) V BLU 2 2 BLU MS
BOARD (YELLOW) W YLW 3 3 YLW 3~
ACN1 CIRCUIT CN-WHT AC-WHT W
N
WHT (WHITE) (WHITE) WHT (WHITE)
1
TO INDOOR UNIT

(BLK) R137
4.7k
2 5V R138
FUSE2
(WHT) COM3 5V 2.2k
COMMUNICATION 5V T3.15A Q24 E
3 RED (RED) R159 L250V B 1/4W
CIRCUIT 50V
(RED) 1 WHT 1 10k RECTIFICATION Q25 100mA
5V
WHT CIRCUIT C -32V C
PFC -500mA
R425 c Q25 WHT C63 4.7k B
20.0k 1000p CIRCUIT
1/10W Q26 c 4.7k b WHT 10k
4 4 50V
CONTROL b 10k 0.1A R139
BOARD 0.2A 50V G1 G6 G5 68 E
R426 5%
5.6k 50V e e 12
YLW/GRN CN-COM 1/3W CN-RY1
1/10W G1 CN-COM Yellow BIT_CN-SAN2
R427 (yellow) 13V
CN-RY2
47k G1 BIT_CN-SAN2
1/10W 12
CONTROL CABINET
CN-PSW

K
BOARD SIDE D57 RY-PWR2
600V 1 RED HIGH
PLATE

A
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER PRESSURE
G6 2 RED SWITCH
(NOISE FILTER)
CN-FM
1 RED
4 BLK
5V WHT M FAN MOTOR
5V BLU
FUSE1 YLW
ELECTRONIC T2.5A L250V R125 7
2k
CONTROLLER E Q23

(MAIN) 10k
-50V B
-100mA 4.7k
C
C135
0.047u
CN-HT2 SWITCHING 25V
BASE PAN 1 (BLACK) RY-HT2
RECTIFICATION POWER G2
HEATER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
OPTIONAL 3
CN-HPS R133 15V_2
Red RY-HOT
BLK 1k
1
HIGH 1
PRESSURE R132 C140 Q21 E
2 WHT 3 5V 1000p
SENSOR 3 20k
50V CR3 10k
RED 4 B
G5 G5
C138 + C139 Q22 C 4.7k R122 R121
1u 100u B 4.7k 4.42k 10k
16V -50V C 1/10W 1/10W
16V -100mA
10k 1% 1%
C134
G5 1000p 50V E R123 + R131 R120 C130
5V 50V 100mA 5.11k 10u 200k 0.047u
1/10W 50V 1/10W 25V
1% 1%
1
DISCHARGE TEMP. SENSOR
(THERMISTOR) t 5V
2 C212 R102 C47 G2
CN-DIS 1u 4.99k 1u
6.3V 1/10W 6.3V
1% R100 R101
G5 G5 G5 15k 7.5k
1% 1%

C45 C46
1u 1u
6.3V 6.3V
G5 G5 CN-TH1 OUTDOOR AIR TEMP. SENSOR
G5 (THERMISTOR)
1
t
t
4 PIPING TEMP. SENSOR
5V
(THERMISTOR)
CN-TANK
1 COMP. TEMPERATURE
t SENSOR (THERMISTOR)
3
C49 R410 5V
1u 4.99k
6.3V 1%
R141
G5 G5 7.5k
1%

C144
1u CN-TH3
6.3V Yellow
G5 1 EVA. EXIT TEMP. SENSOR
D33 t (THERMISTOR)
A K 2
D34 G5
A K

D35
A K 1
D36 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC
A K
13V
M COIL
(EXPANSION VALVE)
G2
6
CN-EV
C84
0.047u
25V CN-HOT
G2 (BLUE)
1

3 ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COIL
(4-WAYS VALVE)

60
11. Printed Circuit Board
11.1 Indoor Unit
11.1.1 Main Printed Circuit Board

HT1-L3 CN-OLP1

AC2-N2 G02

AC2-L3 L2
G03

CN-PWR
G01
L1

CN-PWR2
CN-PWR3
CN1 DATA
AC1-N

AC1-L3 CN-PUMP1
CN-PWR4
CN-FLWSEN

CN2 CN-TH2

CN-TH1

CN-TH3

CN-CNT

CN3 CN4 CN5 CN6

61
11.1.2 Sub Printed Circuit Board (Optional)

CN208 CN209 ACL

ACN

CN201

CN-205

CN-PWR204

CN202
CN-CNT

CN204

DCN

CN-COMM CN-PWR202
CN207
CN203

CN206 DCP CN210

62
11.2 Outdoor Unit
11.2.1 Main Printed Circuit Board

11.2.1.1 WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5

POWER
TRANSISTOR
(IPM)

RAT1

CN-MTR2

CN-MTR1
CN-STM1
CN-DIS

CN-TH1
CN-HOT
CN-TH3
CN-HPS

HT2
DATA
CN-PSW
AC-WHT
AC-BLK ACN2

FG1 FG2 RAT2

63
11.2.1.2 WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5

POWER L2-0
TRANSISTOR
(IPM)

CURRENT
TRANSFORMER
(CT)
AC-WHT
AC-BLK
L2-1

CN-HOT

CN-HT2
CN-PSW
CN-FM

CN-COM CN-TH3
CN-TANK
CN-HPS
CN-DIS
CN-EV
CN-TH1

64
11.2.1.2.1 Noise Filter Printed Circuit Board

CN-COM

COM3

ACL1 CN-BLK

ACN1

CN-WHT

FG1

65
12. Installation Instruction
12.1 Indoor Floor Area Requirement
 If the total refrigerant charge in the system is <1.84 kg, no additional minimum floor area is required.
 If the total refrigerant charge in the system is ≥1.84 kg, additional minimum floor area requirements is
complied as described below:

Symbol Description Unit

mc Total refrigerant charge in system kg
mmax Maximum refrigerant charge allowed kg Total refrigerant charge in system, mc (kg)
= Pre-charged refrigerant amount in unit (kg)
mexcess mc - mmax kg
+ Additional refrigerant amount after installation (kg)
H Installation height m
VAmin Minimum ventilation opening area cm2

A) Determine Maximum refrigerant charge allowed, mmax

1. Calculate Installation Room Area, Aroom.
2. Based on Table I, select mmax which corresponds to the calculated Aroom value.
3. If mmax ≥ mc, the unit can be installed in the installation room with the specified installation height (H=600mm)
in Table I and without additional room area or any additional ventilation.
4. Else, proceed to B) and C).

B) Determine Total Floor Area of Aroom and Broom compliance to Amin total
1. Calculate the Broom area adjacent to the Aroom.
2. Determine the Amin total based on the Total Refrigerant Charge, mc from Table II.
3. The total floor area of both Aroom and Broom must exceed Amin total.

C) Determine Minimum Venting Opening Area, VAmin for natural ventilation

1. From Table III, calculate mexcess.
2. Then determine VAmin corresponding to the calculated mexcess for natural ventilation between Aroom and Broom.
3. The unit can be installed at specific room only when the following conditions are fulfilled:
 Two permanent openings, one at bottom, another at top, for ventilation purposes are made between
Aroom and Broom.
 Bottom opening: - Must comply to the minimum area requirement of VAmin.
- Opening must be located 300mm from the floor.
- At least 50% of required opening area must be
200mm from the floor.
- The bottom of the opening shall not be higher Installation
Room Adjacent
than the point of release when the unit is installed (A )room Room
(B )
and must be situated 100mm above the floor. room

- Must be as close as possible to the floor and

>1500mm

lower than H.
 Top opening: - The total size of the Top opening must be more
>0.5 VA min
than 50% of VAmin. >VA min

- Opening must be located 1500mm above the

floor.
 The height of the openings must more than 20mm.
 A direct ventilation opening to outside is NOT encouraged for ventilation opening (the user can block the
opening when it is cold).
 The value of H is considered as 0.6m to comply to IEC 60335-2-40:2018 Clause GG2.

66
Table I - Maximum refrigerant charge allowed in a Table II - Minimum floor area
room Minimum floor area (Amin total (m2))
mc (kg)
Maximum refrigerant charge in a room H=0.6m
Aroom (m2) (mmax) (kg) 1.84 28.81
H=0.6m 1.86 29.44
1 0.138 1.88 30.08
2 0.276 1.90 30.72
3 0.414 1.92 31.37
4 0.553 1.94 32.03
5 0.691 1.96 32.70
6 0.829 1.98 33.37
7 0.907 2.00 34.04
8 0.970 2.02 34.73
9 1.028 2.04 35.42
10 1.084 2.06 36.12
11 1.137 2.08 36.82
12 1.187 2.10 37.53
13 1.236 2.12 38.25
14 1.283 2.14 38.98
15 1.328 2.16 39.71
16 1.371 2.18 40.45
17 1.413 2.20 41.19
18 1.454 2.22 41.94
19 1.494 2.24 42.70
20 1.533 2.26 43.47
21 1.571 2.27 43.86
22 1.608
23 1.644  For H values lower than 0.6m, the value of H is
24 1.679
considered as 0.6m to comply to
25 1.714
26 1.748
IEC 60335-2-40:2018 Clause GG2.
27 1.781  For intermediate mc values, the value that
28 1.814 corresponds to the higher mc value from the table
29 1.846 is considered.
30 1.877 Example:
31 1.909 If mc = 1.85 kg, the value that corresponds to
32 1.939 “mc = 1.86 kg” is considered.
33 1.969
34 1.999
 Systems with total refrigerant charge lower than
35 2.028 1.84 kg are not subjected to any room area
36 2.057 requirements.
37 2.085  Charges above 2.27 kg are not allowed in the unit.
38 2.113
39 2.141 Table III - Minimum venting opening area for
40 2.168 natural ventilation
41 2.195
42 2.221 Minimum venting
43 2.248 mc mmax mexcess (kg) = opening area
44 2.274 (kg) (kg) mc - mmax (VAmin) (cm2)
H=0.6m
2.27 0.1 2.17 878
 For H values lower than 0.6m, the value of H is 2.27 0.3 1.97 797
considered as 0.6m to comply to IEC 2.27 0.5 1.77 716
60335-2-40:2018 Clause GG2. 2.27 0.7 1.57 635
 For intermediate Aroom values, the value that 2.27 0.9 1.37 570
corresponds to the lower Aroom value from the 2.27 1.1 1.17 538
table is considered. 2.27 1.3 0.97 485
2.27 1.5 0.77 414
Example:
2.27 1.7 0.57 326
For Aroom = 10.5 m2, the value that corresponds to 2.27 1.9 0.37 224
“Aroom = 10 m2” is considered.
 For H values lower than 0.6m, the value of H is
considered as 0.6m to comply to
IEC 60335-2-40:2018 Clause GG2.
 For intermediate mexcess values, the value that
corresponds to the higher mexcess value from the
table is considered.
Example:
mexcess = 1.45 kg, the value that corresponds to
“mexcess = 1.6 kg” is considered.

67
Attached accessories Optional Accessories

No. Accessory part Qty. No. Accessory part Qty. No. Accessories part Qty.
Adjustable Feet Packing 6 Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P) 1
1 4 4 1
Network Adaptor (CZ-TAW1) and
7
Extension Cable (CZ-TAW1-CBL)
1
Reducing Adapter Remote Controller
2 1 Cover
5 1
Drain Elbow
3 1

Field Supply Accessories (Optional)

No. Part Model Specifications Maker

2-way valve kit Electromotoric Actuator SFA21/18 AC230V Siemens
i
*Cooling model 2-port Valve VVI46/25 Siemens
Room thermostat Wired PAW-A2W-RTWIRED
ii AC230V -
Wireless PAW-A2W-RTWIRELESS
iii Mixing valve - 167032 AC230V Caleffi
iv Pump - Yonos 25/6 AC230V Wilo
v Buffer tank sensor - PAW-A2W-TSBU - -
vi Outdoor sensor - PAW-A2W-TSOD - -
vii Zone water sensor - PAW-A2W-TSHC - -
viii Zone room sensor - PAW-A2W-TSRT - -
ix Solar sensor - PAW-A2W-TSSO - -

 It is recommended to purchase the field supply accessories listed in above table.

68
12.2 Indoor Unit
12.2.1 Select the Best Location 12.2.1.2 Transport and Handling
 Install the Tank Unit in indoors with frost free  Be careful during transportating the unit so that it
weather proof location only. is not damaged by impact.
 Must install on a flat horizontal and solid hard  Only remove the packaging material once it has
surface. reached it is desired installation location.
 There should not be any heat source or steam  It may need three or more people to carry out the
near the Tank Unit. installation work. The weight of Tank Unit might
 A place where air circulation in the room is good. cause injury if carried by one person.
 A place where drainage can be easily done (e.g.  The Tank Unit can be transported either in vertical
Utility room). or horizontal.
 A place where Tank Unit’s operation noise will not o If it transported in horizontal, make sure Front
cause discomfort to the user. of packaging material (printed with “FRONT”)
 A place where Tank Unit is far from door way. must facing upwards.
 A place where accessible for maintenance. o If it transported in vertical, use the hand holes
 Ensure to keep minimum distance of spaces as on sides, slide and move to the desired
illustrated below from wall, ceiling, or other location.
obstacles.  Fix the Adjustable Feet, if the Tank unit installed
 A place where flammable gas leaking might not on a uneven surface.
occur.
 Secure the Tank Unit to prevent it being knocked
over accidentally or during earthquakes.
Please avoid installations which expose the Tank Unit
to any of the following conditions: Hold
 Extraordinary environment conditions; installation Hold
Hold arrow section
in frost or exposure to unfavorable weather to slide and move
conditions.
 Voltage input exceeding the specified voltage.
12.2.2 To Drill a Hole in the Wall and
12.2.1.1 Required space for installation
Install a Sleeve of Piping
1 Make a Ø70 mm through hole.
(Unit : mm)
2 Insert the piping sleeve to the hole.
350
Min.

M
10 in.
0
3 Fix the bushing to the sleeve.
4 Cut the sleeve until it extrudes about 15 mm
.
from the wall.
in
M 00
1

CAUTION
M When the wall is hollow, please be sure to use the sleeve
10 in.
i n. 0
for tube assembly to prevent dangers caused by mice
M 00
7
biting the connection cable.

5 Finish by sealing the sleeve with putty or

caulking compound at the final stage.

Wall
Indoor Outdoor
15 mm

Sleeve for tube

assembly
Approx. 5 - 7 mm

Bushing for tube assemblys

ø70 mm through hole Putty or caulking compound

69
12.2.3 Piping Installation 12.2.3.4 Refrigerant Piping Installation
This Tank Unit is designed for combination with
12.2.3.1 Water Quality Requirement Panasonic Air-to-Water Heat Pump Outdoor Unit. If
Outdoor Unit from other manufacturer are being used
Must use water that complies with European water quality in combination with Panasonic Tank Unit, optimum
standard 98/83 EC. The lifespan of the Tank Unit will be shorter if operation and reliability of the system is not
groundwater (include spring water and well water) is used. guaranteed. Thus warranty cannot be given in such
The Tank Unit shall not be used with the tap water containing
contaminants such as salt, acid, and other impurities which may
case.
corrode the tank and its component. 1 Connect Tank Unit to Air-to-Water Heatpump
Outdoor Unit with correct piping size. Use
12.2.3.2 Typical Piping Installation Reducing Adapter 2 for Outdoor Unit
WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5 Refrigerant
Gas e piping connection.

Model Piping size (Torque) Use

Fan Coil Unit Reducing
Tank Unit Outdoor Unit Gas Liquid Adapter 2
Air-to-Water Heatpump Radiator / WH-
Outdoor Unit Floor Heater ø12.7mm ø6.35mm
UD03JE5,
(1/2") (1/4") Yes
2-Way Valve Faucet WH-
[55 N•m] [18 N•m]
Pressure
Expansion WH- UD05JE5
Relief
Valve Vessel Tab / ADC0309J3E5 WH-
Drainage Shower ø15.88mm ø6.35mm
Drain UD07JE5,
Water
Main (5/8") (1/4") No
Water WH-
Supply [65 N•m] [18 N•m]
Tank Water UD09JE5
Discharge Check Shut Pressure
Tundish Valve Off Reducing
Valve Valve Spanner

12.2.3.3 Access to Internal Components

WARNING
This section is for authorized and licensed electrician/water
system installer only. Work behind the front plate secured by
screws must only be carried out under supervision of qualified
contractor, installation engineer or service person. Torque
wrench
Hook

CAUTION
CAUTION
Open or close the Front Plate carefully. Do not overtighten, overtightening may cause gas leakage.
The heavy Bottom Front Plate may injures Do not pull and push refrigerant piping excessively, deformed
the fingers.
pipe may cause refrigerant leak.

2 Please make flare after inserting flare nut

2X (screw) (located at joint portion of tube assembly) onto
the copper pipe. (In case of using long piping)
 Open and Close Front Plate 3 Do not use pipe wrench to open refrigerant
1 Remove the 2 mounting screws of Bottom piping. Flare nut may be broken and cause
Front Plate. leakage. Use proper spanner or ring wrench.
2 Slide it upwards to unhook the Bottom Front 4 Connect the piping:
Plate hook. o Align the centre of piping and sufficiently
3 Reverse above steps 1~2 for close it. tighten the flare nut with fingers.
o Further tighten the flare nut with torque
wrench in specified torque as stated in
the table.

Additional Precautions For R32 Models when

connecting by flaring at indoor side

Ensure to do the re-flaring of pipes before connecting to

units to avoid leaking.
Connections made between components of refrigerant
system shall be accessible for ease of maintenance.

Seal sufficiently the flare nut (both gas and liquid sides)
with neutral cure (Alkoxy type) & ammonia-free
silicone sealant and insulation material to avoid the
gas leak caused by freezing.

70
 Apply neutral cure
(Alkoxy type) and
 Choose proper sealer which can withstand the
ammonia-free silicone pressures and temperatures of the system.
sealant along the  If non-brass metallic piping is used for installation,
circumference
make sure to insulate the pipes to prevent
galvanic corrosion.
 Do not connect galvanised pipes, this will cause
galvanic corrosion.
 Use correct nut for all Tank Unit tube connections
and clean all tubes with tap water before
Neutral cure (Alkoxy type) & ammonia-free silicone installation. See Tube Position Diagram for detail.
sealant is only to be applied after pressure testing and
cleaning up by following instructions of sealant, only to Tube Connector Nut Size Torque
the outside of the connection. The aim is to prevent  a & b RP 1¼" 117.6 N•m
moisture from entering the connection joint and c & d RP ¾" 58.8 N•m
possible occurrence of freezing. Curing sealant will
take some time. Make sure sealant will not peel off
Tank Unit
when wrapping the insulation.

12.2.3.4.1 Checking for gas leakage

 Check for leakage of gas after air purging.
 See the in the installation manual for the outdoor.

12.2.3.5 Cutting and Flaring the Piping

Spanner Torque wrench
1 Please cut using pipe cutter and then remove
the burrs.
CAUTION
2 Remove the burrs by using reamer. If burrs is
not removed, gas leakage may be caused. Do not overtighten, overtightening may cause gas leakage.
Turn the piping end down to avoid the metal
powder entering the pipe.  Make sure to insulate the water circuit pipes to
3 Please make flare after inserting the flare nut prevent reduction of heating capacity.
onto the copper pipes.  After installation, check the water leakage
condition in connection area during test run.
Pipe
Reamer
Handle
Bar 0 – 0.5 mm  Failure to connect the tube appropriately might
Bar Yoke
Core
cause the Tank Unit malfunction.
Point down Copper
 Protection From Frost:
Clamp handle Red arrow mark
pipe If the Tank Unit is being exposed to frost while
1. To cut 2. To remove burrs 3. To flare
power supply failure or pump operating failure,
 Improper flaring 
When properly flared, the internal surface drain the system. When water is idle inside the
of the flare will evenly shine and be of even
thickness. Since the flare part comes into system, freezing up is very likely to happen which
Inclined Surface Cracked Uneven contact with the connections, carefully check
the flare finish.
could damage the system. Make sure the power
damaged thickness
supply is turned off before draining. Heater
Assembly may be damaged under dry heating.
12.2.3.6 Water Piping Installation  Corrosion Resistance:
 Please engage a licensed water circuit installer to Duplex stainless steel is naturally corrosion
install this water circuit. resistant to mains water supply. No specific
 This water circuit must comply with relevant maintenance is required to maintain this
European and national regulations (including resistance. However, please note that Tank Unit is
EN61770), and local building regulation codes. not guaranteed for use with a private water supply.
 Ensure the components installed in the water  It is recommended to use a tray (field supply) to
circuit could withstand water pressure during collect water from the Tank Unit if water leakage
operation. occur.
 Do not use worn out tube.
 Do not apply excessive force to pipes that may (A) Space Heating/Cooling Pipework
damage the pipes.  Connect Tank Unit Tube Connector a to outlet
 Choose proper sealer which can withstand the connector of Panel/Floor heater.
pressures and temperatures of the system.  Connect Tank Unit Tube Connector b to inlet
 Make sure to use two spanners to tighten the connector of Panel/Floor heater.
connection. Further tighten the nuts with torque  Failure to connect the tube appropriately might
wrench in specified torque as stated in the table. cause the Tank Unit malfunction.
 Cover the pipe end to prevent dirt and dust when  Refer below table for the rated flow rate of each
inserting it through a wall. particular Outdoor Unit.

71
 Model Rated Flow Rate (l/min)
Tank Unit Outdoor Unit Cool Heat
WH-UD03JE5 9.2 9.2 Discharge below
fixed grating
WH- WH-UD05JE5 12.9 14.3
ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5 17.6 20.1 Fixed grating
WH-UD09JE5 20.1 25.8

Trapped gulley
(B) Domestic Hot Water Tank Pipework Possible wall

 It’s strongly recommended to install an expansion Illustration of guide

drain hose to outdoor
vessel (field supply) in the Domestic Hot Water
Tank circuit. Refer Typical Piping Installation
(D) Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge (Drain
section to locate the expansion vessel.
Tap) and Safety Relief Valve Pipework
o Recommended pre-charge pressure of the
expansion vessel (field supply) = 0.35MPa  Safety Relief Valve 0.8MPa (8 bars) incorporated
(3.5 bars) in Domestic Hot Water Tank.
 In high water pressure or water supply is above  Drain Tap and Safety Relief Valve discharge
500kPa, please install the Pressure Reducing fittings share the same drainage outlet.
Valve for water supply. If the pressure higher than  Use R½” male connector for this drainage outlet
that, it might damage the Tank Unit. connection (Tube connector g ).
 A Pressure Reducing Valve (field supply) with  Piping must always be installed in a continuously
below specification is strongly advised to be downward direction. It must not be longer than 2m,
installed along the line of the tube connector c of with no more than 2 elbows, and must not allow
Tank Unit. Refer Typical Piping Installation section condensation to build up or freezing to occur.
to locate both of these valves.  The pipe from this drainage outlet fitting must not
Recommended Pressure Reducing Valve be shut off. The discharge must be freed.
specifications:  The end of this pipework must be in such a way
- Set pressure: 0.35 MPa (3.5 bars) so that the outlet is visible and can not cause any
 Must connect a faucet to Tank Unit Tube damage. Keep away from electrical components.
Connector d and main water supply, in order to  It is recommended to fit a tundish into this g
supply water with appropriate temperature for pipework. Tundish should be visible and
shower or tap usage. Failure to do so might cause positioned away from frost environment and
scalding. electrical components.
 Failure to connect the tube appropriately might
causing the Tank Unit malfunction. (E) Drain Elbow and Hose Installation
 Fix the Drain Elbow and Packing to the bottom of
(C) Pressure Relief Valve Drainage Pipework Drain Water Hole .
 Connect a drain hose to the Pressure Relief Valve  Use inner diameter 17 mm drain hose in the
hose outlet h . market.
 The hose must be installed in a continuously  This hose must to be installed in a continuously
downward direction and left open to the frost-free downward direction and in a frost-free
atmosphere. environment. Improper drain piping may cause
water leakage hence damage the furnitures.
 If drain hose is long, use a metal support fixture
along the way to eliminate the wavy pattern of  Guides this hose outlet to outdoor only.
drain tube.  Do not insert this hose into sewage or drain pipe
 The water may drip from this discharge hose. that may generate ammonia gas, sulphuric gas,
Therefore must guide the hose without close or etc.
block the outlet of the hose.  If necessary, use hose clamp to further tighten the
 Do not insert this hose into sewage hose or hose at drain hose connector to prevent leakage.
cleaning hose that may generate ammonia gas,  Water will drip from this hose, therefore the outlet
sulphuric gas etc. of this hose must be installed in an area where the
 If necessary, use a hose clamp to tighten the hose outlet cannot become blocked.
at drain hose connector to prevent it from leaking.
 Guide the drain hose to outdoor as illustrated at
the right figure.

Packing
Drain
Elbow

72
12.2.4 Connect the Cable to the Tank Unit

WARNING
This section is for authorized and licensed electrician only. Work behind the Control Board Cover secured by screws must only be carried out
under supervision of qualified contractor, installation engineer or service person.

12.2.4.1 Fixing of Power Supply Cable and Connecting Cable

1 Connecting cable between Tank Unit and Outdoor Unit shall be approved polychloroprene sheathed flexible
cord, type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier cord. See below table for cable size requirement.

Model
Connecting Cable Size
Tank Unit Outdoor Unit
WH-UD03JE5,
4 x min 1.5 mm2
WH- WH-UD05JE5
ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5,
4 x min 2.5 mm2
WH-UD09JE5

o Ensure the colour of wires of Outdoor Unit and the terminal no. are the same to the Tank Unit
respectively.
o Earth wire shall be longer than the other wires as shown in the figure for the electrical safety in case of
the slipping out of the cord from the Holder (Clamper).

2 An isolating device must be connected to the power supply cable.

o Isolating device (disconnecting means) should have minimum 3.0 mm contact gap.
o Connect the approved polychloroprene sheathed power supply 1 cord and power supply 2 cord and type
designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier cord to the terminal board, and to the other end of the cord to
isolating device (Disconnecting means). See below table for cable size requirement.

Model Power Supply

Cable Size Isolating Devices Recommended RCD
Tank Unit Outdoor Unit Cord
2
WH-UD03JE5, 1 3 x min 1.5 mm 15/16A 30mA, 2P, type A
WH- WH-UD05JE5 2 3 x min 1.5 mm2 15/16A 30mA, 2P, type AC
ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5, 1 3 x min 2.5 mm2 25A 30mA, 2P, type A
WH-UD09JE5 2 3 x min 1.5 mm2 15/16A 30mA, 2P, type AC

3 To avoid the cable and cord being damaged by sharp edges, the cable and cord must be passed through a
bushing (located at the bottom of Control Board) before terminal board. The bushing must be used and must
not be removed.

RCCB/ELCB
Terminals on the Outdoor Unit 1 2 3
Terminal Board
Colour of wires (Connecting cables)

Terminals on the Tank unit L N L1 N1 1 2 3 *1

(Power Supply Cord) Holder (Clamper)

Tank Unit /
Terminals on the isolating devices L N L1 N1 Outdoor Unit
from power supply (Disconnecting connection
means)
Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 Connecting Cable Power Supply Cable

Terminal screw Tightening torque cN•m {kgf•cm}

M4 157~196 {16~20}
M5 196~245 {20~25)

*1 - Earth wire must be longer than other cables for safety reasons

73
12.2.4.2 Wire Stripping and Connecting Requirement
Wire stripping Conductor Conductor Conductor not
Indoor/outdoor fully insert over insert fully insert

10 ± 1mm
connecting
terminal board

5mm or
more
No loose strand (gap between ACCEPT PROHIBITED PROHIBITED
when insert wires)

12.2.4.3 Connecting Requirement

For Tank Unit with WH-UD03JE5, WH-UD05JE5, WH-UD07JE5, WH-UD09JE5
 The equipment’s Power Supply 1 complies with IEC/EN 61000-3-2.
 The equipment’s Power Supply 1 complies with IEC/EN 61000-3-3 and can be connected to current supply
network.
 The equipment’s Power Supply 2 complies with IEC/EN 61000-3-2.
 The equipment’s Power Supply 2 complies with IEC/EN 61000-3-11 and shall be connected to suitable supply
network, with the following maximum permissible system impedance Zmax = 0.352 ohm (Ω) at the interface.
Please liaise with supply authority to ensure that the Power Supply 2 is connected only to a supply of that
impedance or less.
 For Space Heating / Cooling
12.2.5 Charging and Discharging the 1 Turn the plug on the Air Purge Valve outlet
Water anticlockwise by one complete turn from fully
closed position.
 Make sure all the piping installations are properly
done before carry out below steps. Plug (turn
anticlockwise by
one complete turn)

12.2.5.1 Charge the Water

 For Domestic Hot Water Tank
1 Set the Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge Air purge valve
(Drain Tap) g to “CLOSE”.
2 Set the Pressure Relief Valve lever “DOWN”.

“CLOSE” “OPEN” Pressure relief valve

Pressure relief valve

Lever
Lever or
Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge (Drain Tap) g

2 Set all Tap / Shower “OPEN”. Turn down Turn down

3 Start filling water to the Domestic Hot Water Pressure relief valve Pressure relief valve
Tank via Tube Connector c .
After 20~40min, water should flow out from 3 Start filling water (with pressure more than
Tap / Shower. Else, please contact your local 0.1 MPa (1 bar)) to the Space Heating /
authorized dealer.
Cooling circuit via Tube Connector a . Stop
4 Check and make sure no water leaking at the
filling water if the free water flow through
tube connecting points.
Pressure Relief Valve Drainage .
5 Set the Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge
4 Turn ON the Tank Unit and make sure Water
(Drain Tap) g to “OPEN” for 10 seconds to Pump is running.
release air from this pipeline. Then set it 5 Check and make sure no water leaking at the
“CLOSE”. tube connecting points.
6 Turn the Safety Relief Valve 21 knob
counterclockwise slightly and hold for 10
seconds to release air from this pipeline. Then
recover the knob to original position.
7 Ensure Step 5 & 6 is carried out each time
after charging water to Domestic Hot Water
Tank.
8 To prevent back pressure from happening to
the Safety Relief Valve 21 , do turn the Safety
Relief Valve 21 knob counterclockwise.

74
12.2.5.2 Discharge the Water 12.2.6.4 Check RCCB/ELCB
 For Domestic Hot Water Tank Ensure the RCCB/ELCB set to “ON” condition before
1 Turn OFF power supply. check RCCB/ELCB.
2 Set the Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge Turn on the power supply to the Tank Unit.
(Drain Tap) g to “OPEN”. This testing could only be done when power is
3 Open Tap / Shower to allow air inlet. supplied to the Tank Unit.
4 Turn the Safety Relief Valve 21 knob
counterclockwise slightly and hold it until all WARNING
air is released from this pipeline. Then recover Be careful not to touch parts other than RCCB/ELCB test
the knob to original position after ensured the button when the power is supplied to Tank Unit. Else,
pipeline is emptied. electrical shock may happen.
5 After discharge, set Domestic Hot Water Tank
Discharge (Drain Tap) g to “CLOSE”.  Push the “TEST” button on the RCCB/ELCB. The
lever would turn down and indicate “0”, if it
functions normal.
12.2.6 Reconfirmation
 Contact authorized dealer if the RCCB/ELCB
malfunction.
WARNING  Turn off the power supply to the Tank Unit.
Be sure to switch off all power supply before performing each  If RCCB/ELCB functions normal, set the lever to
of the below checkings. “ON” again after testing finish.

12.2.6.1 Check Water Pressure *(0.1 MPa 12.2.7 Installation of Remote Controller as
= 1 bar) Room Thermostat
Water pressure should not lower than 0.05 MPa (with  Remote Controller mounted to the Tank Unit can
inspects the Water Pressure Gauge). If necessary add be moved to the room and serve as Room
water into Tank Unit (via Tube Connector a ). Thermostat.

12.2.6.2 Check Pressure Relief Valve 12.2.7.1 Installation Location

 Check for correct operation of Pressure Relief  Install at the height of 1 to 1.5 m from the floor
Valve by turning on the lever to become (Location where average room temperature can
horizontal. be detected).
 If you do not hear a clacking sound (due to water  Install vertically against the wall.
drainage), contact your local authorized dealer.  Avoid the following locations for installation.
 Push down the lever after finish checking. 1 By the window, etc. exposed to direct sunlight
 In case the water keep on draining out from the or direct air.
Tank Unit, switch off the system, and then contact 2 In the shadow or backside of objects deviated
your local authorized dealer. from the room airflow.
3 Location where condensation occurs (The
12.2.6.3 Expansion Vessel Pre Pressure Remote Controller is not moisture proof or drip
proof.)
Checking 4 Location near heat source.
For Space Heating / Cooling 5 Uneven surface.
 Expansion Vessel with 10 L air capacity and initial  Keep distance of 1 m or more from the TV, radio
pressure of 1 bar is installed in this Tank Unit. and PC. (Cause of fuzzy image or noise)
 Total amount of water in system should be below
200 L. (Inner volume of Tank Unit’s piping is about
5 L)
 If total amount of water is over 200 L, please add
another expansion vessel. (field supply)
 Please keep the installation height difference of
system water circuit within 10 m.

75
12.2.7.2 Remote Controller Wiring 12.2.7.4 Mounting The Remote
Controller
Tank Unit
For exposed type
Preparation: Make 2 holes for screws using a driver.
Remote Controller
Mount the top case. Mount the bottom case to
1
• Align the claws of the top the wall.
case and then align the claws
of the bottom case.
2
Remote Controller wiring
(field supply)
Cut here with
• No polarity a nipper and
remove the burr
Terminal for Remote Controller wiring with a file.
UP

 Remote Controller cable shall be (2 x min

0.3 mm2), of double insulation PVC-sheathed or Claw (2 places)

rubber sheathed cable. Total cable length shall be Wall to which

the remote
50 m or less. controller is
fixed
 Be careful not to connect cables to other terminals
of Tank Unit (e.g. power source wiring terminal). Hole for screw
Malfunction may occur. Screw
Claw (2 places)

 Do not bundle together with the power source (field supply)

wiring or store in the same metal tube. Operation

error may occur.
Clamper
Connect the remote control (field supply)
12.2.7.3 Remove The Remote Controller wiring
Pass through
• Arrange the wires along the groove
From Tank Unit of the case.
the hole

 Remove the top case from the bottom case.

Remote controller terminal board

Remove the coating. Approx. 6 mm
Top case
Bottom case (Back side)
(Back side)
Insert the Remove the sheath. Approx. 180 mm.
Make sure the wiring connection is in the
driver and correct direction.
slightly turn.

Flat-blade
screwdriver
For embedded type
Bottom
case Preparation: Make 2 holes for screws using a driver.

Mount the bottom case

 Remove the wiring between Remote controller Mount the top case. to the wall.
and Tank Unit terminal. • Align the claws of the top • Pass the wire through the hole
case and then align the claws in the centre of the bottom case.
of the bottom case.

Avoid the wire

being caught.
UP

Claw Claw (2 places)

(2 places)

Hole for
screw
Screw Claw (2 places)
(field supply)

Disconnect the
Remote controller
wiring

Remote controller
Connect the remote terminal board
control wiring
Top case Remove the coating.
Approx. 6 mm
Bottom case (Back side)
(Back side)

Make sure the wiring

connection is in the correct
direction.

76
12.2.7.5 Replace The Remote Controller  For normal operation, Water Pressure Gauge
Cover reading should be in between 0.05 MPa and 0.3
MPa. If necessary, adjust the Water Pump
 Replace the existing Remote controller cover with SPEED accordingly to obtain normal water
Remote controller cover to close the hole left after pressure operating range. If adjust Water Pump
remove the Remote controller. SPEED cannot solve the problem, contact your
1 Release the Remote controller cover’s hooks local authorized dealer.
from behind the Front Plate.  After test run, please clean the Magnetic Water
Filter Set. Reinstall it after finish cleaning.
Front Plate

12.2.8.1 Check Water Flow of Water

Existing Remote Hook (6 places)
Circuit
controller cover
Confirm the maximum water flow during main pump
operation not less than 15 l/min.
*Water flow can be check through service setup
(Pump Max Speed) [Heating operation at low water
temperature with lower water flow may trigger “H75”
during defrost process.]

12.2.8.2 Reset Overload Protector

Overload Protector a serves the safety purpose to
prevent the water over heating. When the Overload
Protector a trip at high water temperature, take below
steps to reset it.
2 Press from front to fix the Remote controller  Take out the cover.
cover on the front plate.  Use a test pen to push the centre button gently in
order to reset the Overload Protector.
Front Plate  Fix the cover to the original fixing condition.
Use test pen to push
Remote this button for reset
Hook (6 places) Overload protector.
controller
cover

12.2.9 Maintenance
 In order to ensure safety and optimal performance
of the Tank Unit, seasonal inspections on the
Tank Unit, functional check of RCCB/ELCB, field
wiring and piping have to be carried out at regular
intervals. This maintenance should be carried out
12.2.8 Test Run by authorized dealer. Contact dealer for
scheduled inspection.
 Before test run, make sure below items have been
checked:-
o Pipework are properly done.
o Electric cable connecting work are properly
done.
o Tank Unit is filled up with water and trapped
air is released.
o Please turn on the power supply after filling
the tank until full.
 Switch ON the power supply of the Tank Unit. Set
the Tank Unit RCCB /ELCB to “ON” condition.
Then, please refer to the Operation Instruction for
operation of Remote Controller.

77
12.2.9.1 Maintenance for Magnetic 12.2.9.3 Proper Pump Down Procedure
Water Filter Set
 Turn OFF power supply. WARNING
 Set the two valves for the Magnetic Water Filter Strictly follow the steps below for proper pump down procedure.
Set to “CLOSE”. Explosion may occur if the steps are not followed as per
sequence.
 Drain the Space Heating / Cooling circuit water 1. When the Tank Unit is not in operation (standby), enter the
with set the Pressure Relief Valve lever UP, so Service setup menu in the Remote Controller and select
that water pressure drop below 0.5 bar. Pump down operation to turn it ON. (See APPENDIX for
 Take off the clip, then gently pull out the mesh. detail)
2. After 10~15 minutes, (after 1 or 2 minutes in case very low
Beware of small amount water drain out from it. ambient temperatures (< 10°C)), fully close 2 way valve on
 Clean the mesh with warm water to remove all the Outdoor Unit.
stain. Use soft brush if necessary. 3. After 3 minutes, fully close 3 way valve on Outdoor Unit.
4. Press the “OFF/ON” switch on the Remote Controller 1 to
 Remove the bolt with magnet on brass cap with stop pump down operation.
screwdriver to remove all iron powder. 5. Remove the refrigerant piping.
 Reinstall the magnet and mesh to the Magnetic
Water Filter Set and set back the clip on it.
12.2.9.4 Check Items
 Set the two valves for the Magnetic Water Filter
Set to “OPEN”.
Is the Tank Unit properly installed on the concrete floor?
 Re-charging the water to Space Heating / Cooling Is there any gas leakage at flare nut connections?
circuit (refer Section 12.2.5 for details.) Has the heat insulation been carried out at flare
 Turn ON power supply. nut connection?
Is the Pressure Relief Valve 12 operation normal?
Is water pressure higher than 0.05 MPa?
12.2.9.2 Maintenance for Safety Relief Is the water drainage work properly done?
Valve Is the power supply voltage within the rated voltage range?
 It is strongly recommended to operate the valve Is the cables being fixed to RCCB/ELCB and terminal board firmly?
by turn the knob counter clockwise to ensure free Is the cables being clamped firmly by holder (clamper)?
water flow through discharge pipe at regular Is the earth wire connection properly done?
intervals to ensure it is not blocked and to remove Is the RCCB/ELCB operation normal?
lime deposit. Is the Remote Controller 1 LCD operation normal?
Is there any abnormal sound?
Is the heating operation normal?
Is the Tank unit water leak free on test run?
Is the Safety Relief Valve 21 knob turned for releasing air?

78
12.3 Outdoor Unit
Attached accessories Optional accessories
No. Accessories part Qty. No. Accessories part Qty.
Drain elbow Base Pan Heater
1 1 3 CZ-NE2P (For WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5 only) 1
CZ-NE3P (For WH-UD07JE5 and WH-UD09JE5 only)

Rubber cap • It is strongly recommended to install a Base Pan Heater (optional)

2 7 (For WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5)
3 (For WH-UD07JE5 and WH-UD09JE5) if the outdoor unit is install in cold climate area. Refer the Base Pan
Heater (optional) installation instruction for details of installation.
• Applicable Piping Kit (For WH-UD07JE5 and WH-UD09JE5)
CZ-52F5,7,10BP
• Applicable Piping Kit (For WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5)
CZ-4F5,7,10BP

12.3.1 Select the Best Location

 If an awning is built over the unit to prevent direct sunlight or rain, be careful that heat radiation from the
condenser is not obstructed.
 Avoid installations in areas where the ambient temperature may drop below -20°C.
 Keep the spaces indicated by arrows from wall, ceiling, fence or other obstacles.
 Do not place any obstacles which may cause a short circuit of the discharged air.
 If outdoor unit installed near sea, region with high content of sulphur or oily location (e.g. machinary oil, etc), it
lifespan maybe shorten.
 If piping length is over 10 m, additional refrigerant should be added as shown in the table.

Piping size Rated Length (m) Max.

Pre-charged Max. Min. Piping Additional
For Heat For Piping
Model Refrigerant Elevation Length Refrigerant
Gas Liquid Pump Hydromodule Length
(kg) (m) (m) (g/m)
Indoor Unit + Tank (m)
WH-UD03JE5 and ø12.7mm ø6.35mm
0.90 7 7 20 3 25 20
WH-UD05JE5 (1/2") (1/4")
WH-UD07JE5 and ø15.88mm ø6.35mm
1.27 7 7 30 3 50 25
WH-UD09JE5 (5/8") (1/4")

Example: WH-UD03JE5
If piping length is 15m, the quantity of additional refrigerant should be 100g. [(15-10)m x 20 g/m = 100g]

12.3.2 Install the Outdoor Unit

12.3.2.1 Installation Diagram

 It is advisable to avoid more than 2 blockage directions. For better ventilation & multiple-outdoor installation,
please consult authorized dealer/specialist.
 This illustration is for explanation purposes only.

Vinyl tape (Wide) Vinyl tape (Wide)

Saddle Saddle

Indoor unit/Outdoor unit Indoor unit/Outdoor unit

connecting cable connecting cable
(4-CORE WIRE/1.5 mm2 ) (4-CORE WIRE/2.5 mm2 )
1 Type designation 60245 IEC 57 1
or 0m m
o r 0 mm

Type designation 60245 IEC 57

or 00m or 00m
re
re

or heavier cable
mo
mo

m m m m or heavier cable
or or
10
10

e e
ø6.35mm (1/4") ø6.35mm (1/4")
Liquid refrigerant piping Liquid refrigerant piping
m ø12.7mm (1/2") m ø15.88mm (5/8")
m e 0 m or e
0 00 or Gas refrigerant piping 0 Gas refrigerant piping
1 rm
o 10 r m
o
3 3
or 00m or 00m
mo m mo m
re re

For WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5 For WH-UD07JE5 and WH-UD09JE5

79
 E

C
Model A B C D E F

(Anchor pitch)
WH-UD03JE5 and
540 160 20 330 430 46
WH-UD05JE5

D
WH-UD07JE5 and
613 130 24 360.5 543 32
WH-UD09JE5
A B (Unit : mm)
(Anchor pitch)

 After selecting the best location, start installation according to Installation Diagram.
1 Fix the unit on concrete or rigid frame firmly and horizontally by bolt nut (ø10 mm).
2 When installing at roof, please consider strong wind and earthquake. Please fasten the installation stand
firmly with bolt or nails.

12.3.2.2 Disposal of Outdoor Unit Drain Water

 When a Drain elbow is used, please ensure to follow below:
o the unit should be placed on a stand which is taller than 50 mm.
o cover the ø20mm holes with Rubber cap (refer to illustration below).
o use a tray (field supply) when necessary to dispose the outdoor unit drain water.
 If the unit is used in an area where temperature falls below 0°C for 2 or 3 consecutive days, it is recommended
not to use the Drain elbow and Rubber cap, for the drain water freezes and the fan will not rotate.

Drain elbow 1 Drain elbow 1

Rubber cap 2 x7
Rubber cap 2 x3

WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5 WH-UD07JE5 and WH-UD09JE5

12.3.3 Connecting the Piping

12.3.3.1 Connecting the Piping to Outdoor Unit

Decide piping length and then cut by using pipe cutter.
Remove burrs from cut edge. Make flare after
Spanner
inserting the flare nut (locate at valve) onto the copper or Wrench
pipe. Align center of piping to valves and then tighten
with torque wrench to the specified torque as stated in Torque
the table. wrench

Piping size (Torque) Be sure to use two spanners to tighten.

Model (If the nuts are overtightened, it may cause the flares
Gas Liquid
WH-UD03JE5 and ø12.7mm (1/2") ø6.35mm (1/4") to break or leak.)
WH-UD05JE5 [55 N•m] [18 N•m]
WH-UD07JE5 and ø15.88mm (5/8") ø6.35mm (1/4")
WH-UD09JE5 [65 N•m] [18 N•m]

12.3.3.1.1 Cutting and Flaring the Piping

1 Please cut using pipe cutter and then remove the burrs.
2 Remove the burrs by using reamer. If burrs is not removed, gas leakage may be caused.
Turn the piping end down to avoid the metal powder entering the pipe.
3 Please make flare after inserting the flare nut onto the copper pipes.

Pipe Handle  Improper flaring  When properly flared, the internal

Reamer Bar 0 – 0.5 mm
Bar Yoke surface of the flare will evenly shine
Core and be of even thickness. Since the
Point Clamp Inclined Surface Cracked Uneven flare part comes into contact with
down Red arrow mark Copper pipe the connections, carefully check
handle damaged thickness
1. To cut 2. To remove burrs 3. To flare the flare finish.

80
 AIR PURGING METHOD IS PROHIBITED FOR R32 SYSTEM

12.3.4 Air Tightness Test on the Refrigerating System

Do not purge the air with refrigerants but use a vacuum pump to vacuum the installation.

There is no extra refrigerant in the outdoor unit for air purging.

 Before system is charged with refrigerant and before the refrigerating system is put into operation, below site
test procedure and acceptance criteria shall be vertified by the certified technicians, and/or the installer.
 Be sure to check whole system for gas leakage.

1) Connect a charging hose with a push pin to the Low side of a charging set and
Preparation
the service port of the 3-way valve.
(Step 1-2)
2) Attach the gauge manifold set correctly and tightly. Make sure that both valves of
the manifold gauge (low pressure and high pressure) is in close position.

3) Connect the center hose of the manifold gauge to a vacuum pump.

4) Turn on the power switch of the vacuum pump, then turn open the low side manifold
Evacuation
(Step 3-4) gauge valve and make sure that the needle in the gauge moves from
0cmHg (0 MPa) to –76 cmHg (–0.1 MPa). This process continues for approximately ten minutes.
Then close the low side manifold gauge valve.

5) Remove the vacuum pump from the centre hose and connect the center hose to cylinder of
any applicable inert gas as test gas.
Tightness Test
with Inert Gas
6) Charge test gas into the system and wait until the pressure within the system to reach
(Step 5-7) min. 1.04MPa (10.4barg).
7) Wait and monitor the pressure reading on the gauges. Check if there is any pressure drop.
Waiting time depends on the size of the system.
8) If there is any pressure drop, perform step 9-12. If there is no pressure drop, perform step 13.

YES
9) Use Gas Leak Detector to check for leaks. Must use the detection equipment
Leak detection
Pressure drop? and repair with a sensitivity of 5 grams per year of test gas or better.
(Step 8) (Step 9-12) 10) Move the probe along the Air-to-Water Heatpump system to check for leaks,
and mark for repair.
11) Any leak detected and marked shall be repaired.
NO
12) After repair, repeat evacuation steps 3-4 and tightness test steps 5-7.
Check the pressure drop as in step 8.
Recovery of
Test Gas 13) If no leak,
Indoor unit Liquid side
(Step 13) Recover the test gas. Two-way valve Outdoor unit
Perform evacuation of
steps 3-4.
Close
Then proceed to step 14.
Gas side
Evacuation
(Step 3-4)
Three-way valve
Tank OPEN
Cylinder Close

Open 2 and 3 14) Disconnect the charging Vacuum

Inert pump CLOSE
valves hose from the service gas
(Step 14-18) port of the 3-way valve.
15) Tighten the service port
caps of the 3-way valve
at a torque of 18 N•m with a torque wrench.
16) Remove the valve caps of both of the 2-way valve and 3-way valve.
Complete
17) Open both of the valves, using a hexagonal wrench (4mm).
18) Mount back the valve caps onto the 2-way valve and the 3-way valve to complete this process.

Notes:
Recommended use of any of the following leak detector,
I) Universal Sniffer leak detector
II) Electronic halogen leak detector
III) Ultrasonic Leak Detector

81
12.3.5 Connect the Cable to the Outdoor Unit
(FOR DETAIL REFER TO WIRING DIAGRAM AT UNIT)
1 Remove the control board cover from the unit by loosening the screw.
2 Connecting cable between indoor unit and outdoor unit shall be approved polychloroprene sheathed flexible
cable (see below table), type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier cable.

Models Flexible cable specification Terminal

WH-UD03JE5 and 2
Board
4 x (1.5 mm )
WH-UD05JE5 1 2 3
Earth Wire
WH-UD07JE5 and must be
4 x (2.5 mm2)
WH-UD09JE5 longer than
others cables
for safety
reason.
Terminals on the indoor unit 1 2 3
Colour of wires Holder (Clamper)

Terminals on the outdoor unit 1 2 3

WARNING

This equipment must be

properly earthed.

3 Secure the cable onto the control board with the holder (clamper).
4 Attach the control board cover back to the original position with screw.

12.3.5.1 Wire Stripping and Connecting Requirement

Wire stripping
Indoor/outdoor Conductor fully Conductor over Conductor not
insert insert fully insert
10 ± 1 mm

connecting terminal
board

5 mm or more
(gap between wires)
No loose strand when insert ACCEPT PROHIBITED PROHIBITED

12.3.6 Pipe Insulation

1 Please carry out insulation at pipe connection portion as mentioned in Indoor/Outdoor Unit Installation
Diagram. Please wrap the insulated piping end to prevent water from going inside the piping.
2 If drain hose or connecting piping is in the room (where dew may form), please increase the insulation by
using POLY-E FOAM with thickness 6 mm or above.

82
12.4 Appendix
12.4.1 Variation of system
This section introduces variation of various systems using Air-To-Water Heatpump and actual setting method.

12.4.1.1 Introduce application related to temperature setting

12.4.1.1.1 Temperature setting variation for heating

1. Remote Controller

Indoor
Setting of remote controller

Outdoor Installer setting

System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - No

Zone & Sensor:

Water temperature
Floor heating

Connect floor heating or radiator directly to the Tank Unit.

Remote controller is installed on Tank Unit.
This is the basic form of the most simple system.

2. Room Thermostat

Tank Unit receive Room Thermo signal (ON/OFF) from Remote controller
to control HP and circulation pump.
Indoor There is a build-in thermistor in the remote controller.

Setting of remote controller

Outdoor Installer setting

System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - No

Zone & Sensor:

Room thermostat
Floor heating
Internal

Connect floor heating or radiator directly to the Tank Unit.

Remove remote controller from Tank Unit and install it in the room where floor heating is installed.
This is an application that uses remote controller as Room Thermostat.

83
3. External Room Thermostat

Indoor
Room
Thermostat Setting of remote controller
(Field supply)
Installer setting
Outdoor System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - No

Zone & Sensor:

Room thermostat
Floor heating (External)

Connect floor heating or radiator directly to Tank Unit.

Remote controller is installed on Tank Unit.
Install separate external Room Thermostat (field supply) in the room where floor heating is installed.
This is an application that uses external Room Thermostat.

4. Room Thermistor

Tank Unit compare between room temperature and setting temperature

Indoor on the Remote controller to control HP and circulation pump.

Max: 30m
Thermistor Setting of remote controller
Outdoor
Installer setting
System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - No

Zone & Sensor:

Floor heating Room thermistor

Connect floor heating or radiator directly to Tank Unit.

Remote controller is installed on Tank Unit.
Install separate external room thermistor (specified by Panasonic) in the room where floor heating is installed.
This is an application that uses external room thermistor.

There are 2 kinds of circulation water temperature setting method.

Direct: Set direct circulation water temperature (fixed value)
Compensation curve: Set circulation water temperature depends on outdoor ambient temperature
In case of Room thermo or Room thermistor, compensation curve can be set.
In this case, compensation curve is shifted according to the thermo ON/OFF situation.
• (Example) If room temperature increasing speed is;
very slow → shift up the compensation curve
very fast → shift down the compensation curve

84
12.4.1.1.2 Examples of installations

Floor heating 1 + Floor heating 2

Setting of remote controller

Indoor Room Thermostat Installer setting
(field supply) System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - Yes
Mixing valve 2 Thermistor 2
Zone and Sensor - 2 Zone system
Outdoor Zone 1: Sensor
Mixing valve 1 Room thermostat
Pump 2 Internal

Pump 1 Zone 2: Sensor

Room
Room thermostat
Thermistor 1
(External)

Buffer tank
Floor heating 1 Floor heating 2

Connect floor heating to 2 circuits through buffer tank as shown in the figure.
Install mixing valves, pumps and thermistors (specified by Panasonic) on both circuits.
Remove remote controller from Tank Unit, install it in one of the circuit and use it as Room Thermostat.
Install external Room Thermostat (field supply) in another circuit.
Both circuits can set circulation water temperature independently.
Install buffer tank thermistor on buffer tank.
It requires connection setting of buffer tank and ∆T temperature setting at heating operation separately.
This system requires Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P).

Floor heating + Radiator

Indoor
Radiator Setting of remote controller
Pump 2 Installer setting
Thermistor 2
System setup
Outdoor Optional PCB connectivity - Yes
Pump 1
Mixing valve 1
Zone and Sensor - 2 Zone system
Zone 1: Sensor
Water temperature
Thermistor 1

Zone 2: Sensor
Room
Floor heating Water temperature
Buffer tank

Connect floor heating or radiator to 2 circuits through buffer tank as shown in figure.
Install pumps and thermistors (specified by Panasonic) on both circuits.
Install mixing valve in the circuit with lower temperature among the 2 circuits.
(Generally, if install floor heating and radiator circuit at 2 zones, install mixing valve in floor heating circuit.)
Remote controller is installed on Tank Unit.
For temperature setting, select circulation water temperature for both circuits.
Both circuits can set circulation water temperature independently.
Install buffer tank thermistor on buffer tank.
It requires connection setting of buffer tank and ∆T temperature setting at heating operation separately.
This system requires the Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P).
Mind that if there is no mixing valve at the secondary side, the circulation water temperature may get higher than
setting temperature.

85
Floor heating + Swimming pool

Setting of remote controller

Indoor Thermistor 3 Installer setting
System setup
Thermistor 2 Pump 3
Mixing valve 2 Optional PCB connectivity - Yes

Outdoor Zone and Sensor - 2 Zone system

Pump 1 Zone 1: Sensor
Mixing valve 1 Pump 2
Room thermostat
Internal

Zone 2
Swimming pool
Thermistor 1
Heat EXT T

Buffer tank
Floor heating 1 Swimming pool

Connect floor heating and swimming pool to 2 circuits through buffer tank as shown in figure.
Install mixing valves, pumps and thermistors (specified by Panasonic) on both circuits.
Then, install additional pool heat exchanger, pool pump and pool sensor on pool circuit.
Remove remote controller from Tank Unit and install in room where floor heating is installed. Circulation water
temperature of floor heating and swimming pool can be set independently.
Install buffer tank sensor on buffer tank.
It requires connection setting of buffer tank and ∆T temperature setting at heating operation separately. This system
requires the Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P).

Must connect swimming pool to “Zone 2”.

If it is connected to swimming pool, operation of pool will stop when “Cooling” is operated.

Swimming pool only

Indoor Thermistor
Setting of remote controller
Pump
Outdoor Installer setting
System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - Yes

Zone and Sensor - 1 Zone system

Zone :Swimming pool

T
Heat EXT

Swimming pool

This is an application that connects to the swimming pool only.

Connects pool heat exchanger directly to Tank Unit without using buffer tank.
Install pool pump and pool sensor (specified by Panasonic) at secondary side of the pool heat exchanger.
Remove remote controller from Tank Unit and install in room where floor heating is installed.
Temperature of swimming pool can be set independently.
This system requires the Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P).

In this application, cooling mode cannot be selected. (not display on remote controller)

86
Simple 2 zone (Floor heating + Radiator)

Setting of remote controller

Indoor Installer setting
System setup
Radiator
Optional PCB connectivity - Yes
Thermistor 1
Outdoor Zone and Sensor - 2 Zone system
Zone 1: Sensor
Mixing valve Pump 2 Water temperature

Zone 2: Sensor
Room
Thermistor 2 Water temperature

Operation setup
Heat
T for heating ON – 1°C

Cool
T for cooling ON – 1°C

This is an example of simple 2 zone control without using buffer tank.

Built-in pump from Tank Unit served as a pump in zone 1.
Install mixing valve, pump and thermistor (specified by Panasonic) on zone 2 circuit.
Please be sure to assign high temperature side to zone 1 as temperature of zone 1 cannot be adjusted.
Zone 1 thermistor is required to display temperature of zone 1 on remote controller.
Circulation water temperature of both circuits can be set independently.
(However, temperature of high temperature side and low temperature side cannot be reversed)
This system requires the Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P).

(NOTE)
 Thermistor 1 does not affect operation directly. But error happens if it is not installed.
 Please adjust flow rate of zone 1 and zone 2 to be in balance. If it is not adjusted correctly, it may affects the
performance.
(If zone 2 pump flow rate is too high, there is possibility that no hot water flowing to zone 1.)
Flow rate can be confirmed by “Actuator Check” from maintenance menu.

Buffer tank connection

Indoor Buffer tank

Setting of remote controller

Outdoor Installer setting

System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - Yes
Pump Thermistor
Buffer Tank connection - Yes
T for buffer tank

Floor heating

This is an application that connects the buffer tank to the Tank Unit.
Buffer tank’s temperature is detected by buffer tank thermistor (specified by Panasonic).
This system requires Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P).

87
Buffer tank + Solar

Solar thermistor
Setting of remote controller
Indoor
Buffer tank Installer setting
System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - Yes
Outdoor
Solar pump Buffer Tank connection - Yes
T for buffer tank

Solar connection - Yes

Pump
Mixing valve Thermistor Buffer tank
T turn ON
T turn OFF
Antifreeze
Floor heating Hi limit

This is an application that connects the buffer tank to the Tank Unit before connecting to the solar water heater to
heat up the tank.
Buffer tank’s temperature is detected by buffer tank thermistor (specified by Panasonic).
Solar panel’s temperature is detected by solar thermistor (specified by Panasonic).
Buffer tank shall use tank with built-in solar heat exchange coil independently.
During winter season, solar pump for circuit protection will be activated continuously. If does not want to activate the
solar pump operation, please use glycol and set the anti-freezing operation start temperature to -20°C.
Heat accumulation operates automatically by comparing the temperature of tank thermistor and solar thermistor.
This system requires Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P).

Boiler connection

Indoor Buffer tank

Outdoor Mixing
valve Pump Thermistor
Setting of remote controller

Installer setting
System setup
Optional PCB connectivity - Yes
Bivalent - Yes
Floor heating Turn ON: outdoor temp
Control pattern

Boiler

This is an application that connects the boiler to the Tank Unit, to compensate for insufficient capacity by operate
boiler when outdoor temperature drops & heat pump capacity is insufficient.
Boiler is connected parallel with heat pump against heating circuit.
Besides that, an application that connects to the DHW tank’s circuit to heat up tank ‘s hot water is also possible.
Boiler output can be control by either SG ready input from optional PCB or Auto control by 3 modes selection pattern.
(Operation setting of boiler shall be responsible by installer.)
This system requires Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P) for SG ready input control or buffer tank temperature control.

Depending on the settings of the boiler, it is recommended to install buffer tank as temperature of circulating water
may get higher. (It must connect to buffer tank especially when select Advanced Parallel setting.)

WARNING

Panasonic is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe situation of the boiler system.

CAUTION
Make sure the boiler and its integration in the system complies with applicable legislation.
Make sure the return water temperature from the heating circuit to the Tank Unit does NOT exceed 55°C.
Boiler is turned off by safety control when the water temperature of the heating circuit exceed 85°C.

88
12.4.2 How to fix cable

12.4.2.1 Connecting with external device (optional)

 All connections shall follow to the local national wiring standard.
 It is strongly recommended to use manufacturer-recommended parts and accessories for installation.
 For connection to main PCB 4
1 Two-way valve shall be spring and electronic type, refer to “Field Supply Accessories” table for details. Valve
cable shall be (3 x min 1.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier, or similarly double insulation
sheathed cable.
* note: - Two-way Valve shall be CE marking compliance component.
- Maximum load for the valve is 9.8VA.
2 Room thermostat cable must be (4 or 3 x min 0.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier cord, or
similarly double insulation sheathed cable.
3 Extra pump cable shall be (2 x min 1.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier.
4 Boiler contact cable shall be (2 x min 0.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier.
5 External control shall be connected to 1-pole switch with min 3.0 mm contact gap. Its cable must be (2 x min
0.5 mm2), double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed or rubber-sheathed cable.
* note: - Switch used shall be CE compliance component.
- Maximum operating current shall be less than 3Arms.
6 Room sensor zone 1 cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2) double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed or rubber-
sheathed.
7 Outdoor air sensor cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2) double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed or rubber-
sheathed.

Main PCB 4
Bind optional
cables with
Power Supply 2 these bands
RCCB/ELCB
Power Supply 1
RCCB/ELCB

Indoor
terminal for
connecting
cables
Bind optional
cables with
these bands

Holder (Clamper)
How to guide the optional cables and power supply cord
(view without internal wiring)

Optional cables:
• External control
cable
• Room sensor
zone 1
• Outdoor air sensor
cable
• Remote controller
cable
Optional cables:
• 2-way valve
cable • Power Supply 1 cord
• Room thermostat zone • Power Supply 2 cord
1 cable • Indoor Unit/Outdoor Unit Connecting cable
• Extra pump cable
• Boiler contact cable

89
 For connection to Optional PCB 6
1 By connecting Optional PCB, 2 Zone temperature control can be achieved. Please connect mixing valves,
water pumps and thermistors in zone 1 and zone 2 to each terminals in Optional PCB.
Temperature of each zone can be controlled independently by remote controller.
2 Pump zone 1 and zone 2 cable shall be (2 x min 1.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier.
3 Solar pump cable shall be (2 x min 1.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier.
4 Pool pump cable shall be (2 x min 1.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or heavier.
5 Room thermostat zone 1 and zone 2 cable shall be (4 x min 0.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or
heavier.
6 Mixing valve zone 1 and zone 2 cable shall be (3 x min 1.5 mm2), of type designation 60245 IEC 57 or
heavier.
7 Room sensor zone 1 and zone 2 cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2), double insulation layer (with insulation
strength of minimum 30V) of PVC-sheathed or rubber-sheathed cable.
8 Buffer tank sensor, pool water sensor and solar sensor cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2), double insulation
layer (with insulation strength of minimum 30V) of PVC-sheathed or rubber-sheathed cable.
9 Water sensor zone 1 and zone 2 cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2), double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed
or rubber-sheathed cable.
10 Demand signal cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2), double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed or rubber-
sheathed cable.
11 SG signal cable shall be (3 x min 0.3 mm2), double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed or rubber-sheathed
cable.
12 Heat/Cool switch cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2), double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed or rubber-
sheathed cable.
13 External compressor switch cable shall be (2 x min 0.3 mm2), double insulation layer of PVC-sheathed or
rubber-sheathed cable.

Bind all
optional cables Optional
with these PCB 6
bands

Bind optional
cables with
these bands

Bind optional
cables with Optional cables:
Power Supply 2 these bands •2-way valve cable
RCCB/ELCB •Extra pump cable
•Boiler contact cable • Power Supply 1 cord
Power Supply 1 • Power Supply 2 cord
RCCB/ELCB • Indoor Unit/Outdoor
Unit Connecting cable
Indoor Optional cables:
terminal for •Pump zone 1 cable
connecting •Pump zone 2 cable
cables •Solar pump cable
•Pool pump cable from Optional
•Room thermostat zone 1 cable PCB
•Room thermostat zone 2 cable
Bind all optional •Mixing valve zone 1 cable
cables with these •Mixing valve zone 2 cable
bands Optional cables:
Holder (Clamper)
•External control cable
How to guide the optional cables and power supply cord •Outdoor air sensor cable
(view without internal wiring) •Remote controller cable
•Room sensor zone 1 cable
•Room sensor zone 2 cable
•Buffer tank sensor cable
•Pool sensor cable
•Water sensor zone 1 cable
•Water sensor zone 2 cable from Optional PCB
•Demand signal cable
•Solar sensor cable
•SG signal cable
•Heat/Cool switch cable
•External Compressor switch cable

Terminal screw on PCB Maximum tightening torque cN•m {kgf•cm}

M3 50 {5.1}
M4 120 {12.24}

90
12.4.2.2 Connecting Cables Length
When connecting cables between Tank Unit and external devices, the length of the said cables must not exceed the
maximum length as shown in the table.

External device Maximum cables length (m)

Two-way valve 50
Mixing valve 50
Room thermostat 50
Extra pump 50
Solar pump 50
Pool pump 50
Pump 50
Boiler contact 50
External control 50
Room sensor 30
Outdoor air sensor 30
Buffer tank sensor 30
Pool water sensor 30
Solar sensor 30
Water sensor 30
Demand signal 50
SG signal 50
Heat/Cool switch 50
External compressor switch 50

91
12.4.2.3 Connection of the main PCB

Zone 1 room sensor

Outdoor air sensor
Tank sensor

External control
Remote controller

Boiler contact /
Defrost Signal
Extra pump

CON CON H C N L
2-way 3-way Optional
valve valve Thermostat 1

 Signal inputs

L N =AC230V, Heat, Cool=Thermostat heat, Cool terminal

Optional Thermostat
It does not function when using the Optional PCB
Dry contact Open=not operate, Short=operate
External control (System setup necessary)
Able to turn ON/OFF the operation by external switch
Connected (Please use 2 cores wire for relocation and extension. Total cable length
Remote controller
shall be 50m or less.)

 Outputs

AC230V N=Neutral Open, Close=direction (For circuit switching when connected to

3-way valve
DHW tank)
AC230V N=Neutral Open, Close (Prevent water circuit pass through during cooling
2-way valve
mode)
Extra pump AC230V (Used when Tank Unit pump capacity is insufficient)
Boiler contact Dry contact (System setup necessary)

 Thermistor inputs

PAW-A2W-TSRT
Zone 1 room sensor It does not work when using
the Optional PCB
Outdoor air sensor AW-A2W-TSOD (Total cable length shall be 30m or less)

12.4.2.4 Connection of Optional PCB (CZ-NS4P)

Optional Optional Mixing Mixing
Thermostat 2 Thermostat 1 valve 1 valve 2
L N Cool Heat L N Cool Heat N O C N O C

Pool
Pump

Solar Ext.
Pump comp.
SW
Error Heat/
signal Cool
SW
Zone 1
Pump Vcc
SG
Bit1
signal
Zone 2 Bit2
Pump

Zone 2 Zone 1 Buffer Pool Zone 2 Zone 1 Demand Solar

room room Tank water water water signal sensor
sensor sensor sensor sensor sensor sensor

92
 Signal inputs 3 Outdoor sensor: PAW-A2W-TSOD
If the installation location of the outdoor unit is
Optional L N =AC230V, Heat, Cool=Thermostat heat, exposed to direct sunlight, the outdoor air
Thermostat Cool terminal temperature sensor will be unable to measure
Dry contact Vcc-Bit1, Vcc-Bit2 open/short the actual outdoor ambient temperature
(System setup necessary)
SG signal correctly.
Switching SW (Please connect to the 2 contacts
controller) In this case, optional outdoor temperature
Dry contact Open=Heat, Short=Cool sensor can be fixed at a suitable location to
Heat/Cool SW more accurately measure ambient
(System setup necessary)
External Dry contact Open=Comp.ON, temperature.
comp.SW Short=Comp.OFF (System setup necessary)
DC 0~10V (System setup necessary) Dimensions (mm) 70
Demand signal
Please connect to the DC 0~10V controller.

46
 Outputs 93

AC230V N=Neutral Open, Close=mixture

Mixing valve
direction Operating time: 30s~120s
Pool pump AC230V 4 Room sensor: PAW-A2W- TSRT
Solar pump AC230V Install the room temperature sensor to the
Zone pump AC230V room which requires room temperature
control.
 Thermistor inputs Dimensions (mm)

30 86 60
Zone room sensor PAW-A2W-TSRT
Buffer tank sensor PAW-A2W-TSBU
86
Pool water sensor PAW-A2W-TSHC
Zone water sensor PAW-A2W-TSHC
Solar sensor PAW-A2W-TSSO
5 Solar sensor: PAW-A2W-TSSO
Use for measurement of the solar panel
12.4.2.5 Recommended External Device temperature.
Specification Insert the sensor into the sensor pocket and
 This section explains about the external devices paste it on the solar panel surface.
(optional) recommended by Panasonic. Please
Dimensions (mm)
always ensure to use the correct external device
blue
during system installation. Ø6
 For optional sensor. brown black
40
1 Buffer tank sensor: PAW-A2W-TSBU
Use for measurement of the buffer tank
temperature.
Insert the sensor into the sensor pocket and
paste it on the buffer tank surface.
Dimensions (mm)
blue
Ø6
brown black
40

2 Zone water sensor: PAW-A2W-TSHC

Use to detect the water temperature of the
control zone.
Mount it on the water piping by using the
stainless steel metal strap and contact paste
(both are included).

Dimensions (mm) 93

35
70

93
6 Please refer to the table below for sensor  For optional pump.
characteristic of the sensors mentioned above. Power supply: AC230V/50Hz, <500W
Recommended part: Yonos 25/6: made by Wilo
Temperature (°C) Resistance (kΩ)
30 5.326
25 6.523
20 8.044
15 9.980
10 12.443
5 15.604
 For optional mixing valve.
0 19.70 Power supply: AC230V/50Hz (input open/output
-5 25.05 close)
Operating time: 30s~120s
-10 32.10
Recommended part: 167032: made by Caleffi
-15 41.45
-20 53.92
-25 70.53
-30 93.05
-35 124.24
-40 167.82

Temperature (°C) Resistance (kΩ) WARNING

150 0.147 This section is for authorized and licensed electrician/water

system installer only. Work behind the front plate secured by
140 0.186 screws must only be carried out under supervision of qualified
contractor, installation engineer or service person.
130 0.236
120 0.302
110 0.390
100 0.511
90 0.686
80 0.932
70 1.279
65 1.504
60 1.777
55 2.106
50 2.508
45 3.003
40 3.615
35 4.375

94
12.4.2.6 Network Adaptor 7 Installation (Optional)
 Remove the Control Board Cover 3 , then  On the wall near the Tank Unit, attach the
connect the cable included with this adaptor to adaptor by screwing screws through the holes
the CN-CNT connector on the printed circuit in the back cover.
board.
o Pull the cable out of the Tank Unit so that
there is no pinching.
o If an Optional PCB has been installed in the
Tank Unit, connect to the CN-CNT connector Screws
of the Optional PCB.

Connection examples:

 Pull the CN-CNT cable through the hole in the

bottom of the adaptor and re-attach the front
CN-CNT cable cover to the back cover.

CN-CNT cable
(Take care not to
pinch the cable)

 Use the included cord clamp to fix the CN-CNT

cable to the wall.
Pull the cable around as shown in the diagram so
Without Optional PCB that external forces cannot act on the connector in
the adaptor.
Furthermore, on the Tank Unit end, use the
CN-CNT cable included cable tie to fix the cables together.

Cord clamp
Cable tie

With Optional PCB

 Insert a flat head screwdriver into the slot on

the top of the adaptor and remove the cover.
Connect the other end of the CN-CNT cable
connector to the connector inside the adaptor.

Slot
Connector

95
12.4.3 System installation

12.4.3.1 Remote Controller Outline

Name Function
A A: Main screen Display information
B: Menu Open/Close main menu
C: Triangle (Move) Select or change item
D: Operate Start/Stop operation
B E: Back Back to previous item
F: Quick Menu Open/Close Quick menu
C
G: OK Confirm
D

E F G

12:00am,Mon

24
5
40˚c

˚c 18˚c 6

2 3 4

Name Function
1: Function icon Display set function/status

Holiday mode Demand control

Weekly timer Room heater

Quiet mode Tank heater

Remote controller room

Solar
thermostat

Powerful mode Boiler

2: Mode Display set mode/current status of mode

Heating Cooling

Auto Hot water supply Auto heating Auto cooling

Heat pump operating

Compensation Set direct water

3: Temp setting Set room temp temp Set pool temp
curve

4: Display Heat temp Display current heating temperature (it is set temperature when enclosed by line)

5: Display tank temp Display current tank temperature (it is set temperature when enclosed by line)

6: Outdoor temp Display outdoor temp

96
First time of power ON (Start of installation)

Initialization 12:00am,Mon

When power is ON, firstly initialization

Initializing. screen appears (10 sec)

12:00am,Mon

When initialization screen ends, it turns

to normal screen.

Start

Language 12:00am,Mon
ENGLISH
When any button is pressed, language
FRANÇAIS setting screen appears.
DEUTSCH (NOTE) If initial setting is not performed,
it does not go into menu.
ITALIANO
Select Confirm

Set language & confirm

Clock format 12:00am,Mon

24h
When language is set, setting screen of
time display appears (24h/am/pm)
am/pm

Select Confirm

Set time display & confirm

Date & time 12:00am,Mon

Year/Month/Day Hour : Min

YY/MM/DD/Time setup screen appears

2015 / 01 / 01 12 : 00

Select Confirm

Set YY/MM/DD/Time & confirm

12:00am,Mon

Back to initial screen

Start

Press menu, select Installer setup

Main Menu 12:00am,Mon

System check
Personal setup
Service contact
Installer setup
Select Confirm

Confirm to go into Installer setup

97
12.4.3.2 Installer Setup
1
System setup Optional PCB connectivity Yes/No

2 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

Zone & Sensor 1 Zone system / 2 Zone system Zone settings

3
Heater capacity Capacity select

4
Anti freezing Yes/No

5
DHW Capacity Variable/Standard

6 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

Buffer Tank connection Yes/No T setup

7
Base pan heater Yes/No A/B

8
Alternative outdoor sensor Yes/No

9
Bivalent connection Yes/No Bivalent setup

10
External SW Yes/No

11 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

Solar connection Yes/No Tank setup Solar setup

12 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

External Error signal Yes/No

13 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

Demand control Yes/No

14 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

SG ready Yes/No Capacity setup

15 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

External Compressor SW Yes/No

16
Circulation liquid Water/glycol

17 Only when the selection for Optional PCB is Yes

Heat-Cool SW Yes/No

18
Force Heater Auto/Manual

19
Force Defrost Auto/Manual

20
Defrost Signal Yes/No

21
Pump flowrate T/ Max. Duty

98
 22
Compensation
Operation setup Heat Water temp. for heating ON Compensation curve
curve setup
23 Direct Direct temp. setup

Outdoor temp. for heating OFF Heating OFF Temp. setup

24
T for heating ON T for heating setup

25
Heater ON/OFF O/D temp for heater ON setup
Heater ON Delay Time
T of target temperature for Heater ON
T of target temperature for Heater OFF

Cooling model only 26 (Display only if Cool exist, or else skip)

Compensation
Cool Water temp. for cooling ON Compensation curve
curve setup
27 Direct Direct temp. setup

T for Cooling ON T for cooling setup

Cooling model only 28

Outdoor temp. for
Auto Heat Cool change temp. setup
(Heat to Cool)

29
Outdoor temp. for
Only when the Cool Heat change temp. setup
(Cool to Heat)
selection for Tank
is Yes 30

Tank Floor operation time (max.) Max. operation time for Heat & Cool mode setup

31
Tank heat up time (max.) Max. operation time for Tank mode setup

32
Tank re-heat temp. Tank re-heat temp. setup

33
Sterilization Sterilization day and temp. and time setup

34
Service setup Pump maximum speed Pump maximum speed setup Air purge

35
Pump down Pump down ON / OFF

36
Dry concrete ON (Dry concrete)

37 Edit (Dry concrete schedule) Day and temp. setup

Service contact Contact 1 Name and Tel No. setup

Contact 2 Name and Tel No. setup

99
12.4.3.3 System Setup

1. Optional PCB connectivity Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

Optional PCB connectivity
If function below is necessary, please purchase and install Optional PCB. Zone & Sensor
Please select Yes after installing Optional PCB.
Heater capacity
• 2-zone control
• Pool Anti freezing
• Buffer tank
Select Confirm
• Solar
• External error signal output
• Demand control
• SG ready
• Stop heat source unit by external SW

2. Zone & Sensor Initial setting: Room and Water temp. System setup 12:00am,Mon
Optional PCB connectivity
If no Optional PCB connectivity
Zone & Sensor
Select sensor of room temperature control from the following 3 items
1 Water temperature (circulation water temperature) Heater capacity
2 Room thermostat (Internal or External)
3 Room thermistor
Anti freezing
Select Confirm
When there is Optional PCB connectivity
1 Select either 1 zone control or 2 zone control.
If it is 1 zone, select either room or pool, select sensor
If it is 2 zone, after select sensor of zone 1, select either room or pool for zone
2, select sensor
(NOTE) In 2 zone system, pool function can be set at zone 2 only.

3. Heater capacity Initial setting: Depend on model System setup 12:00am,Mon

Optional PCB connectivity
If there is built-in Heater, set the selectable heater capacity. Zone & Sensor
(NOTE) There are models which cannot select heater. Heater capacity
Anti freezing
Select Confirm

4. Anti freezing Initial setting: Yes System setup 12:00am,Mon

Optional PCB connectivity
Operate anti-freezing of water circulation circuit. Zone & Sensor
If select Yes, when the water temperature is reaching its freezing temperature, the
circulation pump will start up. If the water temperature does not reach the pump Heater capacity
stop temperature, back-up heater will be activated. Anti freezing
(NOTE) If set No, when the water temperature is reaching its freezing temperature or Select Confirm
below 0°C, the water circulation circuit may freeze and cause malfunction.

5. DHW Capacity Initial setting: Variable System setup 12:00am,Mon

Zone & Sensor
Variable DHW capacity setting normally run with efficient boiling which is energy Heater capacity
saving heating. But while hot water usage high and tank water temperature low,
variable DHW mode will run with fast heat up which heat up the tank with high Anti freezing
heating capacity. DHW capacity
If standard DHW capacity setting is selected, heat pump run with heating rated
capacity at tank heat up operation. Select Confirm

100
 6. Buffer Tank connection Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon
Heater capacity
Select whether it is connected to buffer tank for heating or not. Anti freezing
If buffer tank is used, please set Yes.
Connect buffer tank thermistor and set, T ( T use to increase primary side temp Tank connection
against secondary side target temp). Buffer tank connection
(NOTE) Does not display if there is no Optional PCB.
If the buffer tank capacity is not so large, please set larger value for T. Select Confirm

7. Base pan heater Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

Tank connection
Select whether Base pan heater is installed or not. Buffer tank connection
If set Yes, select to use either heater A or B.
Tank heater
A: Turn on Heater when heating with defrost operation only Base pan heater
B: Turn on Heater at heating
Select Confirm

8. Alternative outdoor sensor Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

Buffer tank connection
Set Yes if outdoor sensor is installed. Tank heater
Controlled by optional outdoor sensor without reading the outdoor sensor of heat
pump unit. Base pan heater
Alternative outdoor sensor
Select Confirm

9. Bivalent connection Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

Tank heater
Set if heat pump linked with boiler operation. Base pan heater
Connect the start signal of the boiler in boiler contact terminal (main PCB).
Set Bivalent connection to YES. Alternative outdoor sensor
After that, please begin setting according to remote controller instruction. Bivalent connection
Boiler icon will be displayed on remote controller top screen.
Select Confirm

After Bivalent connection Set YES, there is two option of control pattern to be select, (SG Ready / Auto)
1) SG ready (Only available to set when optional PCB set to YES)
- SG Ready input from optional PCB terminal control ON/OFF of boiler and heat pump as below condition
SG signal Operation pattern
Vcc-bit1 Vcc-bit2
Open Open Heat pump OFF, Boiler OFF
Short Open Heat pump ON, Boiler OFF
Open Short Heat pump OFF, Boiler ON
Short Short Heat pump ON, Boiler ON

* This bivalent SG ready input is sharing same terminal as [14. SG ready] connection. Only one of these two setting can be set at the
same time.
When one is set, another setting will reset to not set.
2) Auto (If Optional PCB no Set, bivalent control pattern will set to this auto as default value)
There are 3 different modes in the boiler auto pattern operation. Movement of each modes are shown below.
1 Alternative (switch to boiler operation when drops below setting temperature)
2 Parallel (allow boiler operation when drops below setting temperature)
3 Advanced Parallel (able to slightly delay boiler operation time of parallel operation)

When the boiler operation is “ON”, “boiler contact” is “ON”, “_”(underscore) will be displayed below the boiler icon.
Please set target temperature of boiler to be the same as heat pump temperature.
When boiler temperature is higher than heat pump temperature, zone temperature cannot be achieved if mixing valve is not installed.
This product only allows one signal to control the boiler operation. Operation setting of boiler shall be responsible by installer.

101
Alternative mode Parallel mode
operate boiler only operate heat pump only operate boiler and heat operate heat pump only
pump simultaneously
Outdoor temp.
Outdoor temp.
-10°C (setting from remote controller)
-10°C (setting from remote controller)
Advanced Parallel mode
For heating
For DHW tank
operate boiler and heat operate heat pump only
pump simultaneously operate boiler and heat operate heat pump only
pump simultaneously
Outdoor temp.
Outdoor temp.
-10°C (setting from remote controller)
-10°C (setting from remote controller)
Although heat pump operates AND AND
but water temperature does
not reach this temperature for If actual tank temp. does When tank
more than 30 mins (setting not achieve the setting temp. is
from remote controller) temp. within 30min achieved, both
Tank temp. Heat pump (setting from remote operations
Lowering thermo ON controller), the boiler stop
Circulation water temp. turn ON Tank setting
Tank Boiling initial temp.
temp. temp.
Boiler temp. ON Boiler temp. OFF Setting temp
= Setting -8°C = Setting -2°C Heat
pump 30 min (setting from
(setting from (setting from remote control)
remote controller) remote controller) Boiler
time
In Advanced Parallel mode, setting for both heating and tank can
be made simultaneously. During operation of “Heating/Tank” mode,
when each time the mode is switched, the boiler output will be
reset to OFF. Please have good understanding on the boiler control
characteristic in order to select the optimal setting for the system.

10. External SW Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

Base pan heater
Able to turn ON/OFF the operation by external switch. Alternative outdoor sensor
Bivalent connection
External SW
Select Confirm

11. Solar connection Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

Alternative outdoor sensor
Set when solar water heater is installed. Bivalent connection
Setting include items below. External SW
1 Set either buffer tank or DHW tank for connection with solar water heater. Solar connection
2 Set temperature difference between solar panel thermistor and buffer tank or
DHW tank thermistor to operate the solar pump. Select Confirm
3 Set temperature difference between solar panel thermistor and buffer tank or
DHW tank thermistor to stop the solar pump.
4 Anti-freezing operation start temperature (please change setting based on usage of glycol.)
5 Solar pump stop operation when it exceeds high limit temperature (when tank temperature exceed designated temperature (70~90°C))

102
 12. External Error Signal Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon
Bivalent connection
Set when external error display unit is installed. External SW
Turn on Dry Contact SW when error happened.
Solar connection
(NOTE) Does not display when there is no Optional PCB. External error signal
When error occurs, error signal will be ON.
After turn off “close” from the display, error signal will still remain ON. Select Confirm

13. Demand control Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

External SW
Set when there is demand control. Solar connection
Adjust terminal voltage within 1 ~ 10 V to change the operating current limit.
External error signal
(NOTE) Does not display when there is no Optional PCB. Demand control
Select Confirm

Analog input Rate Analog input Rate Analog input Rate

[v] [%] [v] [%] [v] [%]
0.0 3.9 ~ 4.1 40 7.4 ~ 7.6 75
not activate
0.1 ~ 0.6 4.2 7.7
45 40 80 75
0.7 not 4.3 7.8
10
0.8 activate 4.4 ~ 4.6 45 7.9 ~ 8.1 80
0.9 ~ 1.1 10 4.7 8.2
50 45 85 80
1.2 4.8 8.3
15 10
1.3 4.9 ~ 5.1 50 8.4 ~ 8.6 85
1.4 ~ 1.6 15 5.2 8.7
55 50 90 85
1.7 5.3 8.8
20 15
1.8 5.4 ~ 5.6 55 8.9 ~ 9.1 90
1.9 ~ 2.1 20 5.7 9.2
60 55 95 90
2.2 5.8 9.3
25 20
2.3 5.9 ~ 6.1 60 9.4 ~ 9.6 95
2.4 ~ 2.6 25 6.2 9.7
65 60 100 95
2.7 6.3 9.8
30 25
2.8 6.4 ~ 6.6 65 9.9 ~ 100
2.9 ~ 3.1 30 6.7
70 65 *A minimum operating current is applied on each model for
3.2 6.8
35 30 protection purpose.
3.3 6.9 ~ 7.1 70
*0.2 voltage hysteresis is provided.
3.4 ~ 3.6 35 7.2
75 70 *The value of voltage after 2nd decimal point are cut off.
3.7 7.3
40 35
3.8

14. SG ready Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon

Solar connection
Switch operation of heat pump by open-short of 2 terminals.
Setting belows are possible External error signal
SG signal Working pattern Demand control
Vcc-bit1 Vcc-bit2 SG ready
Open Open Normal
Select Confirm
Short Open Heat pump and Heater OFF
Open Short Capacity 1
Short Short Capacity 2

Capacity setting 1
- DHW capacity ___%
- Heating capacity ___%
- Cooling capacity ___°C
Capacity setting 2 Set by SG ready setting of remote controller
- DHW capacity ___%
- Heating capacity ___%
- Cooling capacity ___°C
(When SG ready set to YES, Bivalent control pattern will set to Auto.)

103
 15. External Compressor SW Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon
External error signal
Set when external compressor SW is connected.
SW is connected to external devices to control power consumption, ON signal will Demand control
stop compressor’s operation. (Heating operation etc. are not cancelled). SG ready
External compressor SW
(NOTE) Does not display if there is no Optional PCB.
Select Confirm
If follow Swiss standard power connection, need to turn on DIP SW of main unit
PCB. ON/OFF signal used to ON/OFF tank heater (for sterilization purpose)

16. Circulation Liquid Initial setting: Water System setup 12:00am,Mon

Demand control
Set circulation of heating water. SG ready
There are 2 types of settings, water and anti-freeze function. External compressor SW
Circulation liquid
(NOTE) Please set glycol when using anti-freeze function.
It may cause error if setting is wrong. Select Confirm

17. Heat-Cool SW Initial setting: Disable System setup 12:00am,Mon

SG ready
Able to switch (fix) heating & cooling by external switch. External compressor SW
(Open) : Fix at Heating (Heating +DHW) Circulation liquid
(Short) : Fix at Cooling (Cooling +DHW) Heat-Cool SW
(NOTE) This setting is disabled for model without Cooling.
(NOTE) Does not display if there is no Optional PCB. Select Confirm

Timer function cannot be used. Cannot use Auto mode.

18. Force Heater Initial setting: Manual System setup 12:00am,Mon

External compressor SW
Under manual mode, user can turn on force heater through quick menu. Circulation liquid
If selection is ‘auto’, force heater mode will turn automatically if pop up error Heat-Cool SW
happen during operation. Force Heater
Force heater will operate follow the latest mode selection, mode selection is
disable under force heater operation. Select Confirm

Heater source will ON during force heater mode.

19. Force Defrost Initial setting: Manual System setup 12:00am,Mon

Circulation liquid
Under manual code, user can turn on force defrost through quick menu.
Heat-Cool SW
If selection is ‘auto’, outdoor unit will run defrost operation once if heat pump have Force heater
long hour of heating without any defrost operation before at low ambient condition.
Force defrost
(Even auto is selected, user still can turn on force defrost through quick menu)
Select Confirm

104
 20. Defrost signal Initial setting: No System setup 12:00am,Mon
Heat-Cool SW
Defrost signal sharing same terminal as bivalent contact in main board. When Force heater
defrost signal set to YES, bivalent connection reset to NO. Only one function can
be set between defrost signal and bivalent. Force defrost
Defrost signal
When defrost signal set to YES, during defrost operation is running at outdoor
unit defrost signal contact turn ON. Defrost signal contact turn OFF after defrost Select Confirm
operation end.
(Purpose of this contact output is to stop indoor fan coil or water pump during
defrost operation).

21. Pump flowrate Initial setting: T System setup 12:00am,Mon

Force heater
If pump flowrate setting is T, unit adjust pump duty to get different of water inlet Force defrost
and outlet base on setting on * T for heating ON and * T for cooling ON in
operation setup menu during room side operation. Defrost signal
Pump flowrate
If pump flowrate setting is set to Max. duty, unit will set the pump duty to the set
duty at *Pump maximum speed in service setup menu during room side operation. Select Confirm

12.4.3.4 Operation Setup

Heat
22. Water temp. for heating ON Initial setting: compensation curve 55°C
Decide temperature
of 4 points as shown
Set target water temperature to operate heating operation. Hot water temperature in diagram
Compensation curve: Target water temperature change in conjunction with
outdoor ambient temperature change.
Direct: Set direct circulation water temperature. 35°C

In 2 zone system, zone 1 and zone 2 water temperature can be set separately. Outdoor
-5°C 15°C temperature

compensation curve

23. Outdoor temp. for heating OFF Initial setting: 24°C

ON

Set outdoor temp to stop heating.

Setting range is 5°C ~ 35°C
OFF

24°C

24. T for heating ON Initial setting: 5°C Out

Set temp difference between out temp & return temp of circulating water of
Heating operation.
When temp gap is enlarged, it is energy saving but less comfort. When the Return
gap gets smaller, energy saving effect gets worse but it is more comfortable.
Out — Return = 1°C ~ 15°C
Setting range is 1°C ~ 15°C

105
 25. Heater ON/OFF
ON

a. Outdoor temp. for heater ON Initial setting: 0°C

OFF
Set outdoor temp when back-up heater starts to operate.
Setting range is -20°C ~ 15°C 0°C
User shall set whether to use or not to use heater.

b. Heater ON delay time Initial setting: 30 minutes Heater ON

Compressor
Set delay time from compressor ON for heater to turn ON if not achieve water ON
set temperature. 0 : 30
Setting range is 10 minutes ~ 60 minutes

c. Heater ON: T of target Temp Initial setting: -4°C

Water
Set water temperature for heater to turn on at heat mode. Set
Setting range is -10°C ~ -2°C Temp. -2°C
Heater OFF

d. Heater OFF: T of target Temp Initial setting: -2°C

-4°C
Heater ON
Set water temperature for heater to turn off at heat mode.
Setting range is -8°C ~ 0°C

Cool
26. Water temp. for cooling ON Initial setting: compensation curve 20°C

Set target water temperature to operate cooling operation.

Compensation curve: Target water temperature change in conjunction with
outdoor ambient temperature change.
Direct: Set direct circulation water temperature.
5°C

In 2 zone system, zone 1 and zone 2 water temperature can be set separately. 20°C 30°C

compensation curve

27. T for cooling ON Initial setting: 5°C Out

Set temp difference between out temp & return temp of circulating water of
Cooling operation.
When temp gap is enlarged, it is energy saving but less comfort. When the Return
gap gets smaller, energy saving effect gets worse but it is more comfortable. Return — Out = 1°C ~ 15°C
Setting range is 1°C ~ 15°C

Auto
28. Outdoor temp. for (Heat to Cool) Initial setting: 15°C Heat Outdoor temp. rising

Set outdoor temp that switches from heating to cooling by Auto setting.
Setting range is 5°C ~ 25°C
Cool
Timing of judgement is every 1 hour
15°C

29. Outdoor temp. for (Cool to Heat) Initial setting: 10°C Heat Outdoor temp. dropping

Set outdoor temp that switches from Cooling to Heating by Auto setting.
Setting range is 5°C ~ 25°C
Cool
Timing of judgement is every 1 hour
10°C

106
Tank
30. Floor operation time (max) Initial setting: 8h

Set max operating hours of heating. Heat

When max operation time is shortened, it can boil the tank more frequently. 30min ~ 10h

It is a function for Heating + Tank operation.

Tank

31. Tank heat up time (max) Initial setting: 60min

Heat
Set max boiling hours of tank.
When max boiling hours are shortened, it immediately returns to Heating
operation, but it may not fully boil the tank.
Tank

5min ~ 4h

32. Tank re-heat temp. Initial setting: -8°C

Set temp to perform reboil of tank water.

(When boiled by heat pump only, (51°C – Tank re-heat temp) shall become
max temp.)
-12°C ~ -2°C
Setting range is -12°C ~ -2°C

33. Sterilization Initial setting: 65°C 10min

②
Set timer to perform sterilization.
1 Set operating day & time. (Weekly timer format)
2 Sterilization temp (55~75°C If use back-up heater, it is 65°C)
3 Operation time (Time to run sterilization when it reached setting temp
5min ~ 60min) ① ③

User shall set whether to use or not to use sterilization mode.

107
12.4.3.5 Service Setup

34. Pump maximum speed Initial setting: Depend on model Service setup 12:00am,Mon
Flow rate Max. Duty Operation
Normally setting is not necessary.
Please adjust when need to reduce the pump sound etc.
Besides that, it has Air Purge function. 88:8 L/min 0xCE Air Purge

When *Pump flow setting is Max. Duty, this duty set is the fix pump duty run
during room side operation. Select

35. Pump down Service setup 12:00am,Mon Service setup 17:26, Wed
Pump down operation
Pump down: Pump down: in progress!
Operate pump down operation ON ON

OFF
Confirm Confi rm

45°C
36. Dry concrete
40°C 40°C
Operate concrete curing operation. 35°C 35°C
Select Edit, set temp for every stage (1~99 1 is for 1 day). 30°C
Setting range is 25~55°C

When it is turned ON, dry concrete starts.

When it is 2 zone, it dries both zones. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Stage

37. Service contact Service setup 12:00am,Mon Contact-1: Bryan Adams

Service contact: ABC/ abc 0-9/ Other
Able to set name & tel no. of contact
Contact 1 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
person when there is breakdown
etc. or client has trouble. (2 items) Contact 2 STUVWXYZ abcdefghi
jklmnopqrstuvwxyz
Select Confirm Select Enter

108
12.5 Service and maintenance
Custom menu
When connect CN-CNT connector with computer
Setting method of Custom menu
Please use optional USB cable to connect with CN-CNT
connector.
After connected, it requests for driver. If PC is under Windows Custom menu 12:00am,Mon
Vista or later version, it automatically installs the driver under
Cool mode
internet environment.
If PC uses Windows XP or earlier version and there is no internet Back-up heater
access, please get FTDI Ltd's USB - RS232C conversion IC Reset energy monitor
driver (VCP driver) and install. Reset operation history
http://www.ftdichip.com/Drivers/VCP.htm
Smart DHW
Select Confirm

If forget Password and cannot operate remote controller Please press for 10 sec.

Press for 5 sec. Items that can be set

Password unlock screen appears, press Confirm and it shall 1 Cool mode (Set With/Without Cooling function) Default is
reset. without
Password will become 0000. Please reset it again. (NOTE) As with/without Cool mode may affect electricity
(NOTE) Only display when it is locked by password. application, please be careful and do not simply
change it.
In Cool mode, please be careful if piping is not
Maintenance menu insulated properly, dew may form on pipe and
water may drip on the floor and damage the floor.
Setting method of Maintenance menu
2 Backup heater (Use/Do not use Backup heater)
(NOTE) It is different from to use/not to use backup heater
Maintenance menu 12:00am,Mon set by client. When this setting is used, heater
power on due to protection against frost will
Actuator check
be disabled. (Please use this setting when it is
Test mode required by utility company.)
By using this setting, it cannot defrost due to low
Sensor setup
Heating's setting temp and operation may stop
Reset password (H75)
Please set under the responsibility of installer.
Select Confirm When it stops frequently, it may be due to
insufficient circulation flow rate, setting temp of
Press for 5 sec. heating is too low etc.

Items that can be set 3 Reset energy monitor (delete memory of Energy monitor)
Please use when moving house and handover the unit.
1 Actuator check (Manual ON/OFF all functional parts)
(NOTE) As there is no protection action, please be careful 4 Reset operation history (delete memory of operation history)
not to cause any error when operating each part Please use when moving house and handover the unit.
(do not turn on pump when there is no water etc.)
5 Smart DHW (Set Smart DHW mode Parameter)
2 Test mode (Test run) a) Start time: Tank reboil at lower ON Temp. onward.
Normally it is not used. b) Stop time: Tank reboil at normal ON Temp. onward.
c) ON Temp.: Tank Reboil Temp when Smart DHW start.
3 Sensor setup (offset gap of detected temp of each sensor
within -2~2°C range)
(NOTE) Please use only when sensor is deviated.
It affects temperature control.

4 Reset password (Reset password)

109
13. Installation and Servicing Air Conditioner using R32
13.1 About R32 Refrigerant
For air conditioning refrigerants such as R410A, the refrigerants were collected back in order to prevent their air
dissipation, to curbe the global warming impact, in case they were released into the atmosphere. In the “4th
Environmental Basic Plan”, 80% reduction of greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 is required, and due to this
requirement, further reduction in the emission of high greenhouse effect gas, such as CFCs, is required. Therefore,
the conversion of air conditioning refrigerant into the ones who has smaller greenhouse effect, even if it is dissipated
into the atmosphere, became our responsibility.

Nevertheless, in case of air conditioning refrigerant, it would be the best if there is a refrigerant which has smaller
impact on global warming, but ensures good energy efficiency and performance, and is safe; however, there is no
such refrigerant which satisfies all these conditions. As a result, we have been considering the practical usage, within
the safety frame-work, of R32 refrigerant which has short lifetime in the atmosphere, and has smaller effect of global
warming, but is slightly flammable.

In 2004, due to the revision of air conditioner safety standards by the International Electro-safety Commission (IEC),
the safety standards of air conditioners using slightly flammable refrigerant was issued. In 2010, the regulations of
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers in the United States (ANSI/ASHRAE34)
was issued adopting the grades for refrigerants which are difficult to inflame due to their slow burning rates, and as a
result have smaller damages in cases of fire. The burning rate of R32 is lower by 10cm / per second, and safety
standardization for various usage is now being processed.

13.2 Characteristics of R32 Refrigerant

1. Chemical Characteristics
R32 is one of the refrigerants used in R410A, has almost no toxicity, and chemically stable compound formed by
hydrogen, carbon and fluorine.

R32 has short lifetime of 4 to 9 years in case of being released into the atmosphere; therefore, it has smaller
greenhouse gas effect but has slight inflammability because of the large proportion of hydrogen.

Chemical Characteristic Table of R32, R410A and R22.

R32 R410A R22

Chemical Formula CH2F2 CH2F2 / CHF2CF3 CHCLF2
Composition R32 / R125A
Single Composition Single Composition
(mixture ratio wt.%) (50 / 50 wt.%)
Boiling Point (°C) -51.7 -51.5 -40.8
Pressure (physical) *1 3.14 3.07 1.94
Capacity (physical) *2 160 141 100
COP (physical) *3 95 91 100
Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) 0 0 0.055
Global Warming Potential
675 2090 1810
(GWP) *4
Slightly Inflammable
Inflammability *5 Non-inflammable (A1) Non-inflammable (A1)
(A2L)
Toxicity None None None

*1：Physical property of temperature condition 50°C

*2：Relative value of temperature condition 0/50°C, providing R22=100
*3：Te/Tc/SC/SH=5/50/3/0°C
*4：GWP=Global Warming Potential, each figure is based on “4th IPCC4 Report”
*5：Based on ANSI / ASHRAE std. 34-2010

110
2. Characteristic of Pressure
As shown in Table 2, R32 does not have much difference in vapor pressure at the same refrigerant temperature
comparing to R410A, but comparing to R22, it is higher at 1.6 times more. Thus, the same as in case of R410A, it is
necessary to do installation and service using high-pressure tools and components.

Table 2. Saturated vapor pressure comparison table

(Unit: MPa)

Refrigerant
Temperature
R32 R410A R22
-20 0.30 0.30 0.14
0 0.71 0.70 0.40
20 1.37 1.35 0.81
40 2.38 2.32 1.43
60 3.84 3.73 2.33
65 4.29 4.17 2.60

Reference： Thermal properties table of Japan Society of Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (60, 65°C)
NIST REFPROP V8.0 (-20 ~ 40°C)

111
13.3 Refrigerant piping installation • Tools used in services
13.3.1 Required Tools
R32 refrigerant air conditioners use the common parts as R410A air conditioners for two-way valves and three-way
valves (diameters of service ports); thus, they maintain commonality in the maintenance of the compressive strength,
the size of pipe flaring, and the size of flare nuts as R410A. Therefore, for refrigerant pipe installation and services,
you can use tools for R410A.

However, mixing of refrigerants is not allowed, so that you have to separate the cylinders for the recovery of
refrigerants.

Tools used for installation • relocation • replacement of air conditioning units

Works R32 R410A R22
Flaring Flare tools for R410A (clutch type) Flare tools for R22 (clutch type)
Torque wrench (diameter 1/4 3/8)
Connection of pipes
Torque wrench (diameter 1/2 5/8) *1 Toque wrench (diameter 1/2 5/8)
Manifold gauge charging hose R32 & R410A Common (As at November 2013) R22 Only
Air purging Vacuum pump + Reducer / expander Vacuum pump
Gas leakage test Detection liquid or soup water, HFC detector

*1. Nut diameters of 1/2 5/8, the size of torque wrench common with R410A
For other installation, you can use general tools such as screw drivers (+, -), metal saws, electric drills, long-nose
pliers, hole core drills (ø70 or ø65), linen tape, levels, temperature gauges, clamp meters, electric knives, nippers,
pipe cutters, reamers or scrapers, spring benders, (diameters 1/4 3/8 1/2 5/8), monkey wrenches, fixing wrenches
(17 or 12 mm), feeler gauges, hexagon wrenches (4 mm), testers, megohm testers, etc.

Tools used for services

Works R32 R410A R22
Insertion of refrigerant Digital scale for refrigerant charging, refrigerant cylinders, cylinder adopters and packing *a
Recovery of refrigerant Refrigerant recovery devices, refrigerant cylinders, manifold gauges, charging hoses *b

*a. Use cylinder for each refrigerant, cylinder adopter and packing.
*b. Use refrigerant recovery cylinder separately for each refrigerant (no mixture of refrigerant allowed). Please be
aware that there are some refrigerant collection devices which do not have self-certification.

13.3.2 Tools for R32 (common with R410A)

1. Flare gauges 2. Flare tools (clutch type)
Use flare gauges when you perform flaring with flare Flare tools have larger holes of clump bars in order
tools (crutch type). Flare gauges are used to set the to set the pipe end at 0 ~ 0.5 mm, and have stronger
pipe ends at 0.5 ~ 1.5 mm from clump bars of flare springs inside to ensure solid flaring torques. These
tools. flare tools can be used commonly for R22.

Flare gauges Flare tools (clutch type)

112
3. Torque wrenches (diameters 1/2, 5/8) Manifold gauges / Charging hoses
In order to strengthen the compressive strength, the
diameters of wrenches change depending on the flare
nut sizes.

Torque wrenches

Differences in charging hoses

Differences in torque wrenches R32

R22
(common R410A)
R32 Normal
R22 5.1 MPa 3.4 MPa
(common R410A) operation
Pressure (52 kgf / cm2) (35 kgf / cm2)
pressure
1/2 26 mm × 55 N•m 24 mm × 55 N•m Resistance
(diameter × torque) (550 kgf•cm) (550 kgf•cm) Burst 27.4 MPa 17.2 MPa
pressure (280 kgf / cm2) (175 kgf / cm2)
5/8 29 mm × 65 N•m 27 mm × 65 N•m
HNBR rubber
(diameter × torque) (650 kgf•cm) (650 kgf•cm)
Material Internal nylon NBR rubber
coating
4. Manifold gauges
R22 gauges cannot be used because of the high 6. Vacuum pump and Vacuum pump adopter
pressures. When using a vacuum pump, it is necessary to set a
solenoid valve in order to prevent backflow of vacuum
Each port of manifold has different shapes in order pump oil into the charge hoses, and use a vacuum
to prevent inserting wrong refrigerant. pump with oil backflow prevention function, or use the
*However, the port shape for R410A and R32 is the vacuum pump with vacuum pump adopter.
same; therefore, attention need to be paid not to insert If vacuum pump oil（mineral oil-based）mixes with
wrong refrigerant. R410A (R32), it may cause damage to the machine.

Differences in high/low pressure gauges Vacuum pump

R32
R22
(common R410A)
High pressure -0.1 ~ 5.3 MPa
-76 cmHg ~ 35 kgf / cm2
gauges (red) -76 cmHg ~ 53 kgf / cm2
Low pressure -0.1 ~ 3.8 MPa
-76 cmHg ~ 17 kgf / cm2
gauges (blue) -76 cmHg ~ 38 kgf / cm2

Difference in manifold port sizes

R32
R22
(common R410A) Vacuum pump adopter
Port sizes 1/2 UNF20 7/16 UNF20

5. Charging hoses
The pressure resistance of charge hoses is increased.
At the same time, the material is changed to HFC
resistant, and the size of each manifold adopter is
changed, as the port size of manifold gauge itself.
Further, some hoses are with anti-gas pressure
backflow valves placed near the adopters. (hoses with
the valves recommended)

113
7. HFC refrigerant_Electric gas leakage tester 9. Refrigerant cylinders
R32 refrigerant is often used for other mixed Refrigerant cylinders for R410A are painted in pink,
refrigerant (R410A, R404A, R407C etc.). Therefore, and the ones for R32 are painted in other colors that
the usage of existing HFC detectors is possible, but in might subject to change according to the international
order to detect more accurately, we recommend to standards. R32 is a single refrigerant, so that both
use detectors specially set and adjusted for R32 liquid and gas insertion are possible. Additional
detection. charging is also possible.
(R410A is a mixed refrigerant, so only liquid insertion
HFC refrigerant_Electric gas leakage tester is possible)

Refrigerant cylinders

8. Digital scale for refrigerant charging 10. Connection ports of refrigerant cylinders and
R32 and R410A have high pressure level and their packing
evaporation speed is high. Charging ports which fit to the charging hose
Thus, if you recover the refrigerant by cylinder connection port size (1/2 UNF20) is needed. At the
charging method, the refrigerant evaporates within the same time, the packing has to be of HFC resistant
weighing scale glass, which makes reading the scale materials.
difficult, rather than liquidating the refrigerant into the
cylinder. (Charging cylinders for R22 have different Connection ports and packing
pressure resistance, scale, connection port size;
therefore, they are not usable) At the same time, the
digital scale for refrigerant charging is strengthened by
receiving the weight of the refrigerant cylinders with
four pillars at the corners. The connection ports of
charging hoses have two separate ports for R22 (7/16
UNF20) and R32/R410A (1/2 UNF20) therefore, they
can be used for the insertion of the existing
refrigerants.

Digital scale for refrigerant charging

114
11. Tools used for refrigerant piping installations and services

Tools for R410A Common with R32 Possibility of usage for R22
1. Pipe cutters, reamers or scrapers ○ ○
2. Flare tools (clutch type) ○ ○
3. Torque wrench (1/4, 3/8) ○ ○
4. Torque wrench (1/2, 5/8) ○ ×
5. Manifold gauges・charging hoses ○ ×
6. Vacuum pumps, vacuum pump adopters ○ Connection ○ Connection
5/16 1/4
7. Electric gas leakage testers for HFC *1 ○ △

8. Digital scale for refrigerant charging ○ ○

9. HCF recovery devices (connection port 5/16) *2 ○ Connection ○ Connection
5/16 1/4
10. Refrigerant cylinders (pressure resistant: FC3) Same specs × ×
Other (colors that might subject to
11. Refrigerant cylinders (pink) change according to the ×
international standards).
12. Refrigerant cylinder connection ports and packing ○ ×
13. Allen wrench (4 mm) Electric knives ○ ○
*1 Those testers only for HCFC22 (R22), but not for HCF32 (R32) and HCF410A (R410A) cannot be for common use.
*2 Recovery devices which are self-certified for each HCF type can be used.
[Knowledge for the common usage of tools for R410A & R32]
 R410A and R32 machines use different compressor oils.
 If unregulated compressor oil gets mixed into, it may cause damage to the machine function.
 Careful pump down will ensure the recovery of compressor oil, and it will minimize the remaining amount of the oil in the manifold
gauge and charging hose.
 If you only perform the recovery of refrigerant and not be able to perform pump down, you have to dispose the compressor oil in
the charging hose.
[Precaution of repairing refrigerant cycle]
 In the brazing, open 2-way and 3-way valves, and make sure the refrigerant is completely recovered back and not remaining the
system.
 When repairing outside, make sure no refrigerant is in the air, ensure good air flow, and perform the brazing.

[Inserting wrong refrigerant]

 It may cause “not cooling” and “not heating” customer claims because each component (expansion valve, compressor, PCB) of the
refrigeration cycle is specially adjusted for R32.
 At the same time, it is not subject to product warranty, if wrong refrigerant was inserted into the system.

115
13.4 New installation, Relocation, Repairing of Refrigerant Cycle System The
Procedures

New
Relocation Repairing refrigerant cycle
Installation

Indoor / outdoor units and piping

Pump down

Refrigerant recovery

• Displacing pipes and wires, and displacing indoor / outdoor units

Prevention of impurity • Dismantling indoor / outdoor units

• Repairing by brazing

Removal

・Indoor / outdoor units installation and piping, and wiring

Evacuation (Air purging) new installation and relocation for at or

more than 15 minutes, re-charging at or more than 60 minutes

Insertion of refrigerant

Leakage checking

Operation testing

116
13.5 Piping installation of R32
13.5.1 Pipe materials used and flaring
Copper pipes are used for refrigerant piping. Pipes Pipe thickness
which comply with JIS Regulations need to be used.
Room air conditioners which use R410A and R32 O and OL materials Thickness (mm)
have higher pressure; thus, using pipes which comply Diameter
Diameter
R410A R32 R22
with the Regulations is important. (mm)
The pipe thickness is regulated by revised JIS B 8607 1/4 6.35 0.80
“Flaring and brazing fittings for refrigerant” and the 3/8 9.52 0.80
pipe thickness for R410A, R32 is shown in the table. 1/2 12.70 0.80
5/8 15.88 1.00

Caution
 For connection piping, use copper phosphate seamless pipes (1220T) as regulated in “JIS H 3300” and the pipe
thickness is 0.8 mm.
 In the market, there are some pipes of 0.7 mm thickness, but do not use these pipes (0.8 mm thickness has to be
strictly followed).
 It is recommended to use pipes whose adhesion amount of oil is at or less than 40 mg / 10 m.
At the same time, do not use pipes with dent, de-shape, and color change (especially inside).

13.5.2 Processing and connection of pipes

For refrigerant pipe installation, be aware of moisture and dirt do not get into the pipes, and make sure of no
refrigerant leakage.
◎ The procedure of flaring and precautions
a) Cutting of pipes：use pipe cutter and cut the pipe slowly not to de-shape the pipe.
b) Removal of burrs on the edge of pipe (reamer or scraper)
If the condition of pipe edge after the deburring is no good or if burrs attaches on the flaring, it may cause
refrigerant leakage. Turn the pipe end down and perform deburring carefully.
c) Insert the flare nut (use the nut which is a part of the CZ parts)
d) Flaring
Ensure the cleanliness of clump bar and pipe, and perform flaring carefully.
Use the existing flare tools or flare tools for R410A. Be aware that the sizes and dimensions of flaring is different
in each flaring tool. If you use the existing flaring tools, use flaring gauge to measure the length of the flaring part.

Dimensions “a” (mm) Dimensions “a” (mm)

Nut outer diameter (mm)
R22 R410A/R32
Piping
Flare tools Flare tools
size Flare tools Flare tools R410A
for R410A for R410A
a

(mm) R22
Wing nut Wing nut
Clutch type Clutch type Clutch type Clutch type R32
type type
6.35 (1/4") 0.5 ~ 1.0 1.0 ~ 1.5 0 ~ 0.5 1.0 ~ 1.5 1.5 ~ 2.0 0 ~ 0.5 17 17
9.52 (3/8") 0.5 ~ 1.0 1.0 ~ 1.5 0 ~ 0.5 1.0 ~ 1.5 1.5 ~ 2.0 0 ~ 0.5 22 22
12.70 (1/2") 0.5 ~ 1.0 1.5 ~ 2.0 0 ~ 0.5 1.0 ~ 1.5 2.0 ~ 2.5 0 ~ 0.5 Bar 24 26
15.88 (5/8") 0.5 ~ 1.0 1.5 ~ 2.0 0 ~ 0.5 1.0 ~ 1.5 2.0 ~ 2.5 0 ~ 0.5 27 29

117
13.6 Installation, Relocation, and Service
13.6.1 Air purge and gas leak test for new installation (using new refrigerant pipes) using
vacuum pump
(From the point of view of global environment protection, do not release CFCs into the atmosphere during installation
work)
1. Connect the charging hose of manifold gauge to the service port of 3-way valve (pushing insect pin).
2. Fully open the handle Lo of manifold gauge and operate vacuum pump.
(If the needle of the low-pressure gauge reaches the vacuum immediately, check 1 procedure again)
3. Perform vacuuming 15 minutes or more, and make sure low pressure gauge reaches to －0.1 MPa (-76cmHg).
When the vacuuming completes, fully open the handle Lo of manifold gauge and stop the operation of vacuum
pump, and leave it for 1 ~ 2 minutes. Then, remove the connection side of the charging hose of vacuum pump
adopter after checking the needle of manifold gauge does not turn back.
4. Open the stem of 2-way valve to 90° in anti-clock wise, and close the 2-way valve after 10 seconds, and perform
gas leakage test.
5. Remove the charge hose from the service port of 3-way valve, and open the stems of 2-way and 3-way valves
(open the valves to anti-clock wise carefully, do not use full strength to open)
6. Tighten the service port cap with torque wrench 18 N•m (1.8 kgf•m)
Tighten the caps of 2-way and 3-way valves with torque wrench 18 N•m (1.8kg f•m)
7. After the tightening of each cap, check gas leakage around the cap.

Liquid side
Gas side
2-way valve
Hex wrench

Valve stem caps

3-way valve
Low-pressure High-pressure
gauge gauge
Service port Manifold gauge
valve core
Service
port cap Hi Handle
-0.1 MPa
(-76cmHg)
Charging hoses
Lo Handle

Vacuum pump
adaptor
Vacuum
pump

118
13.6.2 Process of refrigerant recovery
1. Connect the center charging hose of manifold gauge to the in-let side of recovery device.
2. Connect the valves of the discharge side of recovery device and liquid side of refrigerant cylinder with red hose
(charging hose).
3. Connect the yellow float switch cable of the recovery device to the refrigerant cylinder.
4. Open the low pressure side valve of manifold gauge.
5. Slightly loosen the charging hose of in-let connecting side of recovery device and perform air purge.
6. Open the liquid valve of refrigerant cylinder and slightly loosen the charging hose in discharging side of recovery
device, and perform air purge (the recovery cylinder needs slight inside pressure).
7. Insert electric plug of recovery device into electrical outlet (the fan operation starts).
8. Turn the valve 1 and 2 of recovery device to pressure equalization point.
9. After a few seconds, turn back the valve 1 and 2 to the original position.
10. Turn the switch of the recovery device to “ON”. (the compressor operation starts)
11. When the low pressure of manifold gauge is close to “0”, close the low pressure side valve, turn “OFF” the
recovery device switch.
12. Remove the center charging hose of manifold gauge from the recovery device.

(Indoor unit) (Liquid side) (Outdoor unit)

Two-way valve
Close

(Gas side)

Three-way valve
Close
Lo Hi

Vacuum
Pump

119
13.6.3 Relocation
1. Removing the air conditioning unit
a) Recovery of outdoor unit refrigerant by pumping down
Press “forced cooling button” (as a general rule, since 1998 the name of cooling testing button is changed,
and this name is unified within the air conditioning industry), and then you are able to start cooling operation
in which the room temperature is low, and you can recover the refrigerant from the outdoor unit.

1. Check the valve stems of two-way and three-way valves are open by being turned to anti-clockwise
(Remove the caps, and confirm the bars are fully open. Use hexagon wrench <4 mm> to open and close
the valves).
2. Press the “Emergency Operation” button of the indoor units for five seconds and release [Forced cooling
operation] (for old models, press “forced cooling” button). Then, operate the air conditioning unit for about
10 minutes.
3. Turn the stem of the two-way valve to the clock-wise and close the valve.
4. After about 2 ~ 3 minutes, turn the stem of the three-way valve quickly to the clock-wise, and stop the
operation.

Caution: In the pump down operation, stop the compressor before removing the refrigerant pipes.

If you do not stop the compressor operation, and if the valve is open and remove the refrigerant pipes, the air
may be sucked into the system and causes extreme high temperature in the refrigerant cycle. This may result in
rupture or injury, etc.

5. Attach and tighten the caps of two-way and three-way valves with torque wrench.
6. Remove the connecting pipes (liquid side and gas side).

b) Removal of indoor and outdoor units

1. Remove the connecting pipes and wires between the indoor and outdoor units.
2. Attach capping flare nuts on the edges of the pipes, connecting the indoor and outdoor units, in order to
prevent dust and moisture get into the pipes.
3. Remove the indoor and outdoor units.

2. Unit installation
Use new refrigerant pipes for the installation, and perform air purging using vacuum pump and gas
leakage testing stated in 14.5.1.

13.6.4 Replacement of air conditioning units and evacuation (when re-using the existing
pipes)
When replacing the air conditioning units, you might use the existing pipes, but it is recommended to perform flaring
again. In case of unit replacement, even if the unit is new refrigerant air conditioner, if the refrigerant oil is different, it
may cause problem. Further, when re-using the existing refrigerant pipes, it is recommended to evacuate the pipes
as much as possible, due to the reason that much refrigerant oil may be attached on the surface of the pipes. If the
pipes are used without evacuation, the remaining refrigerant oil may cause under-performance and abnormal
refrigerant cycle caused by non-compatibility of those oils.

13.6.5 Inter-changeability of refrigerant

Do not operate air conditioning units inserting wrong (or mixed) refrigerant (R22, R410A, R32). It may cause mal-
function of the units, and at the same time, may cause serious incident such as rupture of the refrigerant cycle.

120
13.6.6 Re-insertion of refrigerant in service
When re-insertion is needed, follow the procedures to ensure the insertion of new refrigerant at correct amount.
1. Attach charging hose (blue) to the service port of the outdoor unit.
2. Attach charging hose (red) to the vacuum pump. Fully open the 2-way and 3-way valves.
3. Place the refrigerant cylinder on the digital scale for refrigerant charging and connect the charge hose (yellow) to
the connection port of the vacuum pump and the digital scale. Leave the cylinder valve fully open.
4. Fully open the handles Lo and Hi of the manifold gauge, and switch on the vacuum pump, and then perform
evacuation for at or more than one hour.
5. Confirm the compound gauge of -0.1 MPa (-76cmHg) and fully open the handles of Lo and Hi, and switch off the
vacuum pump. Leave it for about 1 ~ 2 minutes and confirm the needle of the compound gauge does not turn
back.
Refer to the picture below to follow the procedures below.
6. Remove the charging hose (red) of the manifold gauge from the vacuum pump adopter.
7. After adjusting the digital scale to zero, open the cylinder valve and the valve Lo of the manifold gauge, and
insert the refrigerant.
8. If it is not possible to insert the refrigerant at regulated amount at once, operate the cooling mode and gradually
insert the refrigerant (recommended amount approx. 150 g / 1 time)
*Do not insert much refrigerant at once.
9. Close the open/close valve and insert the refrigerant in the charging hose to the outdoor unit.
*Perform this procedure during operating cooling operation. Close the stem of the two-way valve, and when the
pressure of the manifold gauge becomes zero (0), quickly remove the charging hose (blue). Immediately open
the 2-way valve, and stop the cooling operation.
10. Final checking • • • Confirm the 2-way and 3-way valves are fully open.
Attach the caps of the service port and control valve, and then check the gas leakage around the caps.

(Indoor unit) (Liquid side) (Outdoor unit)

Open

Two-way
valve

(Gas side)

Vacuum pump
charging hose Open

Three-way
valve
Lo Hi
Vacuum
pump
adaptor

Vacuum
pump

Electronic scale

121
13.7 Repairing of refrigerant cycle / Brazing point
13.7.1 Preparation for repairing of refrigerant cycle / brazing
Brazing which is a technique needed for repairing refrigerant cycle requires advanced technique and experience, and
this brazing procedure can only be performed by the workers who completed “Gas Welding Skill Training” regulated
by the Occupational Safety and Health Act, and went through the training programs of refrigerant operations.
Dismantling and re-connecting (assembling) refrigerant system requires working space, and the space has to ensure
good air flow and fire prevention (water bucket and fire extinguisher). Moreover, the worker has to ensure the
wearing of goggles, grabs, safety shoes, and long sleeve shirts, and be aware of work safety and attempt to prevent
secondary defect (quality assurance of products). For brazing the indoor / outdoor unit structural components (heat
exchangers, compressors, expansion valves, four-way valve blocks), after the recovery of all refrigerant, confirm that
no refrigerant remains in the system, and fully open the 2-way and 3-way valves. When the brazing is conducted
outside, check and make sure no refrigerant is contained in the air (be careful with vaporized refrigerant).
Furthermore, protect the compressor terminal with metal plates, and heat but use wet clothes to cool down (releasing
the heat) the expansion valves, and four way valves (prevent destruction of parts). In brazing, it is important to pour
the brazing material without melting the base metal based on capillary action principle. In case of holes and oxidizing
caused by overheating, do not perform re-brazing or alteration but replace the parts.

13.7.2 Adjustment of vacuum pump pressure

1. Cylinder with adjustment handle
1. Check and confirm the adjustment handle of the 1st pressure adjuster is loosen (anticlockwise). If cylinder
valve is opened when the 1st gauge pressure adjust handle is closed, the 2nd gauge might get broken.

The primary gauge Main valve

(High pressure) Adjustment
Main valve handle

The secondary gauge

(Low pressure) Adjustment
handle The secondary gauge
(Low pressure)

Oxygen regulator
Propane regulator

2. Open the cylinder valve, and check the remaining amount with the first t side pressure gauge.
3. Check the pressure of 2nd gauge and turn the adjustment handle to clock-wise direction to adjust the
pressure.
◎ Oxygen 2nd side gauge pressure・・・・・・・・・・0.5 MPa (5.0 kgf / cm2)
◎ Propane 2nd side gauge pressure・・・・・・・0.05 MPa (0.5 kgf / cm2)

122
2. Cylinder without adjustment valve
2nd side gauge pressure is adjusted by the adjuster.
Check the both side valves of the torch and open the cylinder valve to check the remaining refrigerant in the
cylinder.
Caution: Do not attach oil component on the connection port of the adjuster.
Especially, use an oxygen cylinder adjuster which is no oil substance type. Do not dismantle or repair the
adjuster and pressure gauge.

Main valve Fuel gauge

Fuel gauge 0~25 MPa
0~3 MPa (0~250 kgf / cm²)
(0~30 kgf / cm²)

Main valve
Regulator

Regulator Oxygen tank

(Black)

Propane tank Black hose

(Gray)
Orange hose

13.7.3 Checking of gas provision

Checking there is no fire around the torch, and then confirm the provision of gas.
1. Slightly open the “propane valve” of the torch, and make sure the gas comes out from the torch crater and then
close the “propane valve”.
2. Slightly open the “oxygen valve” of the torch and make sure the gas comes out from the torch crater and then
close the “oxygen valve”.
Check there is no gas leakage around the hose connection.

13.7.4 Adjustment of flame

1. Slightly open the “propane valve” of the torch and lit with spark lighter.
This moment, the flame is only by propane and the color is red.
2. Gradually open the “oxygen valve” of the torch to mix oxygen, and adjust the amount of propane and oxygen with
the valve to make the flame suitable for brazing work.
If the white core flame splits into two, the torch crater might be clogged. In this case, remove the crater from the
torch and check.

Oxygen (Black hose)

Oxygen valve

Propane valve Propane (Orange hose)

Nozzle

123
13.7.5 Types of flame
Types of flame change based on the proportion of propane and oxygen.
[Neutral Flame]
Perform brazing with this flame
(This is a flame when oxygen and propane are mixed at proper proportion, and has lesser effect on the brazed
metals)

White core flame

10 ~ 15 mm
Outer flame (Light orange color)

[Carbide Flame]
When propane is excessive, the flame has white color flame in between the white core flame and outer flame.
(This is due to the lack of oxygen and the proportion of unburned propane is excessive.
The black carbon created during the brazing work may contaminate the surface of the brazed metal).

White core flame

Pale white
Outer flame (Blue color)

[Oxidizing Flame]
Oxygen is more compared to the neutral flame. Although the flame size is small, this has the highest flame heat.
However, due to the excessive oxygen contained in the flame, the brazing point gets oxidized. (This flame may cause
holes, due to the high heat. The pipe may get melt）

White core flame

Outer flame (Blue orange color)

13.7.6 Closing the flame

[In case of short break]
1. Close the “propane valve” of the torch.
2. Close the “oxygen valve” of the torch.
[In case of finishing work]
1. As above, close the flame following the procedure of “In case of short break”.
2. Completely close the valves of oxygen and propane cylinders.
3. Release the remaining gas inside the hose by opening the “oxygen valve” and “propane valve” of the torch.
Confirm the 1st and 2nd side gauge pressures of “oxygen” and “propane” cylinder pressure adopter are “zero”.

124
13.7.7 Selection of brazing material
Use BAg brazing material (silver solder) to increase the welding performance.

Tensile strength
JIS Composition of ingredients (%) Temperature (°C) Characteristics
(Reference)
Category Standard and
Brazing Base
Number Ag Cu Zu Cd Ni P Solidus Liquidus Kgf•cm2 applications
temp material
Liquidity is good at
low temperature,
49.0 14.5 14.5 17.0 635
approx. approx. 45.5 it is preferable to
BAg • 1A ~ ~ ~ ~ — — ~ S20C
625 635 a small junction of
51.0 16.5 18.5 19.0 760
the gap in the
universal form.
It has similar
performance to the
44.0 14.0 14.0 23.0 620 BAg • 1A, and
approx. approx.
BAg • 1 ~ ~ ~ ~ — — ~ 45.5 S20C suitable for every
605 620
56.0 16.0 18.0 25.0 760 base material
except the light
weight metal.
BAg It is a brazing
filler metal in
34.0 25.0 19.0 17.0 700
approx. approx. universal form,
BAg • 2 ~ ~ ~ ~ — — ~ 45.5 S20C
605 700 suitable for a
36.0 27.0 23.0 19.0 845
slightly larger gap
junction.
It has good
corrosion
resistance in
48.0 14.5 13.5 15.0 2.5 690 35 SS stainless
approx. approx.
BAg • 3 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ — ~ ~ ~ steel-based
630 690
51.0 16.5 17.5 17.0 3.5 815 70 SUS brazing, suitable for
brazing tungsten
carbide, aluminum
bronze and copper.
6.8 690 21 Good liquidity,
approx. approx.
BCuP-2 — remain — — — ~ ~ ~ Cu suitable for brazing
710 785
7.5 815 24.5 copper tube.
Suitable for brazing
4.8 5.8 720 21
approx. approx. when the joint
BCuP-3 ~ remain — — — ~ ~ ~ Cu
645 815 spacing is not
5.2 6.7 815 24.5
BCuP constant
When brazing of
copper and copper,
14.5 4.8 705 21
approx. approx. it is used without a
BCuP-5 ~ remain — — — ~ ~ ~ Cu
645 800 flux, but not
15.5 5.3 815 24.5
possible for brazing
basic materials

Caution
BCuP (phosphorus copper wax) is easy to react with sulfur, and makes a brittle compound water soluble, and causes
gas leakage. In hot spring areas, use other brazing materials or paint the surface for protection.

13.7.8 Need of flux

Use flux to protect the base materials.
1. Remove impurity and oxide film on the metal base, and improve the flow of the brazing material.
2. Prevent oxidation of the metal surface in brazing.
3. Reduce the surface tension of the brazing material.

13.7.9 Need of nitrogen gas

In order to prevent oxidation in the pipe, perform the brazing operation in nitrogen gas flow.
Flow rate 0.05 m3 / h, or pressure reducing valve at 0.02 MPa (0.2kgf / cm2) below.

125
13.7.10 Checking of brazing (insert) points
1. No impurity on the brazing point Gap 0.025 ~ 0.05 mm
If dirt or oil is attached on the brazing point, the
brazing filler metal does not reach to junction, and Inner diameter ø6.45
it may cause poor welding.

2. Adequate gap space in the brazing point

The advantage of capillary current situation is
used in brazing. If the gap space is too large, this
phenomenon may not occur and it may cause Insert diameter 10 ~ 25 mm
poor welding because brazing filler metal does not
flow to join the front part. Outer diameter ø6.35

3. Appropriate size for insertion Brazing material

The guideline for pipe insertion dimensions is to (Runny)
three times the diameter of the base material, but
you need to decide the insertion size in
consideration of the clogging of the brazing
material. Generally, for thin pipes, you need to Brazing material
increase the insert size, and for thick pipe vice (Hard to flow)
versa.

Dryer
4. Brazing material to flow from top to bottom 120°
Brazing filler metal will easily flow to the
connecting portion by capillary action.
Further, by bending the brazing portion of [dryer
side] of the capillary tube at 15 mm from the tube Capillary
top to the angle of about 120°, you can prevent tube
the damage of dryer inside and the clogging of
brazing material caused by the excessive insertion 15 mm Filter
of capillary tube. (Wire mesh)

13.7.11 Brazing and heating

1. Place the flame to a pipe which has more heat
capacity in order to let the brazing material melt by Brazing
the pipe heat. Heat the pipe up to the melting material
temperature of the brazing material, but when it is Burner Burner
overheating, assess the temperature by pipe color Brazing
material
in order not to melt the pipe.

The pre-heating is to heat the base material until the melting temperature, and requires certain training to distinguish
the color of the heated base material in order not to melt the material.
The color and temperature of copper tube
 Becoming red color • • • • • • • 480°C
 Dull red • • • • • • • 650°C
 Cherish red • • • • • • • 760°C
 Brightening cherish red • • • • • • • 870°C

126
(Reference)
Melting temperature of copper • • • • • • • Approx. 1083°C
Maximum temperature obtained in propane and oxygen • • • • • • • Approx. 1083°C
The important point is to heat the bonding part uniformly within a short period of time until reaching to the brazing
temperature in the following manner.
2. Apply the flame on to the side with better heat transmission. If the pipe thickness is consistent, by heating like
30% iron and 70% copper, the copper pipe inside reaches to brazing temperature.
Iron pipes have low heat transmission and only the part the flame is applied get high temperature, and this
causes oxidization of the pipe. The flow of the brazing filler is affected negatively.

3. Apply the flame on to the side of larger heat

capacity.
When brazing a thin tubes such as capillary tube
and dryer, etc., caution has to be taken to apply
the flame to the dryer side (thick pipe side), in
order to prevent burn out by the heat.

4. When brazing the compressor connection pipes

(suction and discharge), remove the sound
insulation plate and the fan, and place the
compressor stand vertically (to prevent the
leakage of compressor refrigerating machine oil),
and apply the flame from the compressor body
side.

13.7.12 Terminologies of brazing

Pin holes → Small holes are generated on the surface of the brazing metal.
Wet temperature → Liquidus temperature at which the brazing material starts flowing out by heating, generally it is
the liquidus-line temperature.
Blow holes → Hollows made by gas in the brazing material of brazing portion (gas reservoirs).
Pits → As a result of blow holes, small dents generated on the outside surface of welding.
Voids → The blazing material does not reach completely to the brazing part. It cannot be identified from outside.

127
13.8 <Reference> Analysis method for no error code, no cooling / no
warming
13.8.1 Preparation for appropriate diagnosis
In order to obtain appropriate operation characteristics, minimum 15 minutes or more operation time [testing
operation (rated operation)] is required.
1. Method of rated operation (rated operation)
For the models which have two buttons of “emergency operation and forced cooling operation”, press forced
cooling button once. For the models which have only emergency operation button, press the button once for 5
seconds and when hear “beep” sound, release the button. Then, cooling operation starts.
2. Checking the mal-functions of indoor / outdoor units
1) Any obstacles against heat release and air suction? (short circuit)
(Forget to remove the outdoor unit cover or fallen leaves blocking the outdoor unit)
2) Are the indoor unit air filters clean? (obstructing heat suction)
3) Is the setting temperature on the remote controller correct? (is the setting temperature set at lower/higher
than the room temperature?)

13.8.2 Understanding and verification of refrigerant cycle

「Indoor」 「Outdoor」
Low temp /
Liquid side Low pressure Expansion
Low liquid valve Mid temp /
temp/ 2-way High pressure
Pressure valve Liquid
liquid Mid temp / Mid temp / Low temp /
high pressure High temp Low pressure
liquid liquid Liquid Outdoor temp
Suction temp Capillary tube

Heat exchanger
temp
Heat exchanger

Heat exchanger
Evaporator
（EVA） (Cooling Heating )
Condenser FM Fan
（COND）

Fan
4-way
High temp / valve
(Heating)
Gas pressure 2.2～ 3.0MPa High pressure
High temp / high Air Low temp / Heat exchanger
pressure Low pressure temp
Air Gas side Air
High temp
Low temp 3-way High pressure
Low temp /
Low pressure valve Air
Low pressure
Air Release temp
(Cooling) Air
Gas pressure 0.9～1.2MPa
Indoor unit Temp difference
Suction temp ＜Cooling＞ ８ or more
Release temp ＜Heating＞ １４ or more Compressor
＊Measured after 15 mins with strong （COMP）
fan operation

128
1. Measuring temperature
1) Indoor unit suction temperature, release temperature, temperature difference, → Measure by thermometer
2) 2-way valve pipe temperature in cooling mode is low temperature (benchmark：5 ~ 10°C), in heating mode
is medium temperature (benchmark：25 ~ 35°C).
3) 3-way valve pipe temperature in cooling mode is low temperature (benchmark：7 ~ 15°C) in heating mode is
high temperature (benchmark：38 ~ 50°C).
2. Measuring electric current
 Measuring electric current in operation → check by clump meter (refer to table of technical characteristic
guideline)
3. Measuring pressure
 Measuring gas pressure → check the pressure by manifold gauge (refer to table of technical characteristic
guideline)
4. Any sound from the expansion valve?
(when starting the operation and the outdoor unit is turned on, the expansion valve is re-set, check if there is any
edged sound or clack sound)

13.8.3 Guidance for diagnosis of refrigerant cycle

Comparison with Cooling mode

normal operation High Low
Excess insertion of refrigerant Clogged capillary, expansion valve malfunction
Refrigerant Heat releasing obstruction Clog by moisture
pressure Dirty condenser, attachment of impurity Lack of refrigerant gas
Compressor malfunction
Excess insertion of refrigerant Lack of refrigerant gas
Operation electric Heat releasing obstruction Compressor malfunction
current Dirty condenser, impurity Mixture of air
(Insufficient evacuation)
2-way valve Excess insertion of refrigerant Clogged capillary, expansion valve malfunction
temperature Compressor malfunction Lack of refrigerant gas
3-way valve Lack of refrigerant gas • Compressor malfunction Excess insertion of refrigerant
temperature Clogged capillary, expansion valve malfunction

Temperature difference at or less than 8°C in cooling operation • • • Causes

Suction
• Heat releasing obstruction • Dirty condenser • Attachment of impurity
temperature
& • Lack of refrigerant gas • Excess insertion of refrigerant
Release air
• Mixture of air • Mixture of moisture
temperature
• Clogged capillary • Expansion valve malfunction • Compressor malfunction

◎ Above all are based on the condition that the installation work is properly performed (no issues in indoor / outdoor
pipe connections, etc.)

129
14. Operation and Control
14.1 Basic Function
Inverter control, which equipped with a microcomputer in determining the most suitable operating mode as time
passes, automatically adjusts output power for maximum comfort always. In order to achieve the suitable operating
mode, the microcomputer maintains the set temperature by measuring the temperature of the environment and
performing temperature shifting. The compressor at outdoor unit is operating following the frequency instructed by
the microcomputer at indoor unit that judging the condition according to internal water setting temperature and water
outlet temperature.

14.1.1 Internal Water Setting Temperature

Once the operation starts, control panel setting temperature will be taken as base value for temperature shifting
processes. These shifting processes are depending on the Air-to-Water Heat pump settings and the operation
environment. The final shifted value will be used as internal water setting temperature and it is updated continuously
whenever the electrical power is supplied to the unit.

14.1.2 Heating Operation

14.1.2.1 Thermostat Control

 Compressor is OFF when Water Outlet Temperature – Internal Water Setting Temperature > 2°C for
continuously 3 minutes.
 Compressor is ON after waiting for 3 minutes, if the Water Outlet Temperature – Water Inlet Temperature
(temperature at thermostat OFF is triggered) <-3°C.

14.1.2.2 Thermostat Control (Outdoor Ambient Temperature)

Stops provide heating to room side during high outdoor ambient condition.
Control content:
 Heating operation and water pump will turn OFF when outdoor ambient temperature > outdoor thermo off
temperature + 3°C.
(Outdoor thermo off set temperature is set by control panel. Thermo off set temperature is between 5°C ~ 35°C)
 Heating operation will resume when Outdoor ambient temperature < Outdoor thermo OFF set temperature + 1°C.

14.1.2.3 Heat Mode Operation

Operation of heat pump provide heating capacity to room side by hot water through heating panel, floor heating or
fan coil unit.
1 3 ways valve control:
o 3 ways valve switch and fix to heating side.
2 Heat pump operates follow normal heating operation.
3 Back up heater operate follow normal operation.
4 2 ways valve control:
o 2 ways valve opens.

14.1.3 Cooling Operation

14.1.3.1 Thermostat control

 Compressor is OFF when Water Outlet Temperature – Internal Water Setting Temperature > -1.5°C for
continuously 3 minutes.
 Compressor is ON after waiting for 3 minutes, if the Water Outlet Temperature – Water Inlet Temperature
(temperature at thermostat OFF is triggered) >3°C.

14.1.3.2 Cool Mode Operation

1 3 ways valve control:
o 3 ways valve switch and fix to cooling side.
2 Heat pump operates follow normal cooling operation.
3 Room heater DOES NOT operate during cool mode.
4 2 ways valve control:
o 2 ways valve is closed.

130
14.1.4 Target Water Temperature Setting

14.1.4.1 Target Water Temperature Control of Standard System (Optional PCB not
connected)
There are 2 types of temperature control selection which are Compensation and Direct.
 Temperature control type selection by installer:
1 Compensation : Wlo, WHi, ODLo, ODHi can be set at installer menu.
2 Direct : Direct Water Temperature Set
 Remote control setting by user:
1 Compensation : Shift value ±5°C from the compensation curve
2 Direct : Direct water temperature set change

*This setting only able to set when room sensor select as Water Temperature.
*Instead of water temperature, user will set target room temperature when room sensor select as Room Thermistor
OR Internal Room Thermostat.

 Target water temperature is calculated as below condition.

o Target water temperature = A (Base temperature) + B (shift temperature)

Compensation Direct
A (Base Temperature)
Value from the curve + User shift value set Direct value from user setting

o B (shift temperature) value is depend on the room sensor selection at remote controller as below table:

B (Shift Temp.) B shift value depend on the room sensor selection at remocon as table below

Sensor selection
Water temperature B=0
External Room thermostat B=0
Cool Mode:
B = 0 ; when Zone OFF or Zone Room Thermo OFF
B = B = 1* (room set temp (R/C) – actual room temp)
Internal Room thermostat & Max/Min Regulation of B: (Max = 5 ; Min = -5)
Room Thermistor
Heat Mode:
B = 0 ; when Zone OFF or Zone Room Thermo OFF
B = follow Heating Room Temperature PI control logic

 Maximum/minimum regulation of Target Water Temperature

Heating Cooling
Max 55°C / 60°C* 20°C
Min 20°C 5°C

* Between outdoor ambient -10°C and -15°C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60°C to 55°C

Compensation Type: (Operation under Heat Mode and Cool Mode)

 The set temperature defines the parameters for the ambient (Outdoor temperature) dependent operation of the
unit. The water temperature is determined automatically depending on the outdoor temperature. Default setting is
the colder outdoor temperature will result in warmer water and vice versa. The user has the possibility to shift up
and shift down the target water by remote control setting.

OD (LO) = Setting Of LOW Outdoor Ambient Temperature.

OD (HI) = Setting Of HIGH Outdoor Ambient Temperature.
A W (LO) = Setting Of Water Temperature at LOW OD Ambient.
W (HI) = Setting Of Water Temperature at HIGH OD Ambient.

W (LO)

W (HI)

OD (LO) OD (HI) Outdoor

Ambient

131
 Outdoor ambient is updated every 30 minutes when operation ON.
 Setting water outlet temperature always follow W(LO) or W(HI) whenever is higher if outdoor ambient sensor or
indoor communication error happen.

However, when powerful mode is requested by remote control during heating mode, the higher value of HLo or Whi
will be used for A calculation.

* There are 2 compensation curves (for heating and cooling). During heating mode, the heating curve is used and
during cooling mode, the cooling curve is use.

 Compensation curve set shift value:

Tw

Tw_Hi

+5
Tw_Lo ±5 Shift value

-5

To_Lo To_Hi To

14.1.5 Target Water Temperature at Extension System (Optional PCB is connected)

Target water temperature is calculated as below.
 Heat Mode:
o Target water temperature setting:
o Max= 55°C / 60°C* Min= 20°C

* Between outdoor ambient -10°C and -15°C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60°C to 55°C

 When buffer tank selection is “YES:”

Target water temperature = Target buffer tank temperature + [2°C]

 When buffer tank selection is “NO”

o If both zone 1 and zone 2 is active
Target Water Temperature = Higher zone target water temperature of Zone 1 and Zone 2.
o If only one zone is active
Target Water Temperature = Zone target water temperature of active zone.

 Cool mode:
o Target water temperature setting:
Max = 20°C Min= 5°C

 When buffer tank selection is “YES”

o If both zone 1 and zone 2 active
Target Water Temperature = Lower Zone Target Water Temperature of Zone 1 and Zone 2
o If only one zone is active
Target Water Temperature = Zone Target Water Temperature of active zone

 When buffer tank selection is “NO”

o If both zone 1 and zone 2 active
Target Water Temperature = Lower Zone Target Water Temperature of Zone 1 and Zone 2
o If only one zone is active
Target Water Temperature = Zone Target Water Temperature of active zone

*Cool Mode does not have SG ready control

132
14.1.6 Target Zone Water Temperature Control
Purpose:- To control zone mixing and zone pump according to the zone sensor temperature

14.1.6.1 Target Zone 1 water temperature setting control

 Start condition
o Heating zone 1 is ON by remote control or Timer or Auto Mode OR
o Cooling zone 1 is ON by remote control or Timer or Auto Mode.

 Cancel condition
o Heating zone 1 is OFF by remote control or Timer or Auto mode AND
o Cooling zone 1 is OFF by remote control or Timer or Auto mode.

 Target Zone 1 water temperature is calculated as below condition.

o Target Zone 1 water temperature = A (Base temperature) + B (shift temperature)

Compensation Direct
A (Base Temperature)
Value from the curve + User shift value set Direct value from user setting

* During heat mode and compensation select, if powerful mode is activated, higher value of WLo or WHi will be use
as curve value.

o B (shift temperature) value is depend on the room sensor selection at remote controller as below table:

B (Shift Temp.) B shift value depend on the room sensor selection at remocon as table below

Sensor selection
Water temperature B=0
External Room thermostat B=0
Cool Mode:
B = 0 ; when Zone OFF or Zone Room Thermo OFF
B = B = 1* (room set temp (R/C) – actual room temp)
Internal Room thermostat & Max/Min Regulation of B: (Max = 5 ; Min = -5)
Room Thermistor
Heat Mode:
B = 0 ; when Zone OFF or Zone Room Thermo OFF
B = follow Heating Room Temperature PI control logic
Pool Function Selected B = Delta value setting from remocon

* B = 0 regardless of which sensor selection, if SHP control bit is enable except Pool function select (maintain Pool
“B” value)

** Pool function also can be select at Zone 1 when optional PCB is connected and Zone 1 system is select.

 Maximum/minimum regulation of Target Water Temperature.

Heating Cooling
Max 55°C / 60°C* 20°C
Min 20°C 5°C

* Between outdoor ambient -10°C and -15°C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60°C to 55°C

 Target Zone 1 Water Temperature (Heat mode only) during SG ready control
o If buffer tank selection is “NO” then following shift is carried out.
 While digital input is “10” or “11” then,
Final Target Zone 1 water temperature
= Target Zone 1 water temperature* (SG ready % setting (remote control menu))%
o If buffer tank selection is “YES”
 No shift of Target Zone 1 Water Temperature. Target Buffer Tank Temperature will change accordingly.
* Refer to “Buffer tank temperature control”

133
14.1.6.2 Target Zone 2 water temperature setting control
 Start condition
o Heating zone 2 is ON by remote control or Timer or Auto Mode OR
o Cooling zone 2 is ON by remote control or Timer or Auto Mode.

 Cancel condition
o Heating zone 2 is OFF by remote control or Timer or Auto mode AND
o Cooling zone 2 is OFF by remote control or Timer or Auto mode.
 Target Zone 2 water temperature is calculated as below condition.
o Target Zone 2 water temperature = A (Base temperature) + B (shift temperature)

Compensation Direct
A (Base Temperature)
Value from the curve + User shift value set Direct value from user setting

* During heat mode and compensation select, if powerful mode is activated, higher value of WLo or WHi will be use
as curve value.

o B (shift temperature) value is depend on the room sensor selection at remote controller as below table:

B (Shift Temp.) B shift value depend on the room sensor selection at remocon as table below

Sensor selection
Water temperature B=0
External Room thermostat B=0
Cool Mode:
B = 0 ; when Zone OFF or Zone Room Thermo OFF
B = B = 1* (room set temp (R/C) – actual room temp)
Internal Room thermostat & Max/Min Regulation of B: (Max = 5 ; Min = -5)
Room Thermistor
Heat Mode:
B = 0 ; when Zone OFF or Zone Room Thermo OFF
B = follow Heating Room Temperature PI control logic
Pool Function Selected B = Delta value setting from remocon

* B = 0 regardless of which sensor selection, if SHP control bit is enable except Pool function select (maintain Pool
“B” value)

** Pool function also can be select at Zone 2 when optional PCB is connected and Zone 2 system is select.

 Maximum/minimum regulation of Target Water Temperature.

Heating Cooling
Max 55°C / 60°C* 20°C
Min 20°C 5°C

* Between outdoor ambient -10°C and -15°C, the water outlet temperature gradually decreases from 60°C to 55°C

 Target Zone 2 Water Temperature (Heat mode only) during SG ready control
o If buffer tank selection is “NO” then following shift is carried out.
 While digital input is “10” or “11” then,
Final Target Zone 2 water temperature
= Target Zone 1 water temperature* (SG ready % setting (remote control menu))%
o If buffer tank selection is “YES”
 No shift of Target Zone 2 Water Temperature. Target Buffer Tank Temperature will change accordingly.
* Refer to “Buffer tank temperature control”

134
14.1.6.3 Zone Temperature Control Contents
 During Standard System (Optional PCB not connected)
o Only 1 zone temperature control is available
o This zone room temperature is control by either one of the 4 room sensor (Room Th, Int/Ext Room
Thermostat, Water temperature)
o Target Zone Water Temperature is calculated based on selected temperature control type (Compensation or
Direct) and selected room sensor. Target Water Temperature will set same as Target Zone Water
Temperature
o Target Water Temperature is the temperature for heat pump to operate refer to indoor water outlet sensor.
o Heat pump and water pump OFF when ROOM Thermo OFF (Zone thermo OFF by Room Th or Room
Thermostat).

* There will be no zone sensor connected to zone 1 (No zone sensor error), mixing valve and zone pump will not
operate.

 During Extension System (Optional PCB connected)

* There will be no zone sensor connected to zone 1 (No zone sensor error), mixing valve and zone pump will not
operate.
 During Extension System (Optional PCB connected)

 Buffer Tank connection select "NO" &

o One zone system is select
 This zone room temperature control by either one of the 4 room sensor (Room Th, Int/Ext Room
Thermostat, Water temp.)
 Target Zone Water Temperature calculate base on selected temperature control type (Compensation or
Direct) and selected room sensor.
 Target Water Temperature will set same as Target Zone Water Temperature
 Target Water Temperature is a temperature for heat pump to operate refer to indoor water outlet sensor.
 Heat pump and water pump OFF when ROOM Thermo OFF (Zone thermo OFF by Room Th or Room
Thermostat).

* There will be no zone sensor connected to zone 1 (No zone sensor error), mixing valve and zone pump will not
operate.

o 2 zone system select

 Each zone room temperature is control by each sensor which select from either one of the 4 room sensor
 Target Zone 1 & 2 Water Temperature is calculated based on selected temperature control type
(Compensation or Direct) and selected room sensor.
* Zone Mixing Valve & Zone pump will operate to achieve Target Zone Water Temperature which refer to
zone sensor.
* Zone Sensor will detect if zone sensor is open or short.
 Target Water Temperature will set same as the active & higher zone water temperature setting. (When
cooling mode, lower zone water temp setting)
 Target Water Temperature is the temperature for heat pump to operate refer to indoor water outlet
sensor.
 Heat pump and water pump OFF when ROOM Thermo OFF (Both Zone thermo OFF by Room Th or
Room Thermostat).

 Buffer Tank Connection select "YES" &

o 1 zone system or 2 zone system select
 Each zone control by each sensor which select from either one of the 4 room sensor
 Target Zone 1 & 2 Water Temperature calculate base on selected temperature control type
(Compensation or Direct) and selected room sensor. Each zone have their own Target Zone Water
Temperature.
* Zone Mixing Valve & Zone pump will operate to achieve each Target Zone Water Temperature which
refer to zone sensor
* Zone Sensor will detect if zone sensor is open or short.
 Target Buffer Tank Temperature will be set as active & higher zone water temperature setting + Buffer
Delta T. (Heating) Target Buffer Tank Temperature will be set as active & lower zone water temperature
setting (Cooling).
 Target Water Temperature will set as Target Buffer Tank Temperature + [2°C] (Heating) Target Water
Temperature will set as Lower or Active Target Zone Water Temp. + [-3°C] (Cooling)
 Target Water Temperature is a temperature for heat pump to operate refer to indoor water outlet sensor.

135
  Heat pump and water pump OFF when ROOM thermo OFF
 Heat mode: ROOM thermo OFF (Buffer Tank Temperature > Target Buffer Tank + [0°C]
 Cool mode: ROOM Thermo OFF (Both Zone thermo OFF by Room Th or Room Thermostat)

14.1.7 Auto Mode Operation

COOL
MODE
Heat To Cool
Setting Temp. Cool To Heat
Setting Temp.
HEAT
MODE

Outdoor Ambient

 Control details:
o To enable the unit to operate either heat or cool mode automatically, heat to cool set temperature and
cool to heat set temperature can be set by control panel.
o Automatic operation is judged based on control panel setting temperature and outdoor ambient
temperature.
* Minimum setting of heat to cool set temperature is 1°C higher than cool to heat set temperature.

 Judgement control:
o If outdoor ambient temperature < Heat to Cool Set Temperature, unit will operate in Heat Mode or else
the unit will operate in Cool Mode.
o If current operation is Cool mode, outdoor ambient temperature > Cool to Heat Temperature, unit will
maintain Cool mode operation or else the unit will operate Heat mode.
o If current operation is Heat mode, outdoor ambient temperature >Heat to Cool Temperature, unit will
maintain Heat mode operation or else the unit will operate Cool mode.
o Every 60 minutes the outdoor ambient temperature is judged.
o When Auto + Tank mode is selected, operation mode switching is judged by both outdoor ambient
temperature and indoor air temperature.

14.1.8 Auto Cooling Mode Operation Limit

Compressor
ON
10°C
8°C
Compressor
OFF

Outdoor Ambient
Temperature

 Auto Mode Cooling Only operation will start once the outdoor ambient temperature reaches 10°C and
compressor will continue to run until the outdoor ambient temperature drops to 8°C.
 Due to this limitation,
If Heat to Cool temperature is set lower than 10°C, the compressor will not operates until the outdoor
ambient temperature reaches 10°C or higher.

14.1.9 Tank Mode Operation

 3 ways valve direction
o 3 ways valve switch to tank side during Tank Thermo ON condition. Switch 3 ways valve to room side when
tank achieve Tank Thermo OFF temperature.

 Tank Thermo ON/OFF Characteristic

o Tank Thermo OFF

Case 1: Internal Tank Heater is select and Tank Heater ON

o Tank temperature > Tank Set Temperature continuously for 15 seconds.
o Water outlet >75°C

136
 Case 2: Tank Heater OFF OR External Heater is select
o When heat pump OFF due to water thermos & Tank temperature > Tank water set temperature for
continuously 20 seconds. OR
o Tank temperature > Tank set temperature + 1°C for continuously 20 seconds.

o Tank Thermo ON

Case 1: Tank Heater ON (Internal Tank Heater)

o Tank temperature < Tank set temperature + R/C (Tank re-heat temperature)

Case 2: Tank Heater OFF (Internal Tank Heater)

o Tank temperature < Tank water set temperature + R/C (Tank re-heat temperature)

* When tank thermo ON, water pump will ON for 3 minutes then only heat pump turn ON.
* Tank water set temperature = tank set temperature or 51°C whichever lower.

 2 ways valve close

 Heat pump Thermostat Characteristic
o Heat pump Water Outlet set temperature is set to below table:

Outdoor ambient temperature Heat pump water outlet temperature

< -10°C 56°C
> -10°C 59°C

Characteristic of heat pump thermos ON/OFF under tank mode condition:

Water Outlet Thermo Condition

 Heat pump thermos OFF temperature:
1 Heat pump thermo OFF temperature = Target Water outlet temperature + (2°C)
2 Water outlet temperature > heat pump thermo OFF temperature for continuously 3 minutes, heat pump OFF
but water pump continue ON.

 Heat pump thermo ON temperature

1 Heat pump thermo ON temperature = water inlet during thermo OFF time + [-3°C]
2 When water outlet temperature < heat pump thermo ON temperature, heat pump ON.

Water inlet thermo protection condition

 Heat pump thermo OFF temperature:
1 Water inlet temperature > [57°C/55°C] for continuously 30 seconds, heat pump OFF, water pump continue
ON.

 Heat pump thermo ON temperature:

1 Heat pump thermos ON temp = water inlet temperature < [57°C/55°C].

Outdoor ambient temperature Water inlet temperature

< -10°C 55°C
> -10°C 60°C

Thermo ON/OFF for Heat Pump in Tank Operation:

When tank temperature achieve heat pump OFF condition, refer below condition:
Conditon 1 : Tank Heater ON (Internal Tank Heater)
 Heat pump will turn OFF, water pump continue ON and room heater will continue ON if tank temperature below
tank heater thermo ON condition. 3 ways valve will only switch to room side after tank temperature reach tank
heater thermo OFF condition.

137
Conditon 2 : Tank Heater OFF (Internal Tank Heater)
 If tank temperature achieve tank thermo OFF, heat pump turn OFF, water pump turn OFF, room heater OFF and
3 ways valve switch to room side.

When tank temperature achieve heat pump ON condition, water pump ON, heat pump ON and room heater turn OFF.

Heat pump OFF condition at Tank Mode

o Tank temperature > tank water set temperature continuously for 20 seconds after heat pump thermos OFF
due to water thermo. (Heat pump turn OFF but water pump continue ON and room heater turn ON to achieve
tank set temperature) OR
o Tank temperature > tank set temperature + [1°C] for continuously 20 seconds. (Heat pump OFF, water pump
OFF, room heater OFF and 3 ways valve switch to room side)

Heat pump ON condition at Tank Mode

o Tank temperature < tank water set temperature + R/C setting (Tank re-heat temp) (Water pump turn ON OR
continue ON, heat pump ON and 3 ways valve switch to tank side or maintain at tank side)

Tank heater control

 Internal heater only operates to tank side if Tank heater ON and backup heater is enable.

Internal heater turn ON condition:

 Tank temperature < tank set temperature AND

 Heat pump thermos OFF AND
 20 minutes from previous heater off AND
 Internal tank heater selects USE from control panel.

Internal heater turn OFF condition:

 Tank temperature > tank set temperature for continuously 15 seconds OR
 Heat pump thermo ON OR
 Mode change or operation is off by control panel.

14.1.10 Heat + Tank Mode Operation

1 3 ways valve control:
o 3 ways valve switch to room side during room heat-up interval and switch to tank side during tank heat-
up interval. Both modes will switch alternately. Tank mode is the initial running mode of Heat + Tank
mode.

2 Heat pump operation control:

o During room heat-up interval
 Follow normal heating operation.
Switching to tank side depends to below cases:
Case 1:
[Previous switch from tank interval to room interval due to thermo OFF]
 Switch to tank heat-up interval when Tank temp < Tank thermos ON temp (Room heat-up interval
ends)
Case 2:
[If heating operation at room side is less than 30 minutes and switch to tank side 3 times
consecutively]
 Maintain at room heat-up interval regardless of the tank temperature. Switch to tank heat-up interval
only when (Room Interval Timer is complete OR Room heat pump thermo OFF) AND Tank
temperature < Tank thermo ON temperature.
Case 3:
[Previous switch from tank interval to room interval due to tank interval timer is complete]
 Maintain at room heat-up interval regardless of the tank temperature. Switch to tank heat-up interval
only when (Room Interval Timer is complete OR Room heat pump thermo OFF) AND tank
temperature < Tank thermo ON temperature.
o During Tank heat-up interval
 Tank interval is the first mode running when heat + tank mode is select.
 Switch to room interval only when tank achieve tank thermo OFF OR tank heat-up interval timer is
complete.
 Heat pump operates according to normal tank mode operation.

138
 3 Room heater control:
o During heating heat-up interval
 Follow normal room heater control operation.

4 Tank heater control:

o During heating heat-up interval
 Internal tank heater will not function under heating heat-up interval.
o During tank heat-up interval
 Internal tank heater will turn ON after heat pump thermo off to boil tank temperature to tank set
temperature.
o 2 ways valve control is open
o Indoor water pump control:
 Indoor water pump always turn ON if room heat pump thermo ON OR Tank thermo ON.

14.1.11 Cool + Tank Mode Operation

1 3 ways valve control:
o 3 ways valve switch to room side during room cooling interval and switch to tank side during tank heat-
up interval. Both mode will switch alternately. Tank mode is the initial mode of cool + tank mode.

2 Heat pump operation control:

o During room heat-up interval
 Follow normal cooling operation.
Switching to tank side depends to below cases:
Case 1:
[Previous switch from tank interval to room interval due to thermo OFF]
 Switch to tank heat-up interval when Tank temperature < Tank Thermo ON temperature (Room
interval will ends)
Case 2:
[If cooling operation at room side is less than 30 minutes and switch to tank side for 3 times
consecutively]
 Maintain at room cooling interval regardless of the tank temperature. Switch to tank heat-up interval
only when (Room Interval Timer is complete OR Room heat pump thermo OFF) AND Tank
temperature < Tank thermo ON temperature.
Case 3:
[Previous switch from tank interval to room interval is due to tank interval timer is complete]
 Maintain at room cooling interval regardless of the tank temperature. Switch to tank heat-up interval
only when (Room Interval Timer is complete OR Room heat pump thermo OFF) AND tank
temperature < Tank thermo ON temperature.

*Tank Thermo ON temperature:

Internal Tank Heater select USE <Tank set temperature + R/C setting (Tank re-heat temperature)
Others <Tank water set temperature + R/C setting (Tank re-heat temperature)

o During Tank heat-up interval

 Tank interval is the first mode running when the cool + tank mode is select.
 Switch to room interval only when tank achieve tank thermo OFF OR tank heat-up interval timer is
complete.
 Heat pump operates according to normal tank mode operation.

3 Room heater control:

o During room cooling interval
 Room heater is OFF and not operates.

4 Tank heater control:

o During room cooling interval
 Internal tank heater will not function under room cooling interval.
o During tank heat-up interval
 Internal tank heater will turn ON after heat pump thermos off to boil tank temperature to tank set
temperature.

139
 5 2 ways valve is close.

6 Indoor water pump control:

o Indoor water pump always turn ON if room heat pump thermo ON OR Tank thermo ON.

14.1.12 Outdoor Fan Motor Operation

Outdoor fan motor is adjusted according to operation condition. It starts when compressor starts operation and it
stops 30 seconds after compressor stops operation.
ON ON
Compressor:
OFF

ON Fan Speed ON
Outdoor Fan:
30 sec
OFF

14.2 Water Pump

14.2.1 Water Pump Control
 Once the indoor unit is ON, the water pump will be ON immediately and no error judgment for 70 seconds.
However, during this 70 seconds operation, if there is any abnormality cause at outdoor or malfunction, the
compressor should be OFF immediately and restart delay after 3 minutes.
 The system will start checking on the water flow level after operation start for 70 seconds. If water flow level is
detected low continuously 60 seconds, the water pump and the compressor will be OFF permanently and
OFF/ON control panel LED will blink (H62 error occurs).
 When error happens, the power has to be reset to clear the error.
 If there is no error indication, the water pump shall be continuously running.
 The water pump will remain ON when compressor OFF due to thermostat OFF setting is reached.
 Water pump will OFF when room thermo OR tank thermo OR buffer tank thermo OFF.
 Water pump will delay 15 seconds to turn OFF when request to OFF except during anti-freeze deice activate or
air purge mode.

Pump ON Request

YES

ON Water Pump

NO
Pump ON Time
≥ 70 Sec?

YES

NO
Water Flowrate Abnormal
> 15 Sec?

YES

OFF Water Pump H62 Error Display

at Remote Controller

Maximum pump speed setting on remote control

 Standard pump speed is automatically controlled to get the designed water temperature different between water
inlet and outlet (∆T). Instead of setting the standard pump speed, maximum pump speed is manually adjusted by
the installer according to water circuit pressure drop.

However, the following sequences do not follow maximum pump duty setting by remote control.
 Pump down mode
 Air purge mode
 Normal deice

140
1) P-Q graph for different pump HEX duty

P-Q (WH-ADC0309J3E5)
150

140

130

120

110

100

90

Pressure, P (kpa)
80

70
Max Duty: C5
60

50

40

30
Duty: 6E
20

10
Min Duty: 50
0
0 10 20 30 40 50

Water Flow Rate, Q (L/min)

14.2.2 Zone Water Pump Control

Purpose:
 Water pump install at each zone to circulate the water inside each zone during buffer tank connection selected
“YES” or 2 zone systems.

Content:
 AC type water pump install for this zone water pump control. When optional PCB connected, 230V output will
drive this zone pump.
 There are three pump can be connected through Optional PCB. (Zone 1 Pump, Zone 2 Pump, & Pool Pump)

* Zone 1 pump [P1] use to circulate zone 1 water circuit & Zone 1 mixing valve [M1] adjust to control the Zone 1
target water temperature.

* Zone 2 pump [P2] use to circulate zone 2 water circuit & Zone 2 mixing valve [M2] adjust to control the Zone 2
target water temperature.

* When Pool Function select as Zone 2 circuit, [P2] use to circulate water to heat exchanger which use to transfer
heat to pool water.

* Pool pump [P3] circulates the pool water through the heat exchanger to get warm water.

 Zone 1 and Zone 2 water pump start condition:

o Zone room request ON
(eg. Zone 1 thermo ON, only zone 1 pump will turn ON)
 Zone 1 and Zone 2 water pump stop condition:
o Zone room request OFF
 Pool water pump start condition:
o Pool Zone request ON AND
o Pool function is selected

141
 Pool water pump stop condition
o Pool zone: Zone room request OFF OR
o Pool function is cancel

* Zone 1 & Zone 2 water pump need to turn OFF when antifreeze deice pump stop control activate and turn
ON back after the antifreeze deice pump stop control end under setting of "NO" buffer tank connection.

Zone Pump Prohibit ON control:

 Start condition:
Zone 1 water temperature ≥ 75°C continuously for 5 minutes
*stop zone water pump operates if the zone water fulfilled.
 Cancel condition:
After 30 minutes from start condition fulfilled.
*zone water pump operates according to normal condition.

Zone Pump Control during Anti-Freeze

Zone pump control during Zone Anti-Freeze Control:
 When Zone Anti-Freeze Flag=1, Zone Pump Turn ON.
 When Zone Anti-Freeze Flag=0, Zone Pump Turn OFF.
Zone pump control during Indoor Anti-Freeze Control:
 Zone pump only ON/OFF if the Extension PCB connected and Buffer Tank select "NO" condition

When Indoor Anti-Freeze flag=1, Zone Pump Turn ON

When Indoor Anti-Freeze flag=0, Zone Pump Turn OFF
* Pool Water Pump will not affected by both Indoor anti-freeze control or zone anti-freeze control.

14.2.3 Water Pump Speed Feedback Error

 Basically pump speed feedback is control by micon.
 When pump speed is below low limit or over high limit for a few seconds, micon detect pump error and system is
stopped.
 Error detection conditions:
o Detect abnormal water pump speed for continuous 10 secs.
o Current pump speed < 700 rpm or
o Current pump speed > 6000 rpm for 10 seconds.
 Control contents:
o When error occurs, water pump, heating and heater is stopped for 30 seconds then restart again (Retry
control).
o When micon detect error again, system is stopped and error code [H20] is displayed at control panel.

142
14.3 Indoor Unit Safety
14.3.1 Indoor Unit Safety Control
1 When water pump is ON, the system will start checking flow switch status (ON/OFF).
2 If the flow switch ON for 10 seconds, the system will check on the water inlet temperature for 10 seconds.
If the water inlet temperature not exceeds 80°C, the water pump shall be continuously running with normal
mode.
If the water inlet temperature exceeds 80°C for continuously 10 seconds, the water pump will be OFF
immediately.
3 After water pump OFF for more than 10 minutes, it will be ON back and the indoor unit safety control
checking is restarted.

Pump ON

10s
Flow SW ON?

YES

NO to normal mode
Water In > 80°C for 10s

YES

Pump OFF

>10 mins

YES

14.4 Auto Restart Control

1 When the power supply is cut off during the operation of Air-to-Water Heatpump, the compressor will
reoperate after power supply resumes.

14.5 Indication Panel

LED Operation
Color Green
Light ON Operation ON
Light OFF Operation OFF

Note:
 If Operation LED is blinking, there is an abnormality operation occurs.

143
14.6 Indoor Back-Up Heater Control
14.6.1 Indoor Electric Heater Control
1 Normal Heating Mode
o Heater On condition:
a. Heater switch is ON
b. After Heatpump thermo ON for Remote Control Set Delay Time mins
c. After water pump operate [9] mins
d. Outdoor air temperature < Outdoor set temperature for heater
e. When water outlet temperature < Water set temperature + Remote Control Heater ON Setting
f. [20] minutes since previous Backup heater Off
* When heatpump cannot operate due to error happens during normal operation, heater will go into
force mode automatic
* Heater need to operate during deice operation

o Heater Stop Condition:

a. When outdoor set temperature > outdoor set temperature + [+2°C] for continuous 15 secs OR
b. When water out temp > water set temperature + Remote Control Heater OFF Setting for continuous 15
secs OR
c. Heater switch is Off OR
d. Heatpump thermo-off or OFF condition

2 Force Heater Mode

o Heater On condition:
a. After water pump operate [9] mins
b. When water outlet temperature < water set temperature + Remote Control Heater ON Setting
c. [20] minutes since previous Backup heater Off

o Heater Stop condition

a. Force mode off OR
b. When water outlet temperature > water set temperature + Remote Control Heater OFF Setting for
continuous 15 secs

* Do not operate heater at the following situation

1 Water outlet temperature sensor, and water inlet sensor abnormal
2 Flow switch abnormal
3 Circulation pump stop condition

144
14.6.2 Room Heater Operation during Deice
Purpose:
 To protect the indoor Heat Exchanger from ice forming and prevent heat exchanger plate breakage.

Control content:
 This Heater protection control will activate only if the backup heater is enable at custom setup by remote
controller. Once fulfil the start condition, room heater will turn ON together (base on max heater capacity
selection) and stop together if stop condition is fulfilled.
* If the heater is request to turn ON OLP feedback will be detected.

Starting conditions:
 During normal deice operation 4~9
 Water outlet temperature < 10°C or
Outdoor air temperature < -10°C or
Water inlet temperature < 27°C

Heater operates when 1 ~2 fulfilled OR When 1 and 3 ~ 4 is fulfilled.

However, this control does not relate to Heater ON/OFF button on remote control.

Stop condition:
 When normal deice end or
 Water outlet temperature > 45°C

However, room heater keeps ON if indoor electric heater control activate.

145
14.7 Tank Heater Control
14.7.1 Tank Heater Remote Control Setting
1 Tank heater selection:
External: - Booster Heater use to heat up tank when select external
Internal: - Backup Heater use to heat up tank when select internal
* When select External Tank Heater, Heater Delay ON Timer need to set. (range 20 min ~ 3 hrs)

2 Tank Heater ON/OFF selection by user.

The remote control Tank set Temperature range will change according to the External and Internal Tank Heater use.

Tank Heater Selection Range

External 40 ~ 75°C
Internal 40 ~ 65°C

14.7.2 Internal Heater Control at Tank Mode

 Internal heater turn ON condition:
1 Internal Heater select for Tank heater by remote controller
2 Tank Heater select ON by user.
3 Backup Heater Enable
4 Tank Temperature < Tank Set Temperature
5 Heat Pump Thermo OFF
6 20 minutes from previous heater off.

 Room heater turn OFF condition:

1 Tank Temperature > Tank Set Temperature + [0°C] for continuous 15 seconds. OR
2 Heat Pump Thermo ON OR
3 Mode Change or Operation OFF by remote controller OR

* Backup Heater Turn ON/OFF all together according to the selected heater capacity.

Tank
Temp.

65°C

Tank Water Set Temp

Backup
Heater
Operation
Heat Pump
Operation

Time

146
14.8 Base Pan Heater Control (Optional)
 To enable the base pan heater function, control panel initial setting has to be manually adjusted by activating
Base Pan Heater menu.
 There are 2 optional start condition can be selected, Type A or Type B.
 Control details:
1 Type A: (Default Auto Mode)
Start conditions:
o When outdoor air temperature ≤ 3°C during heating and deice operation is ON.

Control contents:
o Base pan heater is ON during deice operation and continues ON for 10 minutes after deice operation
ends.

Cancel condition:
o When outdoor temperature > 6°C after deice end or
o When operation is not at heating mode or
o Base pan heater ON timer count is completed.

2 Type B: (ON Mode)

Start conditions:
o When outdoor air temperature is ≤ 5°C and operates in heating mode, base pan heater is ON.

Cancel conditions:
o When outdoor air temperature is > 7°C or
o When operation is not at heating mode.

14.9 Force Heater Mode

Purpose of Force Heater Mode:
 As a backup heat source when heat pump error. Force heater Mode only control backup heater to heat up the
room circuit, and turn ON back up heater or booster heater to boil up tank water base on the tank heater
selection (internal or external).

Force Heater Control start condition:

 Force heater request ON by user during error OR auto turn ON by remote controller during error AND
(Force Heater mode can be operate regardless of mode selection, remocon will send the latest mode selection
force bit by bit to indoor. Indoor will judge to turn ON heater to room side if it is heat mode selected, and turn ON
heater to heat tank water base on tank heater selection)
 During Error Happen (exclude the error list below)

Error List which not allow Force Heater operation

H12 Capacity Mismatch H76 Indoor-Remote Controller Communication Error

H20 Abnormal Water Pump H95 Abnormal Voltage Connection
H62 Abnormal Water Flow F37 Abnormal Water Inlet sensor
H70 Abnormal Back-up Heater OLP H45 Abnormal Water Outlet sensor
H74 PCB Communication Error
[ When tank mode operate with external heater selected & tank heater select ON ]
H73 Abnormal tank sensor H91 Abnormal tank heater OLP

Force Heater Control Stop Condition:

 Force Heater request OFF OR
 Operation OFF request OR
 Power reset OR
 Error of above list happens during force heater operation.

147
Control contents:
 After fulfill start condition, indoor will operate the force heater operation according to below mode condition
Heat mode Only: Turn ON backup heater to achieve room heat pump target water temperature.
Heat + Tank mode: Turn ON backup heater to heat up room OR Turn ON Heater to Boil up tank water.
Cool mode Only: Water pump and backup heater will OFF in force heater mode.
Cool + Tank mode: Operate pump and internal Heater OR External heater to Boil up tank water.
Tank mode Only: Operate pump and internal Heater OR External heater to Boil up tank water.
* For heat mode condition, backup heater will only turn ON if the backup heater is enable regardless of Room
Heater Selection.
* For tank mode condition, If internal heater selected backup heater will turn ON to boil up tank water.
If external heater selected , booster heater will turn ON to boil up tank water regardless of tank heater selection.

Room Side: (Heat Mode):

 When force heater mode start condition fulfilled, turn ON water pump and turn ON backup heater follow below
control.
 Operate the 3 ways valve at room side only and turn ON 2 ways valve as heat mode operation.
 Turn ON the zone pump and mixing valve if system select 2 zone system or Buffer tank connect YES, control
according to normal zone pump and mixing valve control.
 When Force heater mode stop condition fulfilled, turn OFF heater as below condition and turn OFF water pump
after pump delay time.

Backup Heater On Condition:

 When Force Heater Control start condition fulfill AND
 After water pump operate 2 minutes AND
 When water outlet temperature < water set temperature + Remote Control Heater ON Setting AND
 20 minutes since previous Backup heater Off AND
 Backup Heater Enable

Backup Heater Stop condition:

 Force mode off OR
 Operation off OR
 When water outlet temperature > water set temperature + Remote Control Heater OFF Setting for continuous 15
secs OR
* ON/OFF follow normal heater sequence.

Tank side (Tank mode):

 When tank mode select and force heater bit received, turn ON backup heater (INTERNAL) or Booster Heater
(External) depend on the tank heater selection.
 If tank heater selection is INTERNAL, follow normal thermo judgement to switch 3 ways valve to tank side and
room side.
 If tank heater selection is EXTERNAL, only turn ON booster heater according to tank thermo.

Tank Heater selection is INTERNAL:

Backup Heater ON Condition:
 After water pump operate 2 mins AND
 When tank temperature < Tank set temperature - [Remocon Set Tank Re-heat Temp] AND
 20 minutes since previous Backup heater OFF AND
 Backup Heater Enable

Backup Heater OFF condition:

 Force mode off OR
 When tank temperature > Tank set temperature for continuous 15 secs OR
 Tank Operation OFF

Tank Heater selection is EXTERNAL:

Booster Heater ON condition:
 Force Heater mode ON AND
 Tank temperature < tank set temperature + [Remocon Set Tank Re-heat Temp] - 1°C, AND
 20 minutes since previous heater off.

148
Booster Heater OFF condition:
 Tank temperature > tank set temperature for continuous 15 secs.
 Force mode OFF
 Tank Mode Operation OFF
(During tank interval or tank mode condition, water pump and 3 ways valve will OFF)

14.10 Powerful Operation

Powerful mode is use to increase the capacity of heat pump to achieve higher target temperature. Powerful mode is
applicable when heat mode is operating.

Remote control setting:

On quick menu of remote control, there is 4 options of powerful mode can be select.
- OFF : Cancel powerful mode
- 30 minutes : Set powerful for 30 minutes
- 60 minutes : Set powerful for 60 minutes
- 90 minutes : Set powerful for 90 minutes

Control contents:
During the time set by remote control, powerful will activate according to 2 shift up controls. However, this function is
applicable only for heating. Remote control will transmit the signal to indoor unit once this function is select then
transmit OFF signal to indoor when the timer is complete. Indoor will transmit signal to outdoor for frequency control.

Indoor setting temperature shift

 If system is standard system (Optional PCB is not connected)

o Target water temperature will shift up to Wlo or Whi whichever higher.
 If system is extension system (Optional PCB is connected)
o Target water Zone 1 and Zone 2 temperature will shift up to Wlo or Whi whichever higher.

* If “Direct Type” temperature control is select, this powerful shift up setting is not effective.

 Start condition
o Powerful function is select by remote control.

 End Condition
o OFF/ON button is pressed.
o Powerful function is OFF by remote control.

14.11 Quiet Operation

Quiet mode is use to reduce the noise of outdoor unit by reducing the frequency or fan speed.

Quiet level
There are 3 level (Level 1, Level 2, Level 3) to set by quick menu function on remote control.

Control content
Once the quiet function is select, the remote control will transmit the signal to indoor and outdoor unit.

Start condition
 Quiet mode is set on remote control.
 Quiet mode is request ON by weekly timer.

Stop condition
If any of below condition is achieve.
 OFF/ON button is pressed.
 Quiet mode is OFF by remote control.
 Quiet mode is request OFF by weekly timer.

149
14.12 Sterilization Mode
 Purpose:
o To sterilize water tank by setting the required boiling temperature.

 Remote control setting

o Days for sterilization function to start can be select.
o Time of selected day to start sterilization function.
o Boiling temperature (Internal heater is 55°C ~ 65°C)
o Maximum operation time is 5 minutes to 1 hour.

 Start condition
o Tank connection set to “YES” by remote control
o Sterilization function selects “YES”.
o Sterilization signal received from remote controller by timer.
o Tank mode request ON.

 Stop condition
o When boiling timer is completed. Boiling timer (Remote control set maximum operation time) start counting
once tank achieve boiling set temperature OR
o After 8 hours of operation since sterilization start.
o Tank mode request OFF.

 Control content:
o During sterilization function activation time, target tank set temperature will internally change to boiling set
temperature.
o During sterilization activates, heat pump and heater (external or internal) will operate as normal tank mode to
achieve the boiling set temperature.
o Sterilization operation will end when stop condition is fulfill.
o After sterilization is complete, tank set temperature will resume to normal operation.

* Tank temperature may not achieve boiling set temperature if tank heater is select OFF OR external compressor
switch.

14.13 Outdoor Ambient Thermo OFF Control

 Purpose:
o Stop provides heating to room side during high outdoor ambient condition.

OFF

Outdoor thermo off set

temperature + 3°C

ON Outdoor thermo off set temperature +

1°C

 Control content:
o Heating outdoor ambient thermos OFF control only applicable when heat pump operate in heat mode. (This
control will not activate when running in tank side)
o Heat pump and water pump will turn OFF when outdoor ambient is higher than outdoor thermo OFF set
temperature.
o Heat pump thermos ON when outdoor ambient < outdoor thermos OFF set temperature + 1°C.

150
14.14 Alternative Outdoor Ambient Sensor Control
Purpose of the Alternative Outdoor Ambient Sensor:
 It is some possibility that the air to water heat pump unit will install at a location where the original ambient sensor
is expose to direct sunlight. Therefore, another optional ambient sensor can be connect to indoor PCB and locate
at new and better reading location to improve the heat pump performance.

Control Detail:
 Remocon can select either the extra outdoor ambient sensor is connected or not. (YES/NO)
 The alternative outdoor ambient sensor will connect to indoor unit main PCB terminal.

o when alternative sensor select NO

 Original Outdoor temperature sensor will use for Indoor & Outdoor heat pump operation reference
sensor.
 Data communication direction : OUTDOOR send outdoor temperature reading to INDOOR.
 Error judge : OUTDOOR will judge the original outdoor sensor error (F36 display if error detect). No
judge error on alternative outdoor sensor

o when alternative sensor select YES

 Alternative Outdoor temperature sensor will use for Indoor & Outdoor heat pump operation reference
sensor.
 Data communication direction : INDOOR send outdoor temperature reading to OUTDOOR.
 Error judge : INDOOR will judge the Extra outdoor sensor error only after operation ON request received
from remocon.
(F36 display if error detect). No judge error on original outdoor sensor.

14.15 Force DHW mode

Purpose:
When user want to use hot water now, user can press this force DWH mode under the quick menu to operate tank
only mode to boil up the tank temperature.

Remocon setting:
Force DHW function can be activate under quick menu.

Control Content:
 when press the Force DHW function during operation OFF condition:
o When receive this Force DHW bit from remocon, indoor will run tank only mode regardless of the mode
selection.
o After tank temperature achieve tank thermo off temperature, turn OFF force DHW bit and return to operation
OFF with previous mode selection.
 When press the Force DHW function during operation ON condition:
o When receive this Force DHW bit from remocon, indoor will memories the running mode and run tank only
mode regardless of the mode selection.
o After tank temperature achieve tank thermo off temperature, turn OFF force DHW bit and return to previous
memories running mode.

* when operation OFF or mode change request from remocon during force DHW mode operation, End force
DHW mode and follow the new request operation.

* Once receive force DHW mode from remocon, indoor direct start tank mode and consider tank thermo ON.
Thermo OFF only when achieve tank thermo OFF depend on the Tank System Setting.

151
14.16 SMART DHW mode
Panasonic All In One model provide the option to choose STANDARD DHW Mode or SMART DHW Mode for Tank
Heat Up according to requirement. SMART DHW mode comparatively consume lower tank heat up power but longer
re-heat time than STANDARD DHW Mode.

SMART DHW control

 During SMART DHW start time 20:00 (Default Setting) to SMART DHW stop time 05:00 (Default setting)
Heat pump re-heat the tank water only when tank temperature drop below 20°C (Default setting)

 Time between 05:00 to 20:00

Heat pump reheat the tank water when tank temperature as below condition

Condition 1: Tank Heater ON

Reheat when tank temperature below tank set temperature + R/C (Tank re-heat Temperature) - 3°C

Condition 2: Tank Heater OFF

Reheat when tank temperature below Tank set temperature or 51°C (Whichever lower) + R/C (Tank re-heat
Temperature) -3°C

* SMART DHW start time, stop time and SMART ON Temperature can change in CUSTOM menu.

14.17 Anti Freeze Control

 Anti freeze protection control menu can be set YES or NO by control panel.
 In heatpump system, there are 3 types of anti freeze control:
1. Expansion tank anti-freeze control
 Expansion tank anti freeze heater ON condition:
o Outdoor ambient temp. < 3°C
 Expansion tank anti freeze heater OFF condition:
o Outdoor ambient temp. > 4°C

2. Water pump circulation anti freeze control

 Water pump turns ON when ALL below conditions are fulfilled:
o Heatpump OFF (stand by) OR error occurs.
o Water flowing flag is ON.
o Water flow switch is not abnormal.
o Outdoor ambient temp. < 3°C OR outdoor ambient temp. sensor is abnormal.
o Water inlet/outlet temp. < 6°C.
o After 5 minutes from previous water pump OFF.
 Water pump turn OFF when ANY of below conditions is fulfilled:
o Outdoor ambient temperature ≥ 4°C.
o During -5°C < outdoor ambient temp. < 4°C
 After water pump ON for 4 minutes, and water inlet temp. ≥ 8°C.
 Else, shift to back up heater anti freeze control.
o During outdoor ambient temp. < -5°C
 After water pump ON for 4 minutes, and water inlet/outlet ≥ 20°C.
 Else, shift to back up heater anti freeze control.
 However, if flow switch is abnormal (H62), then water pump circulation anti freeze control will not activate.

3. Back up heater anti freeze control:

 Back up heater turn ON when ALL below conditions is fulfilled:
o Water inlet/outlet temp. < 6°C.
o Water pump circulation anti freeze control activated and water pump ON for 4 minutes.
 Back up heater turns OFF when ANY of below conditions is fulfilled:
o Water inlet/outlet temp. > 28°C.
o Water pump circulation anti freeze control deactivated/water pump OFF.
 However, if back up heater is abnormal (H70) then back up heater anti freeze control will not activate.

152
14.17.1 Zone Anti-Freeze Control
 If buffer tank selection is “NO” and Anti- Freeze function select “NO” from remote control, this control cannot
activate.

Start condition:
 After [5] min from previous Zone pump off. AND
 Outdoor air temp < [3] °C OR Outdoor sensor is abnormal. AND
 Zone water temperature < [6]˚C OR Zone Sensor Short or Open

Cancel condition:
 After water Zone pump ON [4] min AND
 Outdoor air temp ≥ [4]°C OR
 During -5 °C ≤ Outdoor air temp < [4] °C OR
Zone water temperature sensor > [8] °C
 During Outdoor air temp < [-5] °C
Zone water temperature sensor > [20] °C
*However, Zone water temperature sensor is Open or Short, Condition C and D is ignored.

14.18 Solar Operation (Optional)

14.18.1 Solar Operation:
Solar function:
 This function allow user to control the solar pump to operate depend on the solar sensor reading compare to the
tank installed. Solar pump will circulate the hot water energy store at solar panel to heat up the DHW Tank or
Buffer Tank.

Solar Connection Diagram:

 Solar function can only enable when the Optional PCB is connected.
 Few part as below need to install to control the solar operation:
o Solar Panel
o Solar Pump
o Solar Panel Sensor
o Tank Sensor (Buffer tank sensor OR DHW Tank sensor depend on the connection direction)
* During Solar Connection to the system, installer need to alert on the high water temperature may flow to the
zone circuit or DHW piping circuit. Therefore pipe which withstand higher water temperature need to be
installed.

153
 Solar remote control setting
1 Solar Setting can only be set when the optional PCB connection is select "YES"
2 By remote controller, Setting as below list can be set for solar function operation (Installer Menu)
o Solar Function ("YES" or "NO)
o Tank Connection Direction ("DHW TANK" or "BUFFER TANK")
o Delta T turns ON: Difference temperature setting between solar panel sensor and Tank to turn on solar
pump. (Range :5 ~ 15°C)
o Delta T turns OFF: Difference temperature setting between solar panel thermistor and Tank to turn off
solar pump. (Range :2 ~ 10°C)
o Outdoor temp for Anti-Freeze : Outdoor temp to start Anti-Freeze control for solar circuit. (Range : -20 ~
10°C)
o Tank Temperature HI Limit Set (Range : 70 ~ 90°C)

14.18.2 Solar Operation Control

 Solar function can only be activate if the solar function selection “YES” from remote control. To achieve hot water
from solar panel, indoor need to control the solar pump and circulate hot water from solar panel.

Under normal case:

o Solar pump start condition:
 Solar panel temperature > Delta T turn on setting temp (R/C) + Tank temperature (depend on selection,
DHW or Buffer) AND
 Tank temperature (DHW or Buffer) < Solar HI Limit Temp (R/C) AND
 Operation ON with heat mode (apply to solar connect to "Buffer Tank" case)

* Condition c) ignore if the solar system is connect to DHW tank (control active under operation OFF time for
Tank connection case)

o Solar pump stop condition:

 Solar panel temperature < Delta T turn OFF setting temp (R/C) + Tank temperature (depend on selection,
DHW or Buffer) OR
 Tank hot water temp >= Solar HI Limit Temp (R/C) + [2]°C

Under solar Anti-freeze protection control:

o Solar pump start condition:
 Outdoor temp < Outdoor temp setting for Anti-Freeze (R/C)
o Solar pump stop condition:
 Outdoor temp > Outdoor temp setting for Anti-Freeze + [2]°C

**However, During Cool mode this function cannot activate if Tank selection is “Buffer Tank".
**Solar pump can operate even if Heat pump is under error stop.

 Solar operation during error:

o During Tank sensor (DHW or Buffer depend on selection) abnormal, Solar operation will not able to function.
o During Solar Panel sensor detect OPEN (not include SHORT), Solar operation will not able to function too.

154
14.19 Boiler Bivalent Control
 Boiler is an additional or alternative heat source to heat up the room when necessary.
 Purpose of this control is to turn ON and turn OFF the Boiler output signal when boiler heating capacity needed in
the system.
 Boiler is possible to connect to DHW Tank and Buffer Tank depends on the installer.
 Boiler operation parameter need to be set on Boiler itself, indoor do not control the boiler operation direction and
operation.
 There is two option of control pattern can be set by remote controller: AUTO OR SG ready Mode

Auto Control Mode:

1 There are Alternative mode, Parallel mode, & Advance Parallel mode available to select by installer to fit to
the total system.

Remote control setting value:

1 Outdoor Ambient Set = (Range: -15°C ~ 35°C)

 Alternative Mode
o Only one heat source operates at one time, either heat pump or boiler depends on condition.
* External pump will turn ON when the external pump selection is ON when boiler is ON even heat pump is OFF.

Control detail:
During Operation ON at Heat mode or Tank mode or Heat + Tank Mode
o Boiler signal turn ON and heat pump and water pump turn OFF when:
 Outdoor ambient < Outdoor Ambient Set AND
 Boiler prohibit flag = 0

** However indoor water pump can operate when Anti-freeze control condition fulfilled.

o Boiler signal turn OFF and heat pump and water pump turn ON when:
 Outdoor ambient > Outdoor Ambient Set + [2°C] OR
 Boiler prohibit flag = 1

 Parallel Mode
o Parallel mode allows heat pump and boiler ON at the same time. Boiler operates as an additional heating
capacity when low heat pump capacity at low ambient condition.

Control detail:
During operation ON at Heat mode or Tank mode or Heat + Tank mode
o Boiler signal turns ON when:
 Outdoor ambient < Outdoor Ambient Set AND
 Boiler prohibit flag = 0
o Boiler signal turns OFF when:
 Outdoor ambient > Outdoor Ambient Set + [2°C] OR
 Boiler prohibit flag = 1

 Advance Parallel Mode

o Advance parallel mode allow heat pump to operate and turn ON boiler only when ambient and temperature
condition is fulfilled.

Remote control setting value:

1 Outdoor Ambient Set = (Range : -15°C ~ 35°C)
2 Selection of boiler connection direction. (Heat only, DHW only, Heat & DHW)
3 Setting data under Heat Direction
o Start Temperature | START_TEMP |
o Start Delay Timer | START_TIMER |
o Stop Temperature | STOP_TEMP |
o Stop Delay Timer | STOP_TIMER |
4 Setting data under DHW Direction
o Delay Timer | DELAY_TIMER |

155
 SG ready Control Mode
o Using same SG ready from Sub Board input to control boiler ON/OFF output.
* When this SG ready is select for bivalent control, default SG ready function will change to control bivalent
output
o Remote controller can set the External Pump ON/OFF like bivalent alternative mode

Control Content
Indoor will follow the SG ready bit input to control ON/OFF heat pump and boiler
00 : Heat pump OFF, Boiler OFF 10 : Heat pump OFF, Boiler ON
01 : Heat pump ON, Boiler OFF 11 : Heat pump ON, Boiler
* External pump will turn ON when the external pump selection is ON when boiler is ON even heat pump is OFF.

Control detail:
During operation ON at Heat Mode
o Boiler signal turns ON when
 Outdoor ambient < Outdoor Ambient Set AND
 Buffer tank temperature < Target Buffer Tank Temperature + [START_TEMP] for [START_TIMER]
AND
 Heat pump operate at room side AND
 Connection of Boiler to Heating Select "YES" From installer menu AND
 Buffer Tank connection select "YES" AND
 Boiler prohibit flag = 0

o Boiler signal turns OFF when

 Outdoor ambient > Outdoor Ambient Set + [-2°C] OR
 Buffer Tank temperature > Target Buffer Tank temperature + [STOP_TEMP] for [STOP_TIMER] OR
 Heat pump not at room side. OR]
 Boiler prohibit flag = 1

During operation ON at Tank Mode

o Boiler signal turns ON when
 Outdoor ambient < Outdoor Ambient Set AND
 Heat pump operate at tank side for continuous | DELAY_TIMER | AND
 Connection of Boiler to DWH Tank select "YES" from installer menu. AND
 Boiler prohibit flag = 0

o Boiler signal turns OFF when

 Outdoor ambient > Outdoor Ambient Set + [2°C] OR
 Heat pump not operates at tank side. OR
 Boiler prohibit flag = 1

Boiler prohibit flag control

Purpose:
o For product safety. Boiler signal is OFF when water temperature is too high.

Start condition:
o Water outlet ≥ 85°C continues for 5 minutes.
o Water inlet ≥ 85°C continues for 5 minutes.
o Zone1 water temp ≥ 75°C continues for 5 minutes.
o Zone2 water temp ≥ 75°C continues for 5 minutes.

Contents:
 After start condition fulfilled, set boiler prohibit flag = 1

Cancel condition:
o After 30 minutes from start condition fulfilled.

Contents:
 Set boiler prohibit flag = 0

156
14.20 External Room Thermostat Control (Optional)
Purpose:
1 Better room temperature control to fulfill different temperature request by external room thermostat.
Recommended external room thermostat:

Maker Characteristic
Siemen (REV200) Touch panel
Siemen (RAA20) Analog

Connection of external room thermostat:

Wire Connection and thermo characteristic of Siemen REV200:

Setting L/L1 (H) Heat Thermo L/L2 (C) Cool Thermo

Set Temp < Actual Temp Open Circuit OFF Short Circuit ON
Set Temp > Actual Temp Short Circuit ON Open Circuit OFF

Indoor Unit
9 L (label)

10 Siemen REV200
Cooling 11 L1 (label)
Heating 12 L2 (label)
9 : Terminal Board No.

Connect only heating line for heating only model. And connect both
heating and cooling line for heat + cool model.

Wire Connection and thermo characteristic of Siemen RAA20:

Setting L/Y1 (H) Heat Thermo L/Y2 (C) Cool Thermo

Set Temp < Actual Temp Open Circuit OFF Short Circuit ON
Set Temp > Actual Temp Short Circuit ON Open Circuit OFF

Indoor Unit
9 L (label)

10 Siemen RAA20
Cooling 11 Y1 (label)
Heating 12 Y2 (label)
9 : Terminal Board No.

Connect only heating line for heating only model. And connect both
heating and cooling line for heat + cool model.

Control Content:
 External room thermostat control activate only when remote thermostat connection select YES by Indoor control
panel.
 When indoor running heat mode, refer thermo On/Off from heating line feedback. And when indoor running cool
mode, refer thermo On/Off from cooling line feedback.
 Heat pump Off immediately when receive thermo off feedback.

157
14.21 Three Ways Valve Control
Purpose:
- 3 ways valve is used to change flow direction of hot water from heat pump between heating side and tank side.

Control contents:
1 3 ways valve switch Off:
o During 3 ways valve switch Off time, the hot water will provide heat capacity to heating side.
2 3 ways valve switch On:
o During 3 ways valve switch On time, the hot water will provide heat capacity to tank side.
3 Stop condition:
o During stop mode, 3 ways valve will be in switch off position.

Spring Return 2 point SPDT 3 wire

NC
COM
Indoor Unit 1 L 1 L
L 1
AC230V 3 N1 M 3 N1
Open
M
Close
N1 3 5 N2 5 N2
N2 5
NO
1 L

6: Terminal Board No.

3 N1 M
5 N2

* During pump down and force mode, fix 3 ways valve in close condition.

* Recommended Parts : SFA 21/18 (Siemens)

14.22 Two Ways Valve Control

Functionality of 2 ways valve:
 Use to allow hot water to floor heating panel or block cold water to floor heating panel.

Control contents:
1 When indoor running in heat mode, OPEN the 2 ways valve.
2 When indoor running in cool mode, CLOSE the 2 ways valve.
3 Stop condition:
a. During stop mode, fix 2 ways valve in close condition.

Spring Return 2 point SPDT 3 wire

NC
COM
Indoor Unit 1 L 1 L
L 1
AC230V 3 N1 M 3 N1
Open
M
Close
N1 3 5 N2 5 N2
N2 5
NO
1 L

3: Terminal Board No.

3 N1 M
5 N2

* During pump down mode, fix 2 ways valve in close condition.

* During force mode, open 2 ways valve.

* Recommended Parts : SFA 21/18 (Siemens)

158
14.23 External OFF/ON Control
 Communication circuit between indoor unit and external controller is as per below.

5V
External
12V Controller
mico
1
2

Panasonic
PCB
CN-THERMO

 Maximum length of communication cable is 50 meter.

 Control content:

External Control Switch Control Panel OFF/ON Control Panel Power LED System Status
ON ON ON ON
ON OFF OFF OFF
OFF ON ON OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF

Remocon Screen Display and Control Detail:

10:34am , Mon
1 2
Turned of  by external switch.
40 ˚c
23 44 CANCEL
˚c ˚c 18 ˚c
REMOTE ON
CONTROLLER OFF
LED
REMOTE ON ON
CONTROLLER
SIGNAL OFF OFF

EXTERNAL
ON
OFF
CONTROLLER
SWITCH
ON
UNIT OFF

When External SW connection select "YES" from remocon installer menu:

 Heating or Cooling system will operate normally if the External Switch signal is ON.
 Once the External Switch turn OFF, System Turn OFF (Heat pump, water pump, heater etc…)
 Remocon LED remain ON or OFF according to the current operation request.
 Pop up menu at remocon main screen as above screen to inform customer system stop by External Switch.
 It is possible to press cancel and return to main screen to do change of operation setting while waiting the
External Switch turn ON back.
 Remocon LED will always follow the latest changes from remocon.
 If no action on remocon for continuous 5 minutes, the pop up screen will show again on the screen.
 But once the External Switch Turn ON back, pop up screen will disappear and system can operate normally
according to the latest operation setting and request.

159
14.24 External Compressor Switch (Optional PCB)
External compressor switch port can have two purpose of control as below:
 Heat source ON/OFF function (Dip switch Pin 3 on PCB "OFF")
 Heater ON/OFF function (Dip switch Pin 3 on PCB "ON")

 Heat source ON/OFF function

Purpose:
 Heat pump ON/OFF function is use to turn OFF the high power consumption device (Heat pump, & Heater) when
there is energy or electric current limitation. Other optional function still can be operate under heat pump and
heater OFF condition.

Control Detail:
 This External Compressor Switch is possible to connect to Optional PCB only.
 Once the remocon select External Compressor Switch connection "YES", & Dip Switch on PCB "OFF"
This heat pump ON/OFF function will activate
 The ON/OFF signal of this External Compressor Switch is same as External Switch.
 When the External Compressor Switch is ON:
o Heat pump system operate normally
 When the External Compressor Switch is OFF:
o Heat pump, Indoor water pump & Heater ( Booster heater & Backup Heater ) need to turn OFF
o Solar, Boiler and zone control can be operate follow normal control condition.
* pump delay OFF also included in this control

(There is NO pop up screen like External Switch when this External Compressor Switch is OFF.)

 Heater ON/OFF function

Purpose:
 Heater ON/OFF function is use to turn OFF the heater (backup heater & booster heater) when there is energy or
electric current limitation. Heat pump and other optional function still can operate.

Control detail:
 This External Compressor Switch is possible to connect to Optional PCB only.
 Once the remocon select External Compressor Switch connection "YES", & Dip Switch on PCB "ON"
This heater ON/OFF function will activate
 When the External Compressor Switch is ON:
o Heat pump and heater operate normally
 When the External Compressor Switch is OFF:
o Backup heater and booster heater cannot operate even heater request is ON.
o Heat pump and option function (Solar, Boiler and zone control) can be operate follow normal control
condition.

(There is NO pop up screen like External Switch when this External Compressor Switch is OFF.)

14.25 Heat/Cool Switch (Optional PCB)

Purpose:
 User can switch the running mode from heat to cool or cool to heat through external installed Heat/Cool switch.
This kind of heat / cool switch may built in inside the field supply room remocon as well.

Control contents:
 Heat/Cool Switch can only be set when Cool Function is "enable" at custom menu setting, & Extension PCB
select "YES" & Zone 1 not set "Pool" condition.
 This heat/cool switch control will be activate only when installer set the Heat/Cool Switch "USE" through remocon.
 Once the Heat/Cool Switch Set "USE", remocon will check indoor send Signal to judge the option of mode select.
o When Heat/Cool Switch Contact Open : Remocon only can select Heat Mode, or Heat + Tank Mode, or Tank
Mode
o When Heat/Cool Switch Contact Close : Remocon only can select Cool Mode, or Cool + Tank Mode, or Tank
Mode

160
 Operation ON/OFF will depend on remocon request.
 When Heat Mode is running with Contact Open, user change this setting to contact close, indoor will this signal to
remocon judge and change mode to cool and send back to indoor. And it is same as from cool mode change to
heat mode.
* This switch have higher priority, remocon follow indoor send signal when control activated.
* There is no effect to the operation when the mode running is only Tank Mode.

(Weekly Timer are ignored and cannot be set during Heat / Cool Switch is "Enable" Condition.)

14.26 SG Ready Control (Optional PCB)

Purpose:
 To set ON/OFF of heat pump and target temperature by digital input of third party device if necessary in field.

Optional PCB Remote Station

+ DI2 Com
Digital Input

+ DI1 Com

- Com

Remote control setting

For this function, following items need to be set on Remote Control (installer menu) –

 SG control = YES or NO
 Capacity up setting 1
o Heating capacity [50 ~ 150 %]
o DHW capacity [50 ~ 150 %]
o Cooling capacity [-15 ~ 0 %]
 Capacity up setting 2
o Heating capacity [50 ~ 150 %]
o DHW capacity [50 ~ 150 %]
o Cooling capacity [-15 ~ 0 %]

Control contents:

If SG control on remote control = "Yes", then following control only activate by digital input.

 While Digital input is " 00 " (Normal operation)

o Normal operation. Once detect '00' system will operate back to normal condition.
(All the target set temperature for heating side and DHW side will return back to previous set temperature
when digital signal change from "10' or "11" back to "00".)
 While digital input is detected " 01 " (HP stop)
o Heat pump & room heater & tank heater cannot operate.
(Solar control and Boiler back up and 2 Zone control can activate.)
 While digital input is detected " 10 " (Capacity 1)
o Target temperature for heating and DHW Tank is changed according to the percentage set by Remote
control setting. However, which setting temperature is change depend on system setting.
o Target water temperature of cooling is changed according to the adjustment value set by remocon setting.
 While digital input is detected " 11 " (Capacity 2)
o Target temperature for heating and DHW Tank is changed according to the percentage set by Remote
control setting. However, which setting temperature is change depend on system setting.
o Target water temperature of cooling is changed according to the adjustment value set by remocon setting.
 While digital input is detected " 10 " (Capacity 1)
o Setting temperature for heating and Tank is changed.
However, which setting temperature is change depend on system setting.

161
If Buffer selection is “YES”
Room side
New Target Buffer tank temperature = Current Target Buffer Tank Temperature * Remote Control setting
(" capacity 1) %
* Max Min regulation is follow Target Buffer tank temperature control specification
** No change of Target zone water temperature, only set higher buffer tank temperature.

DHW Tank side

New Tank Set Temperature = Tank Set Temperature * Remote Control setting for DHW ("Capacity 1) % *
(Max regulation depend on the tank max setting limit)

If Buffer selection is “NO”

Room side
New Target Zone Water Temperature = Current Target Zone Water Temperature * Remote Control Setting
(*Capacity 1) %
(Zone 1 and Zone 2 will change according to its own target zone water temperature.)
(Max regulation depend on the temperature control type select)

DHW Tank side

New Tank Set Temperature = Tank Set Temperature * Remote Control setting for DHW ("Capacity 1) %
* (Max regulation depends on the tank max setting limit)

Setting temperature for cooling is changed

New Target water temperature = target water temperature + Remote Control setting for cool (*Capacity 1)
* (Min/Max regulation of cooling water set apply)

 While digital input is detected " 11 " (Capacity 2)

o Setting temperature for heating and Tank is changed.
However, which setting temperature is change depend on system setting.

If Buffer selection is “YES”

Room side
New Target Buffer tank temperature = Current Target Buffer Tank Temperature * Remote Control setting
(" capacity 2) %
* Max Min regulation is follow Target Buffer tank temperature control specification
** No change of Target zone water temperature, only set higher buffer tank temperature.

DHW Tank side

New Tank Set Temperature = Tank Set Temperature * Remote Control setting for DHW ("Capacity 2) %
* (Max regulation depends on the tank max setting limit)

If Buffer selection is “NO”

Room side
New Target Zone Water Temperature = Current Target Zone Water Temperature * Remote Control Setting
(*Capacity 2) %
(Zone 1 and Zone 2 will change according to it's own target zone water temperature.)
(Max regulation depend on the temperature control type select)

DHW Tank side

New Tank Set Temperature = Tank Set Temperature * Remote Control setting for DHW ("Capacity 2) %
* (Max regulation depends on the tank max setting limit)
** This function is not applicable for Cooling mode.

Setting temperature for cooling is changed

New Target water temperature = target water temperature + Remote Control setting for cool (*Capacity 2)
* (Min/Max regulation of cooling water set apply)

162
14.27 Demand Control (Optional PCB)
Remote control setting:
 When Optional PCB connection select 'YES", Demand Control function can select "YES" or "NO".

Purpose:
 After the demand control select YES, below control will activated.
o 0-10V Demand control

0-10V Demand control

 Demand control is use to reduce the current usage of heat pump unit by third party device.

Control start condition:

 Select “YES” at Demand control at installer menu.
 0-10V input for this electrical current control is detected.

Control content:
 If start condition is fulfilled, indoor will receive the voltage signal from optional PCB. Indoor will send the rate
value to outdoor unit.
 Outdoor will change the current limit according to the percentage receive from indoor unit.

14.28 Holiday Mode

 Purpose:
Promotes energy saving by allowing the user to stop the system during holiday and enables the system to
resume at the preset temperature after holiday.

 Control details:
o Indoor operate the unit according running mode request. Target temperature will follow holiday setting
temperature.
 If heat mode request is receive, Target Water Out Temperature will change according to holiday shift
temperature set.
[If heat is set OFF at holiday, unit, water pump and zone control will OFF]
 If tank mode request is receive, Target Tank Set Temperature will change according to the holiday tank
shift temperature set.
[If tank is set OFF at holiday, heat pump and tank heater will OFF]
o After days of holiday have been set, heat pump will stop and only resume operation at the end of holiday
countdown.

 Start condition:
o Holiday timer set and the holiday timer start
* The day holiday mode was set is counted as day 1.

 Stop condition:
o OFF/ON button is pressed.
o Holiday timer is reached.

163
14.29 Dry Concrete
 Purpose
Provide heat to floor heating panel and dry the wet concrete during installation.

 Setting condition:
o Dry concrete parameter can be set through remote control under system setup.
o Parameters are possible to set up to 99 days with different target set temperature

 Control details:
o Dry concrete mode will be activates when select ON from service setup.
o Once start dry concrete function, remote control will send step 1 setting temperature to indoor unit.
* This temperature is set at zone temperature. If system is 2 zones, both zone target temperature is set as
same temperature.
o Heat pump will start heat mode operation to room side with received target water outlet temperature.
* Heat pump will operate according to Heat pump Target Water Temperature.
o After complete day 1 setup operation, day 2 data will be send to indoor at 12.00am on the second day.
o Each preset data will be send every day until dry concrete mode is complete, unit will turns OFF and exit dry
concrete function.
o 3 ways valve and booster heater will turn OFF and 2 ways valve will turns ON.

 Cancel condition:
o Dry concrete mode is complete and OFF signal is received.
o OFF signal is received by pressing OFF/ON button.

14.30 Flow Sensor

 The water flow sensor serves as an overload protector that shuts down the unit when the water level is detected
to be low.
 Abnormal flow detection:

Sequence Abnormal flow Normal flow

Normal case Flow rate < 7 l/min or ≥ 69 l/min ≥ 7 l/min
During status 2~6 on Anti-freeze deice Flow rate ≥ 7 l/min < 7 l/min

164
15. Protection Control (WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5)
15.1 Protection Control for All Operations
15.1.1 Time Delay Safety Control
1 The compressor will not start for three minutes after stop of operation.

15.1.2 30 Seconds Forced Operation

1 Once the compressor starts operation, it will not stop its operation for 30 seconds.
2 However, it can be stopped using control panel at indoor unit.

15.1.3 Total Running Current Control

1 When the outdoor running current exceeds X value, the compressor frequency will decrease.
2 If the outdoor running current does not exceed X value, the compressor frequency will return to normal
operating frequency.
3 If the outdoor running current continue to increase till exceed Y value, compressor will stop, and if this occurs
3 times within 20 minutes, system will stop operation and OFF/ON control panel LED will blink (F16 error
occurs).

UD03JE5 UD05JE5
Operation Mode X (A) Y (A) X (A) Y (A)
Heating 11.0 14.0 11.0 14.0
Cooling 7.0 14.0 8.3 14.0

A. DC Peak Current Control

1 When the current to IPM exceeds set value, compressor will stop. Compressor will restart after three minutes.
2 If the set value exceeds again for more than 30 seconds after the compressor restarts, operation will restart
after two minutes.
3 If the set value exceeds again for within 30 seconds after the compressor restarts, operation will restart after
one minute. If this condition repeats continuously for seven times, system will stop operation and OFF/ON
control panel LED will blink (F23 error occurs).

15.1.4 Compressor Overheating Prevention Control

 The compressor operating frequency is regulated in accordance to compressor tank temperature as shown in
below figures. When the compressor tank temperature exceeds 112°C, compressor will stop, and if this occurs
4 times within 30 minutes, system will stop operation and OFF/ON control panel LED will blink (F20 error occurs).

Compressor = OFF
112°C
97°C
Compressor
Frequency Reduced
110°C
97°C
Compressor
Frequency Maintain
108°C
97°C
Free

Compressor tank temperature

165
15.1.5 High Pressure Sensor Control
 Purpose:
- To protect the system operation.
 Detection period:
- After compressor on for 1 minute.
 Detection conditions:
- When abnormal high voltage detection, 5 V or when open circuit detection 0V for 5 seconds continuously.
 After detection:
- When abnormality is detected continue 5 seconds, unit stop operation.
- OFF/ON control panel LED will blink (H64 error occurs).

15.1.6 Outside Temperature Current Control

23°C

Max. 21°C
current
value is
14°C
regulated
12°C

-20°C

-23°C
Compressor stop

Outdoor temperature

166
15.2 Protection Control for Heating Operation
15.2.1 Outdoor Air Temperature Control
The maximum current value is regulated when the outdoor air temperature rises above 14°C in order to avoid
compressor overloading.

15.2.2 Deice Operation

When outdoor pipe temperature and outdoor air temperature is low, deice operation start where outdoor fan motor
stop.
Normally, deice start if pipe sensor temperature fulfil deice condition. If remote controller set to AUTO force defrost
setting, unit will start force deice after heat pump operate for 3 hours without deice at below outdoor temperature 5°C

 Deice judging condition

Outdoor Unit Deice Control
10
Deice starts depends:
5 1. Outdoor air sensor temp.
2. Outdoor pipe sensor temp.
0
OD Pipe Temperature (°C)

3. Heating accumulation time.

-5

-10
When Heating Time > 35 minutes
-15 and Pipe Temperature below this
line for continuous 3 minutes.
-20

-25

-30
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30
Outdoor Temperature (°C)

Deice operation time diagram

a. Deice mode 1 control:

Free Free
Compressor 1 2 3 5 8 9
4 6 7

Four way valve ON ON

OFF
ID pump ON ON ON

OD fan Free Free

OFF

Expansion valve Free

max 9 minutes 30 seconds

deice 1

167
15.3 Protection Control for Cooling Operation
15.3.1 Outdoor Air Temperature Control
 The Compressor operating frequency is regulated in accordance to the outdoor air temperature as shown in the
diagram below.
 This control will begin 1 minute after the compressor starts.
 Compressor frequency will adjust base on outdoor air temperature.

25°C Free

22°C
Limited
10°C frequency

8°C
Compressor
stop

15.3.2 Freeze Prevention Control 1

1 When indoor heat exchanger temperature is lower than 0°C continuously for 10 seconds, compressor will
stop operating.
2 Compressor will resume its operation three minutes after the indoor heat exchanger is higher than 1°C.
3 Indoor heat exchanger freeze prevention (H99) will memory in error history.

168
16. Protection Control (WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5)
16.1 Protection Control for All Operations
16.1.1 Time Delay Safety Control
1 The compressor will not start for three minutes after stop of operation.

16.1.2 30 Seconds Forced Operation

1 Once the compressor starts operation, it will not stop its operation for 30 seconds.
2 However, it can be stopped using control panel at indoor unit.

16.1.3 Total Running Current Control

1 When the outdoor running current exceeds X value, the compressor frequency will decrease.
2 If the outdoor running current does not exceed X value, the compressor frequency will return to normal
operating frequency.
3 If the outdoor running current continue to increase till exceed Y value, compressor will stop, and if this occurs
3 times within 20 minutes, system will stop operation and OFF/ON control panel LED will blink (F16 error
occurs).

UD07JE5 UD09JE5
Operation Mode X (A) Y (A) X (A) Y (A)
Heating 15.0 17.0 15.0 17.0
Cooling 12.2 17.0 12.2 17.0

A. DC Peak Current Control

1 When the current to IPM exceeds set value, compressor will stop. Compressor will restart after three minutes.
2 If the set value exceeds again for more than 30 seconds after the compressor restarts, operation will restart
after two minutes.
3 If the set value exceeds again for within 30 seconds after the compressor restarts, operation will restart after
one minute. If this condition repeats continuously for seven times, system will stop operation and OFF/ON
control panel LED will blink (F23 error occurs).

16.1.4 Compressor Overheating Prevention Control

 The compressor operating frequency is regulated in accordance to compressor tank temperature as shown in
below figures. When the compressor tank temperature exceeds 112°C, compressor will stop, and if this occurs
4 times within 30 minutes, system will stop operation and OFF/ON control panel LED will blink (F20 error occurs).

Compressor = OFF
112°C
97°C
Compressor
Frequency Reduced
110°C
97°C
Compressor
Frequency Maintain
108°C
97°C
Free

Compressor tank temperature

169
16.1.5 High Pressure Sensor Control
 Purpose:
- To protect the system operation.
 Detection period:
- After compressor on for 1 minute.
 Detection conditions:
- When abnormal high voltage detection, 5 V or when open circuit detection 0V for 5 seconds continuously.
 After detection:
- When abnormality is detected 4 times within 120 minutes, unit stop operation.
- OFF/ON control panel LED will blink (H64 error occurs).

16.1.6 Outside Temperature Current Control

23°C

Max. 21°C
current
value is
14°C
regulated
12°C

-20°C

-23°C
Compressor stop

Outdoor temperature

170
16.2 Protection Control for Heating Operation
16.2.1 Outdoor Air Temperature Control
The maximum current value is regulated when the outdoor air temperature rises above 14°C in order to avoid
compressor overloading.

16.2.2 Deice Operation

When outdoor pipe temperature and outdoor air temperature is low, deice operation start where outdoor fan motor
stop.
Normally, deice start if pipe sensor temperature fulfil deice condition. If remote controller set to AUTO force defrost
setting, unit will start force deice after heat pump operate for 3 hours without deice at below outdoor temperature 5°C

 Deice judging condition

Outdoor Unit Deice Control

10
Deice start depends:
5 1. Outdoor air sensor temp.
2. Outdoor pipe sensor temp.
OD Pipe Temperature (°C)

0
3. Heating accumulation time
-5

-10

When Heating Time > 35 minutes

-15
and Pipe Temperature below this
line for continuous 3 minutes
-20

-25

-30
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30
Outdoor Temperature (°C)

Deice operation time diagram

a. Deice mode 1 control:

Free Free
Compressor 1 2 3 5 8 9
4 6 7

Four way valve ON ON

OFF
ID pump ON ON ON

OD fan Free Free

OFF

Expansion valve Free

max 9 minutes 30 seconds

deice 1

171
16.3 Protection Control for Cooling Operation
16.3.1 Outdoor Air Temperature Control
 The Compressor operating frequency is regulated in accordance to the outdoor air temperature as shown in the
diagram below.
 This control will begin 1 minute after the compressor starts.
 Compressor frequency will adjust base on outdoor air temperature.

25°C Free

22°C
Limited
10°C frequency

8°C
Compressor
stop

16.3.2 Freeze Prevention Control 1

1 When indoor heat exchanger temperature is lower than 0°C continuously for 10 seconds, compressor will
stop operating.
2 Compressor will resume its operation three minutes after the indoor heat exchanger is higher than 1°C.
3 Indoor heat exchanger freeze prevention (H99) will memory in error history.

172
17. Servicing Guide
17.1 How to take out Front Plate
Hook
Open and Close Front Plate
1 Remove the 2 mounting screws of Bottom
Front Plate. CAUTION
2 Slide it upwards to unhook the Bottom Front Open or close the Front Plate carefully.
The heavy Bottom Front Plate may injures
Plate hook. the fingers.
3 Reverse above steps 1~2 for close it.

2X (screw)

17.2 Test Run

1 Before test run, make sure below items have been checked:-
o Pipework are properly done.
o Electric cable connecting work are properly done.
o Tank Unit is filled up with water and trapped air is released.
o Please turn on the power supply after filling the tank until full.
2 Switch ON the power supply of the Tank Unit. Set the Tank Unit RCCB/ELCB to “ON” condition. Then,
please refer to the Operation Instruction for operation of Remote Controller.
3 For normal operation, Water Pressure Gauge reading should be in between 0.05 MPa and 0.3 MPa. If
necessary, adjust the Water Pump SPEED accordingly to obtain normal water pressure operating range. If
adjust Water Pump SPEED cannot solve the problem, contact your local authorized dealer.
4 After test run, please clean the Magnetic Water Filter Set. Reinstall it after finish cleaning.

17.3 Expansion Vessel Pre Pressure Checking

For Space Heating / Cooling
 Expansion Vessel with 10 L air capacity and initial pressure of 1 bar is installed in this Tank Unit.
 Total amount of water in system should be below 200 L.
(Inner volume of Tank Unit’s piping is about 5 L)
 If total amount of water is over 200 L, please add another expansion vessel. (field supply)
 Please keep the installation height difference of system water circuit within 10 m.
 The expansion vessel capacity required for the system can be calculated from the formula below.

Ɛ × Vo Water expansion rate table

V=
98 + P1
1- Water temperature (°C) Water expansion rate Ɛ
98 + P2
10 0.0003
V : Required gas volume 20 0.0019
<expansion vessel volume L> 30 0.0044
VO : System total water volume <L> 40 0.0078
Ɛ : Water expansion rate 5 → 60˚C = 0.0171 50 0.0121
P1 : Expansion tank filling pressure = (100) kPa 60 0.0171
P2 : System maximum pressure = 300 kPa 70 0.0228
- ( ) Please confirm at actual place 80 0.0291
- The gas volume of the sealed type expansion 90 0.0360
vessel is presented by <V>.
• It’s advised to add 10% margin for required gas [Adjustment of the initial pressure of the expansion
volume of calculation. vessel when there is a difference in installation height]
If the height difference between the indoor unit and
the highest point of the system water circuit (H) is
more than 7m, please adjust the initial pressure of the
expansion vessel (Pg) according to the following
formula.
Pg= (H*10+30) kPa

173
17.4 Pump Down Procedures
Refer below steps for proper pump down procedure.

Press

Press SW & scroll

[Screen 4] to “Pump down”

174
17.5 How To Adjust Pump Speed

11 : 00am,Mon

Press
& scroll to
“Installer setup”

[Screen 4]

- Press or SW to select & confirm maximum duty. (Range: 0x40~0xFF)

[Screen 5]

- Range (0.1~99.9)L/min

[Screen 6]

Press or SW to select & confirm operation

NOTE:
1. Whenever at [Screen 5], if press SW to OFF, pump operation should be turned OFF.
2. Whenever at [Screen 6], if press SW to OFF, pump operation should be turned OFF.

175
17.6 How To Unlock Cool Mode
Operation must be OFF

Press ( + + ) SW’s
continuously for 5secs

Display latest status retrieved from EEPROM

176
17.7 EEPROM Factory Default Data Setup Procedure

- EEPROM default data setup is only possible during initialization process.

- Press ( , , , ) simultaneously for 5secs continuously, initialization process

will stop & EEPROM default data setup process will start.

During EEPROM default data setup process, display should be as shown below.

0.2s
Later

0.2s
Later

0.2s
Later

- Once EEPROM default data setup process is complete, initialization process will re-start from beginning.

Real time and date will blink

177
17.8 Dry Concrete Setup

11 : 00am,Mon

Press
& scroll to
“Installer setup”

[Screen 4]

[Screen 5] [Screen  6]

Once ‘ON’ is confirm,

stage 1 setup will start

Every day stage will increment

with its respective setup

Next Page

178
 - Press or button to select no. of stages.
- Press to store latest status.
- Press button, display will return to [Screen 6].

- If suppose to select 10 stages, then setup will start from stage 1/10.
- Press or button to select set temperature.
- Press button to store latest status.

- Move to next stage 2/10

- Repeat the same procedure

- Move to next stage 10/10

- Repeat the same procedure.
- Press to store latest status the the display will return to [Screen 4]
- Press button to return to stage 9/10.

Return to [Screen 6]

179
18. Maintenance Guide
In order to ensure safety and optimal performance of the Tank Unit, seasonal inspections on the Tank Unit, functional
check of RCCB/ELCB, field wiring and piping have to be carried out at regular intervals. This maintenance should be
carried out by authorized dealer. Contact dealer for scheduled inspection.

1 Charging and Discharging the Water

Make sure all the piping installations are properly done before carry out below steps.
Charge the Water
 For domestic hot water tank
a. Set the Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge (Drain Tap) to “CLOSE”.

“CLOSE” “OPEN”

Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge (Drain Tap)

b. Set all Tap / Shower “OPEN”.

c. Start filling water to the Domestic Hot Water Tank via Tube Connector. After 20~40min, water should
flow out from Tap / Shower. Else, please contact your local authorized dealer.
d. Check and make sure no water leaking at the tube connecting points.

 For Space Heating / Cooling

a. Turn the plug on the Air Purge Valve outlet anticlockwise by one complete turn from fully closed
position.
Plug (turn
anticlockwise by
one complete turn)

Air purge valve

b. Set the Pressure Relief Valve lever “DOWN”.

Pressure relief valve
Pressure relief valve

Lever
Lever or

Turn down Turn down

Pressure relief valve Pressure relief valve

c. Start filling water (with pressure more than 0.1 MPa (1 bar)) to the Space Heating / Cooling circuit via
Tube Connector. Stop filling water if the free water flow through Pressure Relief Valve Drainage.
d. Turn ON the Tank Unit and make sure Water Pump is running.
e. Check and make sure no water leaking at the tube connecting points.

Discharge the Water

 For domestic hot water tank
a. Turn OFF power supply.
b. Set the Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge (Drain Tap) to “OPEN”.
c. Open Tap / Shower to allow air inlet.
d. After discharge, set Domestic Hot Water Tank Discharge (Drain Tap) to “CLOSE”.

2 Check Water Pressure *(0.1 MPa = 1 bar)

Water pressure should not lower than 0.05 MPa (with inspects the Water Pressure Gauge). If necessary add
water into Tank Unit (via Tube Connector).

180
3 Check Pressure Relief Valve
o Check for correct operation of Pressure Relief Valve by turning on the lever to become horizontal.
o If you do not hear a clacking sound (due to water drainage), contact your local authorized dealer.
o Push down the lever after finish checking.
o In case the water keep on draining out from the Tank Unit, switch off the system, and then contact your
local authorized dealer.

4 Air Purge Valve

Air purge valve must be installed at all high points in a closed water circuit system.
An automatic air purge valve is provided inside the indoor unit. To automatically purge the air from the
system, turn the plug on the air purge valve outlet anticlockwise by one complete turn from fully closed
position.
Excessive air is automatically purged if the plug is kept in this position.
Plug (turn
anticlockwise by
one complete turn)

Air purge valve

5 Indoor Unit Control Board Area

Thorough visual inspection of the control board and look for defects, i.e. loose connection, melting of wire
insulator and etc.

6 RCCB/ELCB
Ensure the RCCB/ELCB set to “ON” condition before check RCCB/ELCB.
Turn on the power supply to the indoor unit.
This testing could only be done when power is supplied to the indoor unit.

WARNING

Be careful not to touch parts other than RCCB/ELCB test button when the power is supplied to Indoor Unit. Else, electrical shock
may happen.

o Push the “TEST” button on the RCCB/ELCB. The lever would turn down and indicate “0”, if it functions
normal.
o Contact authorized dealer if the RCCB/ELCB malfunction.
o Turn off the power supply to the indoor unit.
o If RCCB/ELCB functions normal, set the lever to “ON” again after testing finish.

7 Reset Overload Protector

Overload Protector serves the safety purpose to prevent the water over heating. When the Overload
Protector trip at high water temperature, take below steps to reset it.
a. Take out the cover.
b. Use a test pen to push the centre button gently in order to reset the Overload Protector.
c. Fix the cover to the original fixing condition.
Use test pen to push
this button for reset
Overload protector.

181
8 Maintenance for Magnetic Water Filter Set
a. Turn OFF power supply.
b. Set the two valves for the Magnetic Water Filter Set to “CLOSE”.
c. Drain the Space Heating / Cooling circuit water with set the Pressure Relief Valve lever UP, so that water
pressure drop below 0.5 bar.
d. Take off the clip, then gently pull out the mesh. Beware of small amount water drain out from it.
e. Clean the mesh with warm water to remove all the stain. Use soft brush if necessary.
f. Remove the bolt with magnet on brass cap with screwdriver to remove all iron powder.
g. Reinstall the magnet and mesh to the Magnetic Water Filter Set and set back the clip on it.
h. Set the two valves for the Magnetic Water Filter Set to “OPEN”.
i. Re-charging the water to Space Heating / Cooling circuit (refer Section 5 for details.)
j. Turn ON power supply.

1. Set 2 valve for the

Water Filter Set
to “CLOSE”.

Filter Retaining ring

2. Remove the retaining
ring then remove the
Water Filter

9 Maintenance for Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve

Manually operate the Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve by turn the knob counter clockwise to ensure
free water flow through discharge pipe at regular intervals to ensure it is not blocked and to remove lime
deposit.

182
18.1 Maintenance for Magnetic Water Filter Set
18.1.1 Service and maintenance 18.1.3 Custom menu

When connect CN-CNT connector with computer Setting method of Custom menu
Please use optional USB cable to connect with CN-CNT
connector. Custom menu 12:00am,Mon
After connected, it requests for driver. If PC is under Windows Cool mode
Vista or later version, it automatically installs the driver under
internet environment. Back-up heater
Reset energy monitor
If PC uses Windows XP or earlier version and there is no internet
Reset operation history
access, please get FTDI Ltd's USB - RS232C conversion IC
driver (VCP driver) and install. Smart DHW
http://www.ftdichip.com/Drivers/VCP.htm Select Confirm

Please press for 10 sec.

If forget Password and cannot operate remote controller
Items that can be set
1 Cool mode (Set With/Without Cooling function) Default is
Press for 5 sec. without
Password unlock screen appears, press Confirm and it shall (NOTE) As with/without Cool mode may affect electricity
reset. application, please be careful and do not simply
Password will become 0000. Please reset it again. change it.
(CAUTION) Only display when it is locked by password. In Cool mode, please be careful if piping is not
insulated properly, dew may form on pipe and
water may drip on the floor and damage the floor.

18.1.2 Maintenance menu 2 Backup heater (Use/Do not use Backup heater)
(NOTE) It is different from to use/not to use backup heater
set by client. When this setting is used, heater
power on due to protection against frost will
Setting method of Maintenance menu be disabled. (Please use this setting when it is
required by utility company.)
By using this setting, it cannot defrost due to low
Maintenance menu 12:00am,Mon Heating's setting temp and operation may stop
Actuator check (H75)
Please set under the responsibility of installer.
Test mode When it stops frequently, it may be due to
Sensor setup insufficient circulation flow rate, setting temp of
heating is too low etc.
Reset password
3 Reset energy monitor (delete memory of Energy monitor)
Select Confirm
Please use when moving house and handover the unit.

Press for 5 sec. 4 Reset operation history (delete memory of operation history)
Please use when moving house and handover the unit.
Items that can be set
5 Smart DHW (Set Smart DHW mode Parameter)
1 Actuator check (Manual ON/OFF all functional parts) a) Start time: Tank reboil at lower ON Temp. onward.
(NOTE) As there is no protection action, please be careful b) Stop time: Tank reboil at normal ON Temp. onward.
not to cause any error when operating each part c) ON Temp.: Tank Reboil Temp when Smart DHW start.
(do not turn on pump when there is no water etc.)
2 Test mode (Test run)
Normally it is not used.

3 Sensor setup (offset gap of detected temp of each sensor

within -2~2°C range)
(NOTE) Please use only when sensor is deviated.
It affects temperature control.

4 Reset password (Reset password)

183
18.1.4 Specifications

18.1.4.1 Specifications of fresh water was heat transfer medium in brazed heat
exchanger

Parameter Quality Limits for Tap Water on the Secondary Side

Temperature Below 60°C
pH 7 to 9
Alkalinity 60mg/l < HCO₃ < 300mg/l
Conductivity < 500μS/cm
Hardness [Ca⁺, Mg⁺] / [HCO₃⁻] > 0.5
Chloride < 200mg/l at 60°C
Sulphate [SO₄²⁻] < 100mg/l and [HCO₃⁻] / [SO₄²⁻] > 1
Nitrate NO₃ < 100mg/l
Chlorine < 0.5mg/l

18.1.4.2 External filter

Solids in the water must be filtered.
Minimum filter mesh size required for the field supply external filter in the water inlet is 20 mesh.

184
19. Troubleshooting Guide
19.1 Refrigeration Cycle System
In order to diagnose malfunctions, make sure that there
are no electrical problems before inspecting the
refrigeration cycle.
Such problems include insufficient insulation, problem
with the power source, malfunction of a compressor and a
fan.
The normal pressure of the refrigeration cycle depends
on various conditions, the standard values for them are
shown in the table on the right.

185
19.2 Relationship between the Condition of the Air-to-Water Heatpump
Indoor and Outdoor Units and Pressure and Electric Current

Heating Mode Cooling Mode

Condition of the Air-to-

Water Heatpump Electric current Electric current
indoor and outdoor units Low Pressure High Pressure Low Pressure High Pressure
during operation during operation

Water leakage or
insufficient water flow
rate in the system

Excessive amount of
refrigerant

Inefficient compression

Insufficient refrigerant
(gas leakage)

Outdoor heat exchange

deficiency

Clogged expansion valve

or Strainer

 Carry out the measurements of pressure, electric current, and temperature fifteen minutes after an operation is
started.

186
19.3 Breakdown Self Diagnosis Function
19.3.1 Self Diagnosis Function (Three Digits Alphanumeric Code)
 When abnormality occur during operation, the system will stop operation, and OFF/ON control panel LED will
blink and error code will display on the control panel.
 Even error code is reset by turning OFF power supply or by selecting ERROR RESET, if the system abnormality
is still unrepaired, system will again stop operation, and OFF/ON control panel LED will again blinks and error
code will be display.
 The error code will store in IC memory.

 To check the error code

1 When an abnormality occurs, system will stop operation and OFF/ON control panel LED will blink.
2 Error code of the abnormality will be display on the control panel.
3 To determine the abnormality description, the error code table needs to be referred.

eg:

Error number

Blinking

Press to select Close / Reset then press

 To display past/last error code

1 Turn ON power supply.
2 Refer below procedure to retrieve the error code history.

 To permanently delete error code from IC memory

1 Turn ON power supply.
2 Refer below procedure to clear error history.

187
Press button
and select
“System Check”

Press SW to select
[Screen 4] “Error history”

Display last 4 error retrieved from EEPROM

188
19.4 Error Codes Table

Diagnosis display Abnormality/Protection control Abnormality judgement Primary location to verify

H00 No abnormality detected — —

 Indoor/outdoor connection wire
 Indoor/outdoor PCB
H12 Indoor/Outdoor capacity unmatched 90s after power supply
 Specification and combination table in
catalogue
Outdoor compressor temperature sensor  Compressor temperature sensor
H15 Continue for 5 sec.
abnormality (defective or disconnected)
 Indoor PCB
H20 Water pump abnormality Continue for 10 sec.
 Water pump (malfunction)
Indoor refrigerant liquid temperature  Refrigerant liquid temperature sensor
H23 Continue for 5 sec.
sensor abnormality (defective or disconnected)
 High pressure sensor (defective or
H27 Service valve error Continue for 5 minutes
disconnected)
 Solar temperature sensor (defective or
H28 Abnormal solar sensor Continue for 5 sec.
disconnected)
 Pool temperature sensor (defective or
H31 Abnormal swimming pool sensor Continue for 5 sec.
disconnected)
 Buffer tank sensor (defective or
H36 Abnormal buffer tank sensor Continue for 5 sec.
disconnected)
When indoor and outdoor
H38 Brand code not match —
brand code not same
 Outdoor pipe temperature sensor
 Clogged expansion valve or strainer
H42 Compressor low pressure abnormality —  Insufficient refrigerant
 Outdoor PCB
 Compressor
H43 Abnormal Zone 1 sensor Continue for 5 sec.  Water temperature Zone 1 sensor
H44 Abnormal Zone 2 sensor Continue for 5 sec.  Water temperature Zone 2 sensor
H62 Water flow switch abnormality Continue for 1 min.  Water flow switch
 Outdoor low pressure sensor
*H63 Refrigerant low pressure abnormality Continue for 5 sec.
(defective or disconnected)
 Outdoor high pressure sensor
H64 Refrigerant high pressure abnormality Continue for 5 sec.
(defective or disconnected)
 Water flow switch sensor (defective or
disconnected)
*H65 Deice circulation error Continue for 10 sec.
 Water pump malfunction
 Buffer tank (is used)
H67 Abnormal External Thermistor 1 Continue for 5 sec.  Room temperature Zone 1 sensor
H68 Abnormal External Thermistor 2 Continue for 5 sec.  Room temperature Zone 2 sensor
 Back-up heater OLP
H70 Back-up heater OLP abnormality Continue for 60 sec.
(Disconnection or activated)
H72 Tank sensor abnormal Continue for 5 sec.  Tank sensor
Communication or transfer
H74 PCB communication error  Indoor main PCB and Sub PCB
error
Room heater disable and deice
 Heater operation must enable to
H75 Low water temperature control request to operate under low
increase water temperature
water temperature
Indoor - control panel communication  Indoor - control panel
H76 —
abnormality (defective or disconnected)
 Internal/external cable connections
H90 Indoor/outdoor abnormal communication > 1 min after starting operation
 Indoor/Outdoor PCB
 Tank heater OLP
H91 Tank heater OLP abnormality Continue for 60 sec.
(Disconnection or activated)
H95 Indoor/Outdoor wrong connection —  Indoor/Outdoor supply voltage
 Outdoor high pressure sensor
 Water pump or water leakage
Outdoor high pressure overload
H98 —  Clogged expansion valve or strainer
protection
 Excess refrigerant
 Outdoor PCB
 Indoor heat exchanger
H99 Indoor heat exchanger freeze prevention —
 Refrigerant shortage
4 times occurrence within
F12 Pressure switch activate  Pressure switch
20 minutes
4 times occurrence within
F14 Outdoor compressor abnormal revolution  Outdoor compressor
20 minutes
2 times occurrence within  Outdoor PCB
F15 Outdoor fan motor lock abnormality
30 minutes  Outdoor fan motor
3 times occurrence within  Excess refrigerant
F16 Total running current protection
20 minutes  Outdoor PCB

189
 Diagnosis display Abnormality/Protection control Abnormality judgement Primary location to verify

 Compressor tank temperature sensor

 Clogged expansion valve or strainer
Outdoor compressor overheating 4 times occurrence within
F20  Insufficient refrigerant
protection 30 minutes
 Outdoor PCB
 Compressor
IPM (power transistor) overheating 3 times occurrence within  Improper heat exchange
F22
protection 30 minutes  IPM (Power transistor)
Outdoor Direct Current (DC) peak 7 times occurrence  Outdoor PCB
F23
detection continuously  Compressor
 Insufficient refrigerant
2 times occurrence within
F24 Refrigeration cycle abnormality  Outdoor PCB
20 minutes
 Compressor low compression
Cooling/Heating cycle changeover 4 times occurrence within  4-way valve
F25
abnormality 30 minutes  V-coil
F27 Pressure switch abnormality Continue for 1 min.  Pressure switch
 Discharge Temperature Sensor
1 times occurrence within  Discharge Pressure Sensor
F29 Low Discharge Superheat
2550 minutes  Pressure Switch
 Outdoor PCB
 Water outlet sensor 2 (defective or
F30 Water outlet sensor 2 abnormality Continue for 5 sec.
disconnected)
F32 Abnormal Internal Thermostat Continue for 5 sec.  Control panel PCB thermostat
Outdoor air temperature sensor  Outdoor air temperature sensor
F36 Continue for 5 sec.
abnormality (defective or disconnected)
Indoor water inlet temperature sensor  Water inlet temperature sensor
F37 Continue for 5 sec.
abnormality (defective or disconnected)
Outdoor discharge pipe temperature  Outdoor discharge pipe temperature
F40 Continue for 5 sec.
sensor abnormality sensor (defective or disconnected)
4 times occurrence within
F41 PFC control  Voltage at PFC
10 minutes
Outdoor heat exchanger temperature  Outdoor heat exchanger temperature
F42 Continue for 5 sec.
sensor abnormality sensor (defective or disconnected)
 Outdoor defrost sensor (defective or
F43 Outdoor defrost sensor abnormality Continue for 5 sec.
disconnected)
Indoor water outlet temperature sensor  Water outlet temperature sensor
F45 Continue for 5 sec.
abnormality (defective or disconnected)
 Insufficient refrigerant
Outdoor Current Transformer open
F46 —  Outdoor PCB
circuit
 Compressor low
Outdoor EVA outlet temperature sensor  Outdoor EVA outlet temperature sensor
F48 Continue for 5 sec.
abnormality (defective or disconnected)
Outdoor bypass outlet temperature  Outdoor bypass outlet temperature
F49 Continue for 5 sec.
sensor abnormality sensor (defective or disconnected)
 Outdoor high pressure sensor
 Water pump or water leakage
Cooling high pressure overload
F95 —  Clogged expansion valve or strainer
protection
 Excess refrigerant
 Outdoor PCB
Note: * This error code is not applicable for this system.

190
19.5 Self-diagnosis Method
19.5.1 Connection Capability Rank Abnormality (H12)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup operation of cooling and heating, the capability rank of indoor checked by the outdoor is used to
determine connection capability rank abnormality.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Wrong model interconnected.
2 Wrong indoor unit or outdoor unit PCB (main) used.
3 Faulty indoor unit or outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 90 seconds.

Troubleshooting:
Yes
Does H12 error occur immediately after installation?

No

Yes Has the installation set-up being No

Does H12 error occur after a certain period of usage?
modified at control panel.
No Yes

No Has any indoor or outdoor PCB being replaced or

serviced? Is the outdoor unit model and capacity within the rank of No
Yes allowable indoor unit capacity?
Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit
Check the spare part number and compare against the Bi-Bloc
part list. WH-SDC0305J3E5 WH-UD03JE5
WH-UD05JE5
WH-SDC0709J3E5 WH-UD07JE5
WH-UD09JE5
Change indoor PCB and/or No Does spare part number match with the indoor/outdoor All In One
outdoor PCb for specified model. model? WH-UD03JE5
WH-ADC0309J3E5
Yes WH-ADC0309J3E5AN WH-UD05JE5
WH-ADC0309J3E5B WH-UD07JE5
WH-ADC0309J3E5UK WH-UD09JE5
No
Has the indoor PCB being replaced anew? Yes

Yes

No
Set the capacity rank at control panel (refer I/I). Has the capacity rank being set at the control panel?

Rectify the model selection.

After capacity is set, turn off the breaker and turn on the
power again to operate the unit.

191
19.5.2 Compressor Tank Temperature Sensor Abnormality (H15)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the compressor tank
temperature sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

Troubleshooting:

Check the CN-TANK connector connection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

Is the CN-TANK connector

No - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the compressor tank temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the outdoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the compressor tank
temperature sensor.

Compressor Tank / Compressor Discharge

Sensor Characteristic
350
Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in compressor tank
300
compressor tank temperature sensor No temperature sensor.
250
matches the value specified in its
Resistance (K)

- Replace the compressor tank

200
characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
150

100

50
Yes
0
- Defect in outdoor unit PCB (main).
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the outdoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (° C)

192
19.5.3 Water Pump Abnormality (H20)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the rotation speed detected by the IPM of water pump motor
during water pump operation is used to determine abnormal water pump (feedback of rotation > 6,000rpm or <
1,000rpm).

Malfunction Caused:
1 Operation stop due to short circuit inside the water pump motor winding.
2 Operation stop due to breaking of wire inside the water pump motor.
3 Operation stop due to breaking of water pump lead wires.
4 Operation stop due to water pump motor IPM malfunction.
5 Operation error due to faulty indoor unit PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.
For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,
Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Turn OFF the power. - Connector

Check if the water No poor contact.
Turn ON the power and pump connector - Correct the
operate the water pump. connection normal? connection.
Yes
No Disconnect the water pump
Does it operate? connector CN-PUMP1.
Turn ON the power and
Yes check the input voltage of
the water pump from
Stop the water pump. indoor unit PCB.

Check the feedback Is the water pump drive

signal from water pump power supply voltage No Replace the
to indoor unit PCB. range between
indoor unit PCB.
280~373Vdc
(pin1 & 4) generated?
Operate the water pump, Yes
is feedback signal (pulse) No Replace the
water pump. Is the water pump control
generated between No Replace the
power supply 15Vdc
pin7 & 4 of CN-PUMP1? indoor unit PCB.
(pin5 & 4) generated?
Yes Yes
Replace the
indoor unit PCB. Operate the water pump,
is the duty command No Replace the
range between 0~6Vdc indoor unit PCB.
(pin6 & 4) generated?

Yes Replace the

water pump.

193
19.5.4 Indoor Refrigerant Liquid Temperature Sensor Abnormality (H23)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the indoor refrigerant liquid
temperature sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-TH1 connector connection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

Is the CN-TH1 connector

No - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the indoor refrigerant liquid temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the outdoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the indoor refrigerant liquid
temperature sensor.

Indoor Refrigerant Liquid / Water Inlet / Water

Outlet Sensor Characteristic
120
110 Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in indoor refrigerant liquid
100
indoor refrigerant liquid temperature No temperature sensor.
90
sensor matches the value specified - Replace the indoor refrigerant
Resistance (K)

80
70
60
in its characteristic chart? liquid temperature sensor.
50
40
30
20
Yes
10 - Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).
0
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (°C)

194
19.5.5 Service Valve Error (H27)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During cooling operation, when:-
[a] Indoor refrigerant pipe temperature at compressor startup - present indoor refrigerant pipe temperature < 2°C
[b] Present high pressure - high pressure at compressor startup < 5kg/cm2
**Judgment only for first time cooling operation and not during pump down operation.

Malfunction Caused:
1 3 way valves closed.
2 Faulty high pressure sensor.
3 Faulty indoor refrigerant pipe temperature sensor
4 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the 3 way valves.

Yes
Is the 3 way valve closed? Open the 3 way valve.

No

Check for clogged

expansion valve or strainer.

- Replace the expansion

Is the expansion valve or Yes valve and/or strainer.
strainer clogged (ice formed)? - Reclaim and recharge
refrigerant.
No
Check the indoor ref. pipe
temperature sensor.

Does it conform to the No Replace the indoor ref. pipe

sensor characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
Yes

Turn ON the power and measure the DC

voltage pin 1 & 3 (GND) of CN-HPS before
and after run the system.

- Defect in outdoor unit

Is the measured voltage No PCB (main).
before and after run the
- Replace the outdoor
system unchanged?
unit PCB (main).

Yes - Defect in outdoor high

pressure sensor.
- Replace the outdoor
high pressure sensor.

195
19.5.6 Abnormal Solar Sensor (H28)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty solar sensor.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent

Abnormal solar sensor component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

NO
H28 happens check connection at CN207 normal? ● Correct sensor connect ion

YES

NO
Measure resistance of sensor match characteristic? ● Change solar sensor

YES

Change Indoor sub PCB

196
19.5.7 Abnormal Swimming Pool Sensor (H31)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty swimming pool sensor.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent

Abnormal swimming pool sensor component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

H31 happens check connector sensor at CN204 connection NO

● Correct sensor connection
normal ?

YES

Measure sensor resistance match swimming pool sensor NO

● Change swimming pool sensor
characteristic?

YES

Change Indoor sub PCB

197
19.5.8 Abnormal Buffer Tank Sensor (H36)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty buffer tank sensor.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent

Abnormal buffer tank sensor component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

NO
H36 check buffer tank sensor connection at CN205 normal? ● Correct connection

YES

Disconnect sensor from sub PCB measure resistance of sensor NO

● Change buffer tank sensor
and compare against characteristic same?

YES

Change sub PCB

198
19.5.9 Brand Code Not Matching (H38)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Indoor and outdoor brand code not match.

For safety reason and to prevent

Brand code not match component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

NO
Check the brand of indoor and outdoor unit both Panasonic? ● Use only Panasonic units.
● Change to Panasonic unit.
YES

Change PCB outdoor

199
19.5.10 Compressor Low Pressure Protection (H42)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of heating and after 5 minutes compressor ON, when outdoor pipe temperature below -29°C or
above 26°C is detected by the outdoor pipe temperature sensor.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Dust accumulation on the outdoor unit heat exchanger.
2 Air short circuit at outdoor unit.
3 2 way valve partially closed.
4 Faulty outdoor unit fan motor.
5 Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage).
6 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
7 Faulty outdoor pipe temperature sensor.
8 Faulty outdoor unit main PCB (main).

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the outdoor unit

fan motor operation.

No Replace the outdoor unit

Check the dust accumulation on the Is the outdoor unit fan
fan motor and/or outdoor unit
outdoor unit heat exchanger. motor operate normally?
PCB (main).
Yes

Is the outdoor unit heat Yes Check for gas leakage.

exchanger dirty? Clean the heat exchanger.
- Repair the pipe flare or
No Yes
Is the oil oozing out from union nuts.
Check the outdoor the 2/3 way valve? - Reclaim and recharge
air passage. refrigerant.
No
Check for clogged
Yes Provide sufficient
Is there any short circuit? expansion valve or stainer.
air passage.
- Replace the expansion
No Yes
Is the expansion valve or valve and/or strainer.
Check the 2-way valve. strainer clogged (ice formed)? - Reclaim and recharge
refrigerant.
No
Reclaim and recharge for a
Is the 2 way valve partially Yes
Open the 2 way valve. specified amount of fresh refrigerant.
closed? - Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (main).
Is abnormality happened Yes - Replace the outdoor pipe
No again? temperature sensor.
- Replace the compressor.

No
Procedure complete

200
19.5.11 Abnormal Zone 1 Sensor (H43)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty buffer tank sensor.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent

Abnormal zone 1 sensor component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

Check the turn off power check connector connection

NO ● Poor contact
Normal?
● Correct connection

YES

Check plug out connector from zone 1 connector sub PCB in

NO ● Defective zone sensor
the PCB measure resistance of zone 1 sensor characteristic
match? ● Replace sensor

YES

● Defective PCB
● Replace PCB

201
19.5.12 Abnormal Zone 2 Sensor (H44)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty buffer tank sensor.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent

Abnormal zone 2 sensor component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

Turn off power check connector connection normal? ● Correct abnormal connection

YES

Plug out from sub PCB, check sensor characteristics measure NO

● Change sensor zone 2
resistance is it match?

YES

Change PCB

202
19.5.13 Water Flow Switch Abnormality (H62)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, the water flow detected by the indoor water flow switch is used to
determine water flow error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty water pump.
2 Water leak in system.
3 Faulty connector connection.
4 Faulty water flow switch.
5 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 10 seconds (but no judgment for 9 minutes after compressor startup/restart).

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Is the CN-FLOW connector No - Connector poor contact.

Check the system water pump. connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes
No Replace the faulty water Check the indoor water flow switch:
Is the water pump working? - Plug out connector from the indoor
pump.
unit PCB (main).
Yes - Dismantle the water flow switch.
- Position the water flow switch in
Check the system water passage. reverse direction (downward).
- Measure the continuity of the
water flow switch.

Yes Fix the system water - Defect in indoor water flow

Is there any water leakage? leakage. No switch.
Is there any continuity? - Replace the indoor water
No flow switch.

Check the CN-FLOW connector connection: Yes - Defect in indoor unit PCB
- Turn OFF the power (main).
- Check the connector connection - Replace the indoor unit PCB
(main).

203
19.5.14 Outdoor High Pressure Abnormality (H64)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, when the outdoor high pressure sensor output signal is 0 Vdc or 5 Vdc.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 4 times in 20 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-HPS connector connection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.
Reconnect the high pressure sensor
connector to the outdoor unit PCB (main).
Turn ON the power and run the system.
Is the CN-HPS connector No - Connector poor contact. Measure the DC voltage pin 1 & 3 (GND)
connection normal? - Correct the connection. of CN-HPS.

Yes
- Defect in outdoor unit
Check the continuity of the outdoor unit PCB (main) Is the measured voltage No PCB (main).
high pressure sensor connector CN-HPS: 0 Vdc or 5 Vdc? - Replace the outdoor
- Plug out connector from the outdoor unit PCB (main). unit PCB (main).
- Measure the continuity pin 1 & 3 (GND) and pin 1 &
4 (5 V) of CN-HPS.
Yes - Defect in outdoor high
pressure sensor.
- Detect in outdoor unit - Replace the outdoor
Yes high pressure sensor.
Is there any continuity? PCB (main).
- Replace the outdoor
unit PCB (main).
No

204
19.5.15 Deice Circulation Error (H65)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of deice (mode 2), the water flow (> 10l/min) detected by the water flow switch is
used to determine deice circulation error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Water flow in air-to-water heatpump indoor unit circuitry.
2 Faulty indoor unit water flow switch.
3 Faulty indoor unit water pump.
4 Faulty indoor unit PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 10 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

During deice (mode 2), check if indoor

unit water pump operates.
No

Check if internal water pump is Use buffer tank to CAUTION

used and it is directly installed to Yes separate external water
the air-to-water heatpump pump from air-to-water
indoor unit circuit. (without buffer heatpump indoor unit Panasonic
External
Air-to-Water
tank) circuit. Heatpump Pump
Indoor Unit

No
● When external pump is used, be sure to install
Stop operation and turn OFF power. it in independent water circuit and not direct to
Plug out the connector of water flow the air-to-water heatpump indoor unit circuit.
switch (CN-FLOW) in the indoor unit
PCB and measure its continuity.

- Defect in indoor unit water

Yes flow switch.
Is there any continuity?
- Replace the indoor unit
water flow switch.
No
- Defect in indoor unit PCB.
- Replace the indoor unit PCB.

Turn OFF the power.

Disconnect indoor unit water
pump connector CN-PUMP1.
Operate the auto-water - Defect in indoor unit water
heatpump unit. During deice No pump.
(mode 2), check if the indoor - Replace the indoor unit
unit water pump duty water pump.
command signal generated?

Yes - Defect in indoor unit PCB.

- Replace the indoor unit PCB.

205
19.5.16 Abnormal External Thermistor 1 (H67)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty room temperature zone 1 sensor.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent

Abnormal external thermistor 1 component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

NO
Check CN205 connector on sub PCB normal? ● Correct connection

YES

Disconnect sensor from sub PCB measure resistance of sensor NO

● Change external thermistor 1
and compare against sensor characteristic same?

YES

Change sub PCB

206
19.5.17 Abnormal External Thermistor 2 (H68)
Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty room temperature zone 2 sensor.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent

Abnormal external thermistor 2 component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

NO ● Correct external thermistor 2 sensor

Check connector CN205 on sub PCB normal?
connector

YES

Check resistance of external thermistor 2 compare against NO

● Change external thermistor 2
characteristic of external thermistor same?

YES

Change sub PCB

207
19.5.18 Indoor Backup Heater OLP Abnormality (H70)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of indoor backup heater, when no power supplies to indoor backup heater or OLP open circuit.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty power supply connector connection.
2 Faulty connector connection.
3 Faulty indoor backup heater overload protector (OLP).
4 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 60 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Is the abnormality happened during No - Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).

operation of indoor backup heater? - Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).

Yes
Check indoor backup heater OLP Use a test pen to push
Check the indoor backup heater incoming continuity: this button to reset OLP
AC power supply (2): - Turn OFF power supply.
- Turn ON power supply (2) & RCCB. - Reset heater 1 OLP.
- Measure the AC voltage between RCCB’s - Measure the continuity of OLP.
L1 & N1.
- Measure the AC voltage between PCB’s
Multimeter to
AC2-L3 & AC2-N2.
- Defect in RCCB. Is there any continuity? measure continuity
- Replace RCCB.
No - Terminal board assembly
Is measured voltage 230Vac? connector poor contact. - Defect in indoor backup
- Correct the connection or No heater OLP.
Yes replace the indoor unit - Replace indoor backup
PCB (main). heater OLP.
Check the CN-OLP1 connector connection:
- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection. - Defect in indoor unit
Yes PCB (main).
No - Replace the indoor unit
Is the CN-OLP1 connector - Connector poor contact.
PCB (main).
connection normal? - Correct the connection.
Yes

208
19.5.19 Tank Temperature Sensor Abnormality (H72)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
When tank connection is set to ON, the temperatures detected by the tank temperature sensor are used to
determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Is the abnormality happened during No - Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).

tank connection set to ON? - Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).

Yes

Check the terminal board assembly no. 15 and

Is the terminal board assembly No
no.16, and CN-TH2 connector connections: - Connector poor contact.
no. 15 and no. 16, and CN-TH2
- Turn OFF the power. - Correct the connection.
connector connections normal?
- Check the connector connections.
Yes
Tank Sensor Characteristics Check the tank temperature sensor:
11 - Plug out connector from the indoor unit PCB (main).
10
9
- Measure the resistance of the tank temperature
8 sensor.
Resistance (K )

7
6
5
4
3 Is the measured resistance of the
2 No - Defect in tank temperature sensor.
tank temperature sensor matches
1 - Replace the tank temperature
0 the value specified in its
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 sensor.
characteristic chart?
Temperature (°C)

Yes
- Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).
- Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).

209
19.5.20 PCB Communication Error (H74)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
When External PCB connection is select “YES” and no communication with External PCB micon for 10 seconds
and above.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty indoor PCB.
3 Faulty indoor sub PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
After 1 minute operation started.

For safety reason and to prevent

PCB communication error component breakdown, always switch
Caution off the power before remove and
connect the component.

NO
H74 happens check connection at CN-PWR normal? ● Correct connection at CN-PWR

YES

NO
Check CN-PWR 230/240 V? ● Abnormal AC POWER supply

YES

NO
Check CN-COMM situation on terminal 1 & 2 and 3 & 1 ● Replace sub PCB

YES

Replace indoor PCB

210
19.5.21 Indoor-Control Panel Communication Abnormality (H76)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During standby and operation of cooling and heating, indoor-control panel error occur.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty control panel.
3 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-REMOTE connector connection:

- Turn OFF the power
- Check the connector connection
Check the DC voltage from the indoor unit PCB (main):
- Plug out connector from the indoor unit PCB (main).
- Turn ON the power.
Is the CN-REMOTE No - Connector poor contact. - Measure the DC voltage pin 1 & 4 of CN-REMOTE.
connector connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes
- Defect in remote controller
Check the control panel Is the remote controller Yes (control panel).
cable connection. (control panel) voltage 5 Vdc
- Replace the remote
(pin 1 & 4) generated?
controller (control panel).

No - Defect in indoor unit PCB

Is the control panel cable No - Defect in cable connection. (main).
connection normal? - Replace control panel cable. - Replace the indoor unit PCB
(main).

Yes

211
19.5.22 Indoor/Outdoor Abnormal Communication (H90)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, the data received from outdoor unit in indoor unit signal transmission is
checked whether it is normal.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).
2 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).
3 Indoor-outdoor signal transmission error due to wrong wiring.
4 Indoor-outdoor signal transmission error due to breaking of wire in the connection wires between the indoor
and outdoor units.
5 Indoor-outdoor signal transmission error due to disturbed power supply waveform.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 1 minute after operation.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the indoor-outdoor

units connection wires.

Yes Correct the indoor-outdoor

Is there any wiring error?
units connection wires.

No
Turn OFF the power and disconnect
terminal 3 wire. Turn ON the power
and measure Vdc between terminal
2 & 3 from the outdoor unit.

Is the Vdc fluctuate No

Replace the outdoor unit
between 45-60 Vdc? PCB (main).

Yes
Turn OFF the power and reconnect
terminal 3 wire. Turn ON the power
and again measure Vdc between
terminal 2 & 3 from outdoor unit.

No
Is the Vdc fluctuate Replace the indoor unit
between 15-60 Vdc? PCB (main).

212
19.5.23 Tank Booster Heater OLP Abnormality (H91)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of tank booster heater, and tank booster heater OLP open circuit.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty tank booster heater overload protector (OLP).
3 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 60 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Is the abnormality happened during - Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).

operation of tank booster heater? - Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).

Yes
Check the CN-OLP2 connector connection:
- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

Is the CN-OLP1 connector No - Connector poor contact.

connection normal? - Correct the connection.
Yes Use a test pen to push
this button to reset OLP
Check tank booster heater OLP continuity:
- Turn OFF power supply.
- Reset tank booster heater OLP.
- Measure the continuity of OLP.

Multimeter to
measure continuity
Is there any continuity?

No - Defect in tank booster heater OLP.

- Replace tank booster heater OLP.
Yes
- Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).
- Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).

213
19.5.24 Unspecified Voltage between Indoor and Outdoor (H95)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
The supply power is detected for its requirement by the indoor/outdoor transmission.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Insufficient power supply.
2 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (noise filter/main).

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the supply voltage.

- Defect in outdoor unit
Is the measured AC voltage No PCB (main).
No Correct the power 230 V? - Replace the outdoor unit
Supply voltage as specified?
supply. PCB (main).
Yes
Yes
Check the rectification voltage
Check the AC voltage from outdoor unit PCB (noise filter): between DCP & DCN.
- Turn OFF the power.
- Plug out connector AC-BLK, CN-BLK & CN-WHT from - Defect in outdoor unit
the outdoor unit PCB (noise filter). Is the measured voltage No PCB (main).
- Turn ON the power. between DCP & DCN~325 Vdc? - Replace the outdoor unit
- Measure the AC voltage between AC-BLK & CN-WHT. PCB (main).
Yes
- Defect in outdoor Check the DC filter (capacitor)
Is the measured AC voltage No unit PCB (noise filter). PCB connector connection.
230 V? - Replace the outdoor
unit PCB (noise filter).
Yes
Is the DC filter (capacitor) PCB No - Connector poor contact.
Check the AC voltage supply to outdoor unit PCB (main):
connector connection normal? - Correct the connection.
- Turn OFF the power.
- Reconnect connector AC-BLK, CN-BLK & CN-WHT to
the outdoor unit PCB (noise filter). Yes - Defect in outdoor unit
- Turn ON the power. PCB (main).
- Measure the AC voltage between AC-BLK & CN-WHT. - Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (main).

214
19.5.25 Outdoor High Pressure Protection (H98)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of heating, when pressure 4.0 MPa and above is detected by outdoor high pressure sensor.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty water pump.
2 Insufficient water flow rate in system.
3 Water leak in system.
4 2/3 way closed.
5 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
6 Excessive refrigerant.
7 Faulty outdoor high pressure sensor.
8 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the system water pump. Check the 2/3 way valve.

No Yes
Replace the faulty water Is the 2/3 way valve closed? Open the 2/3 way valve.
Is the water pump working? pump.

Yes No
Check for clogged expansion
Check the system water
valve or strainer.
flow rate.
- Replace the expansion
Is the expansion valve or Yes valve and/or strainer.
Is the water pump speed No strainer clogged (ice formed)? - Reclaim and recharge
Readjust the water
adjusted according to system refrigerant.
pump speed. No
hydraulic external static pressure?

Yes Check refrigerant amount.

Check the system water passage.

No Reclaim and recharge with
Is the additional refrigerant
correct amount of
amount filled correctly?
refrigerant.
Yes Fix the system water
Is there any water leakage?
leakage. Yes - Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (main).
No
- Replace the outdoor high
pressure sensor.

215
19.5.26 Indoor Freeze-up Protection (H99)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During anti-freezing control in cooling operation, when the indoor refrigerant liquid temperature < 0°C.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty water pump.
2 Insufficient water flow rate in system.
3 Water leak in system.
4 2 way valve partially closed.
5 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
6 Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage).
7 Faulty indoor refrigerant liquid temperature sensor.
8 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the system water pump.

Check for clogged

Replace the faulty water expansion valve or strainer.
No
Is the water pump working? pump.
- Replace the expansion
Yes Is the expansion valve or Yes valve and/or strainer.
strainer clogged (ice formed)? - Reclaim and recharge
Check the system water
refrigerant.
flow rate. No

Check refrigerant amount.

Is the water pump speed No Readjust the water
adjusted according to system
pump speed.
hydraulic external static pressure? Is the additional refrigerant No Reclaim and recharge with
amount filled correctly? correct amount of refrigerant.
Yes
Yes
Check the system water passage.
Check the indoor refrigerant
liquid temperature sensor.

Yes Fix the system water

Is there any water leakage? leakage. Does it conform to the sensor
No characteristic chart?

Check the 2 way valve. Yes Replace the indoor unit PCB
(main).

Is the 2 way valve partially Yes No Replace the indoor refrigerant

Open the 2 way valve. liquid temperature sensor.
closed?

No

216
19.5.27 Outdoor High Pressure Switch Activate (F12)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, when pressure 4.5 MPa and above is detected by outdoor high pressure
switch.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Dust accumulation on the outdoor unit heat exchanger.
2 Air short circuit at outdoor unit.
3 Faulty water pump.
4 Insufficient water flow rate in system.
5 Water leak in system.
6 2/3 way valve closed.
7 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
8 Excessive refrigerant.
9 Faulty outdoor high pressure sensor and switch.
10 Faulty outdoor unit PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 4 times in 20 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the dust accumulation on the

outdoor unit heat exchanger.

Check the 2/3 way valve.

Is the outdoor unit heat Yes
Clean the heat exchanger.
exchanger dirty?
Yes
No Is the 2/3 way valve closed? Open the 2/3 way valve.
Check the outdoor air
passage. No

Check the system water passage.

Yes Provide sufficient air
Is there any short circuit?
passage. Yes - Fix the system water leakage.
- Replace outdoor high
No Is there any water leakage?
pressure sensor.
Check the system water pump. No
Check for clogged - Replace the expansion valve
- Replace the faulty water expansion valve or strainer. and/or strainer.
No Yes
pump. - Reclaim and recharge
Is the water pump working?
- Replace outdoor high refrigerant.
pressure sensor. Is the expansion valve or - Replace outdoor high
Yes
strainer clogged (ice formed)? pressure sensor.
Check the system water
flow rate. No

Check refrigerant amount. No - Reclaim and recharge with

- Readjust the water pump correct amount of refrigerant.
Is the water pump speed No speed. - Replace outdoor high
adjusted according to system - Replace outdoor high pressure sensor.
hydraulic external static pressure? pressure sensor. Is the additional refrigerant
amount filled correctly?
Yes - Replace the outdoor unit
Yes PCB (main).
- Replace the outdoor high
pressure sensor and switch.

217
19.5.28 Compressor Rotation Failure (F14)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
A compressor rotation failure is detected by checking the compressor running condition through the position
detection circuit.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Compressor terminal disconnect.
2 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).
3 Faulty compressor.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 4 times in 20 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

CORE R

Check the U, V, and W connector connection:

P
- Turn OFF the power.
2T
- Check the U, V, and W connector connection at U R
V B
outdoor unit PCB (main) and compressor terminal. W Y
COMPRESSOR
CORE

Is the connector connection No - Connector poor contact. FUSE T 3.15A L 250W

normal? - Correct the connection. Outdoor unit Compressor

PCB (main) terminal
Yes
Disconnect the harnesses U, V, and
W from the compressor terminal.
Red Blue Yellow

From the disconnected harnesses U, V, and W,

connect them to the inverter checker. Turn ON COMMUNICATION
(YEL) YELLOW ERROR
the power and operate the system. Check the
inverter checker 6 LEDs blinking condition.
INVERTER SIGNAL

- IPM defective. (BLU) BLUE (RED) RED

Is the blinking of the 6 LEDs in No
- Replace the outdoor unit PCB TRADE MARK
same sequence/condition?
(main). COMP. TERMINAL
Yes Inverter
Replace the compressor. checker

218
19.5.29 Outdoor Fan Motor (DC Motor) Mechanism Locked (F15)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
The rotation speed detected by the Hall IC of the fan motor during fan motor operation is used to determine
abnormal fan motor (feedback of rotation > 2550 rpm or < 50 rpm).

Malfunction Caused:
1 Operation stop due to short circuit inside the fan motor winding.
2 Operation stop due to breaking of wire inside the fan motor.
3 Operation stop due to breaking of fan motor lead wires.
4 Operation stop due to fan motor Hall IC malfunction.
5 Operation error due to faulty outdoor unit PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 2 times in 30 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Turn OFF the power and

operate the fan by hand.
Turn OFF the power and
disconnect the fan motor
Does the fan rotate No connector. Turn ON the power.
smoothly? Replace the fan motor.

Yes Check the output of the fan motor

Turn ON the power and from outdoor unit PCB (main)
operate the fan motor.

No Replace the outdoor

No Is the fan motor power supply voltage
Does it rotate? ~325 Vdc (pin 1 & 4) generated? unit PCB (main).

Yes Yes

Is the fan motor control voltage No Replace the outdoor

Stop the fan motor.
15 Vdc (pin 5 & 4) generated? unit PCB (main).

Yes
Check the rotation feedback
output from the fan motor. Operate the fan motor, is the No Replace the outdoor
rotation command voltage 1-5 Vdc
unit PCB (main).
(pin 7 & 4) generated?
Rotate the fan motor by hand, is the No
rotation feedback voltage 15 Vdc Replace the fan motor. Yes
(pin 6 & 4) generated? Replace the fan motor.

Yes Replace the outdoor

unit PCB (main).

219
19.5.30 Input Over Current Detection (F16)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, when outdoor current above 14.0 A (UD03JE5, UD05JE5), 17.0 A
(UD07JE5, UD09JE5) is detected by the current transformer (CT) in the outdoor unit PCB.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Excessive refrigerant.
2 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 3 times in 20 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Get restarted and measure

the AC current from the
outdoor LIVE terminal.

Is the measured AC current No Replace the outdoor unit

over 14.0 A (UD03JE5, PCB (main).
UD05JE5) and 17.0 A
(UD07JE5, UD09JE5)?

Check refrigerant amount.

Yes Reclaim and recharge with

Excess refrigerant?
correct amount of refrigerant.

No
Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (main).

220
19.5.31 Compressor Overheating (F20)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, when temperature above 112°C is detected by the compressor tank
temperature sensor.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty compressor tank temperature sensor.
2 2/3 way valve closed.
3 Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage).
4 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
5 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).
6 Faulty compressor.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 4 times in 30 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the compressor tank

temperature sensor.

Check for clogged expansion

Does it conform to the No Replace the compressor valve or strainer.
sensor characteristic chart? tank temperature sensor.

Yes - Repair expansion valve

Is the expansion valve or Yes and/or strainer.
Check the 2/3 way valve. strainer clogged (ice formed)? - Reclaim and recharge
refrigerant.
No

Reclaim and recharge for a

Yes
Is the 2/3 way valve closed? Open the 2/3 way valve. specified amount of fresh refrigerant.

No - Replace the outdoor unit

Is abnormality happened Yes
PCB (main).
Check for gas leakage. again?
- Replace the compressor.
No
- Repair the pipe flare or Procedure complete.
Is the oil oozing out from Yes union nuts.
the 2/3 way valve? - Reclaim and recharge
refrigerant.
No

221
19.5.32 IPM Overheating (F22)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, when temperature 95°C is detected by the outdoor IPM temperature
sensor.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty outdoor unit fan motor.
2 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 3 times in 30 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the outdoor unit

installation condition.

Is there any improper heat Yes - Reinstall the outdoor unit.

radiation? - Remove the obstacle(s).

No
Is the outdoor unit No Replace the outdoor unit
fan motor operating? fan motor.

Yes
- Defect in IPM.
- Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (main).

222
19.5.33 Output Over Current Detection (F23)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, when outdoor DC current is above set valve is detected by the IPM DC
Peak sensing circuitry in the outdoor unit PCB (main).

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).
2 Faulty compressor.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 7 times.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the compressor winding resistance:

- Turn OFF the power and disconnect the Are the compressor’s - Compressor defective due to
Yes
harnesses U, V, and W. winding resistance (U-V, V- winding shorted.
- Measure the winding resistance between W, or U-W) shorted? - Replace the compressor.
U-V, V-W, and W-U.
- Outdoor eletronic circuit
No defect due to power transistor
shorted.
Checking the power transistor - Replace the outdoor unit
Never touch any live parts for at least 10 minutes after turning off the circuit breaker.
If unavoidably necessary touch a live part, make sure the power transistor’s supply
PCB (main).
voltage is below 50 V using the tester.
For the UVW, make measurements at the Faston terminal on the board or the relay
connector.

Power transistor Power transistor

Tester’s negative terminal UVW UVW
(+) (-)
Power transistor Power transistor
Tester’s positive terminal UVW UVW
(+) (-)
Normal resistance Several kohms to several Mohms
Abnormal resistance 0 or ∞

223
19.5.34 Refrigeration Cycle Abnormality (F24) (WH-UD03JE5 and WH-UD05JE5)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
1 During operation of cooling and heating, compressor frequency > Frated.
2 During operation of cooling and heating, running current: 0.65 A < I < 1.65 A.
3 During operation of cooling, water inlet temperature - indoor refrigerant liquid temperature < 4°C.
4 During operation of heating, indoor refrigerant liquid temperature - water inlet temperature < 5°C.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty water inlet or indoor refrigerant liquid temperature sensors.
2 2/3 way valve closed.
3 Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage).
4 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
5 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).
6 Poor compression of compressor.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 2 times in 20 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the water inlet and indoor ref.

liquid temperature sensors.

Does it conform to the No Replace the water inlet or indoor ref. Check for clogged
sensor characteristic chart? liquid temperature sensor. expansion valve or strainer.

Yes - Repair expansion valve

Is the expansion valve or Yes and/or strainer.
Check the 2/3 way valve. strainer clogged (ice formed)? - Reclaim and recharge
refrigerant.
No
Yes Reclaim and recharge for a
Is the 2/3 way valve closed? Open the 2/3 way valve. specified amount of fresh refrigerant.

No
Yes - Replace the outdoor unit
Is abnormality happened
Check for gas leakage. PCB (main).
again?
- Replace the compressor.

- Repair the pipe flare or No

Is the oil oozing out from Yes union nuts. Procedure complete.
the 2/3 way valve? - Reclaim and recharge
refrigerant.
No

224
19.5.35 Refrigeration Cycle Abnormality (F24) (WH-UD07JE5 and WH-UD09JE5)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
1 During compressor running (heating / cooling) for more than 10 minutes except deice, pumpdown and test
mode.
2 During heating / cooling, water outlet and water inlet difference is less than 1°C.
3 During heating / cooling, high pressure < 1MPa (143 Psi) for more than 10 minutes or < 0.2 MPa (28 Psi) for
more than 5 minutes.
4 During heating / cooling, discharge temperature - saturation temperature of high pressure ≥ 60°C.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage).
2 Faulty indoor water inlet, indoor water outlet, compressor discharge temp sensor or high pressure sensor.
3 2/3 way valve closed.
4 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
5 Faulty indoor or outdoor PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 2 times in 30 minutes.

Check for gas leaking

Yes Repair leak point or replace,

Is the leaking found?
reclaim and recharge gas

No
Check for clogged expansion
Check sensor characteristics valve or strainer

1. Water outlet sensor

2. Water inlet sensor
Yes - Replace expansion valve and / or
3. Compressor discharge sensor Is the expansion valve or strainer
strainer
clogged (ice formed)?
- Reclaim and recharge refrigerant
No

No
Does it conform to Replace the sensor Reclaim and recharge for a specified
sensor characteristics? amount of fresh refrigerant

Yes
Yes
- Replace the outdoor or indoor unit
Is abnormality happened again?
Check the pressure sensor PCB (main)

No
Procedure complete

Yes
Is the pressure sensor value Replace the pressure sensor
and actual mismatched?

No

225
19.5.36 Four Way Valve Abnormality (F25)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
1 During heating operation, when the indoor pipe temperature of thermostat ON indoor unit < 0°C.
2 During cooling operation, when the indoor pipe temperature of thermostat ON indoor unit > 45°C.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty sensor.
2 Faulty connector connection.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (noise filter/main).
4 Faulty four way valve.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 4 times in 30 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Four way valve coil Yes Connect the four

disconnected (loose)? way valve coil.
Check the indoor pipe No
temperature sensor. Yes
Is the harness out of the
Reconnect the harness.
CN-HOT connector?

Does it conform to the No Replace the indoor pipe No

sensor characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
Check the continuity of the
four way valve coil.
Yes
Is F25 occur during Yes
heating operation?
Disconnect the harness from the No Replace the four
No CN-HOT connector. Resistance
way valve coil.
between harness about 1.52 kohm?
Is the four way valve coil energize Yes Replace the outdoor unit
during cooling operation? PCB (noise filter/main). Yes CN-HOT
4 WAYS
VALVE
(VH3-2)
Measure AC voltage supply to 1 2 3

No CN-HOT (pin 1 & 3) during

Replace the four way valve. heating operation.

Is the voltage supply to No Replace the outdoor unit

four way valve 230 Vac? PCB (noise filter/main).

Yes
Replace the four way valve.

226
19.5.37 Outdoor High Pressure Switch Abnormal (F27)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During compressor stop, and outdoor high pressure switch is remain opened.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty switch.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 1 minute.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-PSW1 connector connection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-PSW1 connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes
FG1
G
CN-EV CN-PSW1 GREEN
Check the continuity of the outdoor high 1
WHITE
6 1
BLUE
2
pressure switch:
- Plug out outdoor high pressure switch R R
connector from CN-PSW1 channel. M
- Measure the connector continuity. HIGH PRESSURE
ELECTRO MAGNETIC COIL SWITCH
(EXPANSION VALVE) (normally close)
Multimeter

- Defect in outdoor unit PCB

Yes (main).
Is there any continuity?
- Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (main).
No - Defect in outdoor high
pressure switch.
- Replace the outdoor high
pressure switch.

227
19.5.38 Low Discharge Superheat (F29)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the outdoor pipe temperature
sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).
4 Faulty High Pressure Switch
5 Refrigerant shortage (refrigerant leakage).

Abnormality Judgment:
1 times occurrence within 2550 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-DIS & CN-TH1 connection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

- Is the CN-DIS & CN-TH1 connector normal?

- Measured the resistance of the sensor, is No
- Replace the temperature
the measured resistance matches the value Sensor.
specified in its characteristic chart?

Yes

Check Refrigeration Cycle Pressure.

No
Is the refrigerant cycle pressure normal? - Recharge Gas.
Yes

Outdoor Pipe / Outdoor Defrost Sensor

- Defect in Outdoor Unit PCB. Compressor Tank / Compressor Discharge Sensor
Characteristic - Replace the Outdoor Unit PCB. Characteristic
30 350

300
25
250
Resistance (K )
Resistance (K )

20
200
15
150

10 100

5 50

0
0
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature (°C)
Temperature (°C)

228
19.5.39 Indoor Water Outlet Temperature Sensor 2 Abnormality (F30)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the indoor water outlet
temperature sensor 2 are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty indoor unit PCB.

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-TH3 connector connnection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-TH3 connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the indoor water outlet temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the indoor unit PCB.
- Measure the resistance of the indoor water outlet
temperature sensor.
Indoor Refrigerant Liquid / Water Inlet / Water
Outlet Sensor Characteristic
120
110 Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in indoor water outlet
100
indoor water outlet temperature No temperature sensor.
90
Resistance (K)

80
70
sensor matches the value specified - Replace the indoor water
60 in its characteristic chart? outlet temperature sensor.
50
40
30
20 Yes
10
0
- Defect in indoor unit PCB.
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the indoor unit PCB.
Temperature (°C)

229
19.5.40 Outdoor Air Temperature Sensor Abnormality (F36)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the outdoor air temperature
sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-TH1 connector connnection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-TH1 connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the outdoor air temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the outdoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the outdoor air
temperature sensor.

Outdoor Intake Air Sensor Characteristic

100
90 Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in outdoor air temperature
80
outdoor air temperature sensor No sensor.
70
Resistance (K )

60 matches the value specified in its - Replace the outdoor air

50 characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
40
30
20
10
Yes
0 - Defect in outdoor unit PCB (main).
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the outdoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (°C)

230
19.5.41 Indoor Water Inlet Temperature Sensor Abnormality (F37)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the indoor water inlet
temperature sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-TH1 connector connnection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-TH1 connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the indoor water inlet temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the indoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the indoor water inlet
temperature sensor.
Indoor Refrigerant Liquid / Water Inlet / Water
Outlet Sensor Characteristic
120
110 Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in indoor water inlet
100
indoor water inlet temperature sensor No temperature sensor.
90
Resistance (K )

80
70
matches the value specified in its - Replace the indoor water inlet
60 characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
50
40
30
20 Yes
10
0
- Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (°C)

231
19.5.42 Outdoor Discharge Pipe Temperature Sensor Abnormality (F40)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the outdoor discharge pipe
temperature sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-DIS connector connnection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-DIS connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the outdoor discharge pipe temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the outdoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the outdoor discharge
pipe temperature sensor.

Compressor Tank / Compressor Discharge Sensor

Characteristic
350
Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in outdoor discharge pipe
300
outdoor discharge pipe temperature No temperature sensor.
250
Resistance (K )

sensor matches the value specified - Replace the outdoor discharge pipe
200
in its characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
150

100

50 Yes
0
- Defect in outdoor unit PCB (main).
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the outdoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (°C)

232
19.5.43 Power Factor Correction (PFC) Abnormality (F41)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling and heating, when the PFC protection circuitry in the outdoor unit PCB (main) senses
abnormal high DC voltage level.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Power supply surge.
2 Compressor windings not uniform.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 4 times in 10 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the compressor winding resistance:

Check the supply voltage. - Turn off the power supply and disconnect
the harnesses U, V, and W.
- Measure the winding resistance between U-V,
No V-W, and W-U.
Supply voltage as specified? Correct the power supply.

Yes
Are the compressor’s winding
Operate the system. Verify PFC resistance (U-V, V-W, U-W)
abnormality by measuring the DC uniform?
voltage between DCP-OUT and DCN-
OUT of the outdoor unit PCB (main).
No
Replace the compressor.
Is the DC voltage between DCP- Yes - Defect in PFC circuitry.
OUT and DCN-OUT normal - Replace the outdoor unit
(between 285-315 Vdc)? PCB (main). Yes Replace the outdoor unit
PCB (main).
No

233
19.5.44 Outdoor Pipe Temperature Sensor Abnormality (F42)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the outdoor pipe temperature
sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-TH1 connector connnection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-TH1 connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the outdoor pipe temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the outdoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the outdoor pipe
temperature sensor.
Outdoor Pipe / Outdoor Defrost Sensor
Characteristic
30
Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in outdoor pipe temperature
25
outdoor pipe temperature sensor No sensor.
Resistance (K )

20 matches the value specified in its - Replace the outdoor pipe

15 characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
10

5 Yes
- Defect in outdoor unit PCB (main).
0
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the outdoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (°C)

234
19.5.45 Outdoor Defrost Temperature Sensor Abnormality (F43)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the outdoor defrost
temperature sensor are used to determine sensor error.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-TH2 connector connnection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-TH2 connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the outdoor defrost temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the outdoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the outdoor defrost
temperature sensor.
Outdoor Pipe / Outdoor Defrost Sensor
Characteristic
30
Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in outdoor defrost
25
outdoor defrost temperature sensor No temperature sensor.
Resistance (K )

20
matches the value specified in its - Replace the outdoor defrost
15 characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
10

5 Yes
0
- Defect in outdoor unit PCB (main).
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the outdoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (°C)

235
19.5.46 Indoor Water Outlet Temperature Sensor Abnormality (F45)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During startup and operation of cooling and heating, the temperatures detected by the indoor water outlet
temperature sensor are used to determine sensor errors.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Faulty connector connection.
2 Faulty sensor.
3 Faulty indoor unit PCB (main).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue for 5 seconds.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the CN-TH1 connector connnection:

- Turn OFF the power.
- Check the connector connection.

No
Is the CN-TH1 connector - Connector poor contact.
connection normal? - Correct the connection.

Yes

Check the indoor water outlet temperature sensor:

- Plug out connector from the indoor unit PCB (main).
- Measure the resistance of the indoor water outlet
temperature sensor.
Indoor Refrigerant Liquid / Water Inlet / Water
Outlet Sensor Characteristic
120
110 Is the measured resistance of the - Defect in indoor water outlet
100
indoor water outlet temperature No temperature sensor.
90
Resistance (K )

80
70
sensor matches the value specified - Replace the indoor water outlet
60 in its characteristic chart? temperature sensor.
50
40
30
20 Yes
10
0
- Defect in indoor unit PCB (main).
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 - Replace the indoor unit PCB (main).
Temperature (°C)

236
19.5.47 Outdoor Current Transformer Open Circuit (F46)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
A current transformer (CT) open circuit is detected by checking the compressor running frequency ( rated
frequency) and CT detected input current (< 0.65 A) for continuously 20 seconds.

Malfunction Caused:
1 CT defective.
2 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).
3 Compressor defective (low compression).

Abnormality Judgment:
Continue 3 times in 20 minutes.

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Measure the current from

Operate heating operation. the outdoor LIVE terminal.
When F46 occurs again, turn
OFF the power.
No - Defect in CT.
Is the current < 0.65 A? - Replace the outdoor
unit PCB (main).
Check the 2/3 way valve. Yes

While the system is still in

heating operation, check the
Yes discharge pressure.
Is the 2/3 way valve closed? Open the 2/3 way valve.

No
Is the pressure unchanged (same No
Replace the outdoor unit
Check for gas leakage. as when compressor stop)? PCB (main).

Yes
- Replace the pipe flare or
Yes union nuts. While the system is still in heating operation,
Is the oil oozing out from
- Reclaim and recharge further check (by touching) if;
the 2/3 way valve?
refrigerant. - Compressor discharge pipe is cold.
No - Compressor body is warm to confirm the
compressor low compression.
Turn ON the power, and
operate heating operation. Yes
Replace the compressor.

237
19.5.48 Cooling High Pressure Overload Protection (F95)
Malfunction Decision Conditions:
During operation of cooling, when pressure 4.0 MPa and above is detected by outdoor high pressure sensor.

Malfunction Caused:
1 Dust accumulation in the outdoor unit heat exchanger.
2 Air short circuit at outdoor unit.
3 2 way valve closed.
4 Faulty outdoor unit fan motor.
5 Clogged expansion valve or strainer.
6 Excessive refrigerant.
7 Faulty outdoor high pressure sensor.
8 Faulty outdoor unit PCB (main).

For safety reason and to prevent component breakdown,

Troubleshooting: Caution always switch off the power before remove and connect the component.

Check the outdoor unit fan

Check the dust accumulation on the motor operation.
outdoor unit heat exchanger.
No Replace the outdoor unit
Is the outdoor unit fan
fan motor and/or outdoor
motor operate normally?
Yes unit PCB (main).
Is the outdoor unit heat
Clean the heat exchanger. Yes
exchanger dirty?
Check for clogged
No expansion valve or strainer.
Check the outdoor air - Replace the expansion
passage. Is the expansion valve or Yes valve and/or strainer.
strainer clogged (ice formed)? - Reclaim and recharge
Yes refrigerant.
Provide sufficient air No
Is there any short circuit?
passage
Check refrigerant amount.
No

Check the 2 way valve. No Reclaim and recharge with

Is the additional refrigerant
correct amount of
amount filled correctly?
refrigerant.
Yes Yes - Replace the outdoor unit
Is the 2 way valve closed? Open the 2 way valve. PCB (main).
- Replace the outdoor high
No pressure sensor.

238
20. Disassembly and Assembly Instructions
WARNING
High Voltage are generated in the electrical parts area by the capacitor. Ensure that the capacitor has discharged sufficiently before proceeding
with repair work. Failure to heed this caution may result in electric shocks.

20.1 To Remove Front Plate and Top Plate

Hook

1 Remove 2 screw at the bottom to remove the Front Plate

2 Remove 14 screw at the top to remove the Top Plate

239
20.2 To Remove Pressure Gauge

2. Remove 4 screws to remove

the Connecting bar.

3. Use spanner to release nut

of Pressure Gauge.

1. Remove 3 screws to remove

the Particular Plate.

20.3 To Remove Remote Control

3. Remove 3 screws then take out the bottom case.

Claw
(2 places)

Insert the
driver and
slightly turn.

Flat-blade
screwdriver
Bottom
case Disconnect the
remote controller
wiring
1. Remove the top case from the bottom case. 2. Disconnect the Remote Controller wiring.

240
20.4 To Remove RCCB

2. Disconnect lead wires

(Black and White) from
the RCCB.

3. Remove screw to
remove the RCCB.

RCCB
Control Board Cover
1. Remove 6 screws to remove
the Control Board Cover.

20.5 To Remove Electronic Controller

1. Disconnect all connectors from

main PCB, CN-FLWSEN, CN-PUMP1,
CN-TH1, CN-TH2, CN-TH3, CN-OLP1,
CN1, CN2, CN3, CN4, CN5, CN6.
Detach all wires, REMOTE
CONTROLLER, 3 WAY VALVE,
AC1-L3, AC1-N, G01, DATA, G02, L2,
L1, G03, HT1-L3, AC2-L3, AC2-N2.

241
20.6 To Remove Flow Switch and Air Purge Valve
3. Remove 2 retaining rings,
2. Detach the flow sensor lead wire. then remove the Flow Sensor.

1. Turn the Air Purge Valve

anti-clockwise then remove.

Air Purge Valve

When reinstall Flow Switch, ensure the arrow on the flow switch is parallel with the pipe shaft and is facing in
the direction of flow.

During reinstall Air Purge Valve.

Make sure plug is fully close

in clockwise direction.

Packing
Apply some water based grease
on packing surface before fix
with shut off valve.

20.7 To Remove Water Pump

1. Disconnect CN-PUMP1
from electronic
controller.

2. Disconnect 2 pipe connection.

242
20.8 To Remove Bottle Complete
1. Disconnect the connector CN-OLP1 from the
Electronic Controller and detached the lead
wire HT1-L3 (Red) and AC2-L3 (Black).

2. Remove Air Purge Valve.

3. Disconnect 2 pipe connection.

4. Remove 4 screw from bracket.

20.9 To Remove Water Filter

Filter

1. Set 2 valve for the

Water Filter Set to
“CLOSE”.
Retaining ring
2. Remove the retaining ring
then remove the Water Filter.

243
21. Technical Data
21.1 Operation Characteristics
21.1.1 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5
Heating Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

3.500

3.300
Capacity (kW)

3.100

2.900

2.700

2.500
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.100

1.700
Input Power (kW)

1.300

0.900

0.500

0.100
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

244
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

3.600

3.400
Capacity (kW)

3.200

3.000

2.800

2.600
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

1.300

1.100
Input Power (kW)

0.900

0.700

0.500

0.300
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

245
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 14°C
Piping length : 7 m

5.000

4.600
Capacity (kW)

4.200

3.800

3.400

3.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

1.300

1.100
Input Power (kW)

0.900

0.700

0.500

0.300
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

246
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 18°C
Piping length : 7 m

3.600

3.400
Capacity (kW)

3.200

3.000

2.800

2.600
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

1.100

0.900
Input Power (kW)

0.700

0.500

0.300

0.100
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

247
Heating Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

3.500

3.300
Capacity (kW)

3.100

2.900

2.700

2.500
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

1.200

1.000

0.800
Input Power (kW)

0.600

0.400

0.200
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

248
Cooling Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

3.500

3.300
Capacity (kW)

3.100

2.900

2.700

2.500
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

1.500

1.300

1.100
Input Power (kW)

0.900

0.700

0.500
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

249
21.1.2 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD05JE5
Heating Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

5.200

4.800
Capacity (kW)

4.400

4.000

3.600

3.200
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.200

1.800
Input Power (kW)

1.400

1.000

0.600

0.200
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

250
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

5.000

4.600
Capacity (kW)

4.200

3.800

3.400

3.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.100

1.700
Input Power (kW)

1.300

0.900

0.500

0.100
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

251
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 14°C
Piping length : 7 m

6.000

5.600
Capacity (kW)

5.200

4.800

4.400

4.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.100

1.700
Input Power (kW)

1.300

0.900

0.500

0.100
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

252
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 18°C
Piping length : 7 m

5.300

5.100
Capacity (kW)

4.900

4.700

4.500

4.300
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

1.400

1.200
Input Power (kW)

1.000

0.800

0.600

0.400
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

253
Heating Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

5.500

5.300
Capacity (kW)

5.100

4.900

4.700

4.500
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

1.500

1.300

1.100
Input Power (kW)

0.900

0.700

0.500
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

254
Cooling Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

5.000

4.800
Capacity (kW)

4.600

4.400

4.200

4.000
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

2.000

1.800

1.600
Input Power (kW)

1.400

1.200

1.000
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Piping Length (m)

255
21.1.3 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5
Heating Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

7.500

6.700
Capacity (kW)

5.900

5.100

4.300

3.500
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.500

2.100
Input Power (kW)

1.700

1.300

0.900

0.500
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

256
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

7.500

6.900
Capacity (kW)

6.300

5.700

5.100

4.500
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.500

2.100
Input Power (kW)

1.700

1.300

0.900

0.500
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

257
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 14°C
Piping length : 7 m

9.400

8.600
Capacity (kW)

7.800

7.000

6.200

5.400
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.500

2.100
Input Power (kW)

1.700

1.300

0.900

0.500
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

258
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 18°C
Piping length : 7 m

8.000

7.400
Capacity (kW)

6.800

6.200

5.600

5.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.500

2.100
Input Power (kW)

1.700

1.300

0.900

0.500
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

259
Heating Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

7.500

7.300
Capacity (kW)

7.100

6.900

6.700

6.500
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

2.000

1.800

1.600
Input Power (kW)

1.400

1.200

1.000
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

260
Cooling Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

7.000

6.800
Capacity (kW)

6.600

6.400

6.200

6.000
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

3.000

2.800

2.600
Input Power (kW)

2.400

2.200

2.000
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

261
21.1.4 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD09JE5
Heating Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

9.100

8.500
Capacity (kW)

7.900

7.300

6.700

6.100
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

4.000

3.400
Input Power (kW)

2.800

2.200

1.600

1.000
-20 -16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

262
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

8.600

7.600
Capacity (kW)

6.600

5.600

4.600

3.600
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

3.000

2.600
Input Power (kW)

2.200

1.800

1.400

1.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

263
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 14°C
Piping length : 7 m

10.500

9.300
Capacity (kW)

8.100

6.900

5.700

4.500
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

3.000

2.600
Input Power (kW)

2.200

1.800

1.400

1.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

264
Cooling Characteristics at Different Outdoor Air Temperature
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 18°C
Piping length : 7 m

9.000

8.200
Capacity (kW)

7.400

6.600

5.800

5.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

2.000

1.800
Input Power (kW)

1.600

1.400

1.200

1.000
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

Outdoor Temperature (°C)

265
Heating Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 7°C (DBT), 6°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 30°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 35°C
Piping length : 7 m

9.100

8.900
Capacity (kW)

8.700

8.500

8.300

8.100
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

2.500

2.300

2.100
Input Power (kW)

1.900

1.700

1.500
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

266
Cooling Characteristics at Different Piping Length
Condition
Outdoor air temperature : 35°C (DBT), -°C (WBT)
Indoor water inlet temperature : 12°C
Indoor water outlet temperature : 7°C
Piping length : 7 m

8.000

7.800
Capacity (kW)

7.600

7.400

7.200

7.000
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

3.000

2.800

2.600
Input Power (kW)

2.400

2.200

2.000
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50

Piping Length (m)

267
21.2 Heating Capacity Table
21.2.1 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5

Water Out (°C) 25 35 45 55 60

Input Input Input Input Input
Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity
Outdoor Air (°C) Power Power Power Power Power
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
-20 2500 1110 2520 1310 2240 1590 2120 1800 - -
-15 3000 1140 3200 1370 3000 1620 2750 1920 - -
-7 2990 910 3300 1180 3250 1470 3200 1790 3000 1880
2 2920 690 3200 880 3200 1130 3200 1460 3150 1670
7 3090 490 3200 600 3200 840 3200 1140 2950 1220
25 3270 230 3270 380 3610 630 4060 1110 4030 1140

21.2.2 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD05JE5

Water Out (°C) 25 35 45 55 60

Input Input Input Input Input
Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity
Outdoor Air (°C) Power Power Power Power Power
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
-20 3600 1570 3510 1810 3160 1990 2460 2110 - -
-15 4460 1720 4200 1930 3750 2180 3000 2120 - -
-7 4180 1330 4200 1620 3800 1820 3550 2080 3250 2150
2 4070 1010 4200 1320 4200 1640 4100 2060 4100 2210
7 5200 830 5000 1000 5000 1410 5000 1840 4250 2100
25 5000 520 5000 720 5300 980 5600 1270 4800 1270

21.2.3 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5

Water Out (°C) 25 35 45 55 60

Input Input Input Input Input
Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity
Outdoor Air (°C) Power Power Power Power Power
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
-20 4330 1640 3980 1880 3830 2260 3300 2770 - -
-15 5160 1690 4750 2000 4650 2400 4500 2960 - -
-7 5640 1560 5600 1950 5500 2300 5250 2700 4980 2900
2 6800 1570 6850 2010 6750 2400 6200 2800 6180 2910
7 7550 1150 7000 1470 7000 1960 7000 2480 6860 2750
25 7000 620 6880 900 7000 1330 6920 1750 6830 1900

21.2.4 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD09JE5

Water Out (°C) 25 35 45 55 60

Input Input Input Input Input
Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity
Outdoor Air (°C) Power Power Power Power Power
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
(W) (W) (W) (W) (W)
-20 4950 1930 6200 3000 5280 3090 4230 3330 - -
-15 7580 2700 7400 3200 6290 3260 5200 3420 - -
-7 6390 1810 6120 2200 5880 2610 5900 3060 5650 3240
2 6960 1610 7000 2060 6850 2500 6300 2920 7260 3330
7 9440 1550 9000 2010 9000 2610 8950 3220 8620 3470
25 8270 950 8120 1290 8710 1800 7830 1970 6080 1720

268
21.3 Cooling Capacity Table
21.3.1 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD03JE5

Water Out (°C) 7 14 18

Outdoor Air (°C) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W)
16 3560 570 4320 550 3470 410
25 3290 730 4060 720 3270 520
35 3200 910 3560 930 3200 680
43 2680 1060 3340 1090 2790 820

21.3.2 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD05JE5

Water Out (°C) 7 14 18

Outdoor Air (°C) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W)
16 3590 560 4230 540 4790 520
25 4610 1180 5540 1210 5230 900
35 4500 1500 5080 1510 4800 1120
43 3770 1710 4940 1800 4300 1350

21.3.3 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD07JE5

Water Out (°C) 7 14 18

Outdoor Air (°C) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W)
16 5200 810 6620 730 7040 720
25 7400 1730 9300 1780 7650 1100
35 6700 2210 8100 2230 6700 1420
43 4500 1990 5440 2000 5100 1710

21.3.4 WH-ADC0309J3E5 WH-UD09JE5

Water Out (°C) 7 14 18

Outdoor Air (°C) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W) Capacity (W) Input Power (W)
16 6910 1150 8500 1090 8940 1040
25 8500 2100 10340 2160 8500 1380
35 7600 2620 9190 2690 7600 1740
43 3800 1990 4700 1970 5350 1990

269
22. Exploded View and Replacement Parts List
22.1 Indoor Unit
35

O/I 55 O/I 56 O/I 57 O/I 58 O/I 59 O/I 60 O/I 61

I/I 62 I/I 63
47

67
38
43

36
68 31

34 33 40

39 44
41

32

66

45
65 49 48

64
-AD
C03
09J3
E5

64
46
WH J3E5
C0309
WH-AD
XXXX
57039X
70

E5
EAN
328901 E5
09J3

09J3
50252
C03
-AD
WH J3E5

C03
135 C0309
WH-AD

-AD
r
780 XXXXX
Exterio
idad ACXF85-00 57039

WH
rat/Un
9JE5 70

E5
Benge EAN
WH-UD0 328901
ure/Au
7JE5

09J3
50252
Exterie
WH-UD0
nite
5JE5 place.
atedsources.

or Unit/U
heat
WH-UD0 well-ventil
other

C03
Outdo3JE5 in
a cool,
, and

WH-UD0 closed,
tightly
welding
operations
135

D
order,
good surface,
in hot r
780
: Keepames,

H-A
open
Exterio
NDATIONS
from idad ACXF85-00

Keep
RECOMME
dry. rat/Un
area 09JE5

W
the
STORAGE Benge
Keep WH-UD
ure/Au
7JE5
Exterie
WH-UD0
nite
5JE5 place.
atedsources.

or Unit/U
heat
WH-UD0 well-ventil
other

Outdo3JE5 in
a cool,
, and

WH-UD0 closed,
operations
tightly
welding
order,
good surface,
in hot
: Keepames,
open
NDATIONS
from
Keep
RECOMME
dry.
area
the
STORAGE
Keep

50
54
53

51

23

52
1

Note:
• The above exploded view is for the purpose of parts disassembly and replacement.
• The non-numbered parts are not kept as standard service parts.

270
 11 10

21
15
30

16
22

19 42 23
18

25

19

17

29

13
4
6

20

9
27 26
3 2

Note:
 The above exploded view is for the purpose of parts disassembly and replacement.
 The non-numbered parts are not kept as standard service parts.

271
SAFETY REF. NO. DESCRIPTION & NAME QTY. WH-ADC0309J3E5 REMARK

1 CHASSIS - COMPLETE 1 ACXD50C02900

2 DRAIN VALVE 1 CWB65C1026 O

3 PRESSURE AND TEMP RELIEF VALVE (TANK) 1 ACXB62-00110 O

4 SENSOR CO. (TANK TEMP CN-TH2) 1 ACXA50C14750 O

6 FILTER COMPLETE 1 ACXB51C00100

7 HOLDER - COUPLING 1 ACXH35-01790

8 BASE PAN (HEATER) 1 ACXD52-04300

9 PURGE PLUG 3 CWB821027 O

10 HOT WATER COIL - COMPLETE 1 ACXB90C00880

11 RECEIVER 1 CWB141039

13 WATER PUMP 1 ACXB53-00390 O

15 LEAD WIRE FOR WATER PUMP 1 ACXA60C73630

16 AIR PURGE VALVE 1 ACXB62-00130 O

17 HEATER ASS'Y 1 ACXA34K00460

18 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL 1 ACXG30-08750

19 THERMOSTAT 2 CWA151074 O

20 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 1 ACXB62-00740 O

21 FLOW SWITCH 1 ACXB62-00911 O

22 LEAD WIRE - FLOW SENSOR 1 CWA68C2281

23 PRESSURE GAUGE 1 CWB070003

25 3 WAY VALVE (WATER) 1 ACXB62-00090

26 FLARE NUT (5/8) 1 CWT251064

27 FLARE NUT (1/4) 1 CWT251063

SENSOR - CO. (WATER IN OUT, REF TEMP
29 1 ACXA50C14770 O
SENSOR CN-TH1)
SENSOR - CO. (HEX WATER OUTLET TEMP
30 1 ACXA50C00660 O
CN-TH3)
31 CABINET SIDE PLATE (L) 1 ACXE04-11320A

32 CABINET SIDE PLATE (R) 1 ACXE04-11330A

33 CABINET REAR PLATE 1 ACXE02-02760

34 HANDLE 2 CWE161014

35 CONTROL BOARD 1 ACXH10-00710

36 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER - MAIN 1 ACXA73C50250 O

38 REACTOR 1 G0C103Z00003 O

39 RESIDUALCURRENT - CIRCUIT BREAKER 2 K5KYYAY00003 O

40 TERMINAL BOARD ASSY (1, 2, 3) 1 CWA28K1217 O

41 TERMINAL BOARD ASSY (A, B) 1 CWA28K1238 O

42 TERMINAL COVER 1 CWH171051

43 CONTROL BOARD COVER 1 ACXH13-00360

44 HOLDER - P.S. CORD 3 CWH31103

45 REMOTE CONTROL COMPLETE 1 ACXA75C15750 O

46 LEAD WIRE FOR REMOTE CONTROL 1 ACXA60C04350

272
 SAFETY REF. NO. DESCRIPTION & NAME QTY. WH-ADC0309J3E5 REMARK

47 CABINET TOP PLATE 1 ACXE03K01150

48 CABINET FRONT PLATE 1 ACXE06-00030A

49 PANASONIC BADGE 1 CWE375343

50 DECORATION BASE ASS'Y 1 CWE35K1285

51 ACCESSORY - CO. (DECORATION BASE ASS'Y) 1 CWH82C2174

52 ACCESSORY ADJUSTABLE FEET 1 CWH82C2112

53 ACCESSORY CO. (DRAIN ELBOW) 1 CWG87C900

54 REDUCING ADAPTER 1 CWT27C1008

55 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF55-22251

56 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF55-22261

57 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF55-22271

58 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF55-22281

59 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF55-22291

60 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF55-22301

61 OPERATING INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF55-22971

62 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF60-37620

63 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION 1 ACXF60-37650

64 MODEL LABEL 2 ACXF85-01240

65 BAG 1 CWG861544

66 BASE BOARD - COMPLETE 1 CWG62C1201

67 TOP BOARD COMPLETE 1 CWG60C1058

68 C.C. CASE 1 ACXG50-47180

Note:
 All parts are supplied from PAPAMY, Malaysia (Vendor Code: 00029488).
 “O” marked parts are recommended to be kept in stock.

273
22.2 Outdoor Unit
22.2.1 WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5

53
41

52

12

30
51

37

39 13
31

37

42

33
6

50

7
10
45
32

48 34
9
49 28
11
38
16 18
40 29
5
35
25 14
15
43
27
26 20
36
21
44
3 24

4 18

2 19

37

22 23 46
1

17

For WH-UD03JE5 For WH-UD05JE5

54 54 54 54

5 5 5
3JE 5 05JE
40

03JE
40 40

D0 05JE
40

-UD
56213

47
56212

-UD
56212 290 320
290
ACXF82-93 ACXF82-93

-U
ACXF82-93

-UD
56213
320

WH WH WH
ACXF82-93

WH
place. place.
ted ted
place. sources. sources.
ted heat heat
sources. well-ventila
heat well-ventila
other other
cool,and cool,and
well-ventila
other in a in a
cool,and place.
in a closed,
ted
sources. closed,
operations,
operations,
closed,
operations, tightly heat tightly
welding well-ventila welding
tightly order, other order,
welding cool,and
order, surface, in a in good
surface,
surface, in good
hot hot
in good
hot Keep
flames,
closed,
operations, Keep
flames,
Keep tightly open
flames, open
DATIONS: welding DATIONS:
open from order, from
DATIONS: surface, Keep
from
RECOMMEN
Keep in good
hot RECOMMEN
dry.
Keep dry. Keep
RECOMMEN area flames, area
dry. the
STORAGE
area the
STORAGE open
the
STORAGE Keep DATIONS: Keep
from
Keep Keep
RECOMMEN
dry.
area
the
STORAGE
Keep

Note:
• The above exploded view is for the purpose of parts disassembly and replacement.
• The non-numbered parts are not kept as standard service parts.

274
SAFETY REF. NO. DESCRIPTION & NAME QTY. WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5 REMARK

1 CHASSIS ASS’Y 1 CWD52K1317 ←

2 ANTI - VIBRATION BUSHING 3 CWH50077 ←

3 COMPRESSOR 1 9RD138ZAB21 ← O

4 NUT - COMPRESSOR MOUNT 3 CWH561096 ←

5 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL 1 CWG302762 ←

6 BRACKET FAN MOTOR 1 CWD541167 ←

7 FAN MOTOR, DC 40W 3PH 1 L6CAYYYL0064 ← O

8 SCREW - BRACKET FAN MOTOR 2 CWH551217 ←

9 SCREW - FAN MOTOR MOUNT 4 CWH55252J ←

10 PROPELLER FAN ASSY 1 CWH03K1066 ←

11 NUT - PROPELLER FAN 1 CWH56053J ←

12 CONDENSER 1 ACXB32C15620 ←

13 MANIFOLD TUBE ASS'Y (CAP TUBE) 1 CWT07K1831 ←

14 4 - WAYS VALVE 1 CWB001063 ←

15 HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR CN-HPS 1 CWA501463 ← O

16 PRESSURE SWITCH 1 CWA101013 ←

17 3 - WAYS VALVE 1 ACXB01-04050 ←

18 STRAINER 2 CWB11094 ←

19 DISCHARGE MUFFLER (1) 1 CWB121010 ←

20 DISCHARGE MUFFLER (2) 1 CWB121063 ←

21 HOLDER - SENSOR 1 CWH32075 ←

22 HOLDER - COUPLING 1 CWH351233 ←

23 2 - WAYS VALVE 1 ACXB02-02680 ←

24 EXPANSION VALVE 1 CWB051029 ← O

25 SENSOR - CO. (DISCHARGE TEMP CN-DIS) 1 CWA50C2656 ← O

26 TERMINAL COVER 1 CWH171039A ←

27 NUT - TERMINAL COVER 1 CWH7080300J ←

28 SOUND - PROOF BOARD 1 CWH151345 ←

29 REACTOR 1 G0C392J00027 ← O
SENSOR - CO. (OUTDOOR AIR & PIPING TEMP
30 1 CWA50C2893 ← O
CN-TH1)
31 SENSOR - CO. (EVA EXIT TEMP CN-TH3) 1 CWA50C3374 ← O

32 TERMINAL BOARD ASS'Y (1, 2, 3) 1 CWA28K1036J ← O

33 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER - MAIN 1 ACXA73C50330R ACXA73C50340R O

34 PLATE - C.B. COVER 1 CWH131470 ←

35 V - COIL COMP. (4 WAY VALVE) 1 CWA43C2431 ← O

36 V - COIL CO. (EXPANSION VALVE) 1 ACXA43C06020 ← O

37 HOLDER - SENSOR 3 CWH32143 ←

38 CABINET SIDE PLATE CO. 1 ACXE04C05280 ←

39 CABINET SIDE PLATE (L) 1 ACXE04-10020 ←

40 CABINET FRONT PLATE - CO. 1 ACXE06C03260 ←

275
 SAFETY REF. NO. DESCRIPTION & NAME QTY. WH-UD03JE5 WH-UD05JE5 REMARK

41 CABINET TOP PLATE 1 ACXE03-02880 ←

42 CONTROL BOARD COVER 1 CWH131473 ←

43 CONTROL BOARD COVER - COMPLETE 1 CWH13C1253 ←

44 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL 1 ACXG30-08570 ←

45 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL (COMP TOP) 1 CWG302630 ←

46 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL 1 CWG302788 ←

47 ACCESSORY COMP. (DRAIN ELBOW) 1 CWG87C900 ←

48 PANASONIC BADGE 1 CWE373439 ←

49 INVERTER BADGE 1 CWE373441 ←

50 BASE BOARD - COMPLETE 1 CWG62C1162 ←

51 SHOCK ABSORBER (R) 1 CWG713415 ←

52 SHOCK ABSORBER (L) 1 CWG713416 ←

53 C.C. CASE 1 ACXG50-48670 ←

54 MODEL LABEL 2 ACXF82-93290 ACXF82-93320

Note:
 All parts are supplied from PAPAMY, Malaysia (Vendor Code: 00029488).
 “O” marked parts are recommended to be kept in stock.

276
22.2.2 WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5

For WH-UD07JE5
38
54 54
5 5
07JE 07JE
66 66

-UD
56214

-UD
56214 330
330
ACXF82-93
ACXF82-93

WH closed,
tightly
in a
operations,
heat
well-ventila
cool,and
other
ted
place.
sources.
WH order,
closed,
tightly
welding
in a
operations,
ted
heat
well-ventila
cool,and
other
place.
sources.

welding surface,
order, in good
surface, hot
in good
hot Keep
flames,
Keep
flames, open
DATIONS:
open
DATIONS: from
from Keep
Keep RECOMMEN
dry.
RECOMMEN
dry. area
area the
STORAGE
the
STORAGE Keep
Keep

40
For WH-UD09JE5 46
54 54
5
JE5 09JE
66
66

09 -UD
56215
340

ACXF82-93

-UD
56215
340

WH
ACXF82-93

WH
place.
ted
sources.
heat
well-ventila
other
cool,and
in a
place.
ted closed,
operations,
sources.
heat tightly
well-ventila welding
other order,
cool,and
in a in good
hot
surface,
closed,
operations, Keep
flames,
tightly open
welding DATIONS:
order, from
surface, Keep
in good
hot RECOMMEN
dry.
Keep
flames, area

37
the
STORAGE
open
DATIONS: Keep
from
Keep
RECOMMEN
dry.
area
the
STORAGE
Keep

48
19
30
6
32
49

29 5
35
33

21
34
15 25

22 23
43
9
44
39 36

28 24
27 16
26 2 8
4
53 14
10
52 45
13
17
20 41
12
51 3 18
42

31
1 11

50 7
47

Note:
• The above exploded view is for the purpose of parts disassembly and replacement.
• The non-numbered parts are not kept as standard service parts.

277
SAFETY REF. NO. DESCRIPTION & NAME QTY. WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5 REMARK

1 CHASSIS ASS’Y 1 ACXD52K03140 ←

2 COMPRESSOR 1 9KD240XBB21 ← O

3 BUSHING - COMPRESSOR MOUNT 3 CWH50055 ←

4 NUT - COMPRESSOR MOUNT 3 CWH561049 ←

5 CONDENSER 1 ACXB32C16550 ←

6 TUBE ASSY (CAP. TUBE) 1 ACXT07K08290 ←

7 3 - WAYS VALVE (GAS) 1 CWB011363 ←

8 4 - WAYS VALVE 1 CWB001026J ←

9 HIGH PRESSURE SENSOR (CN-HPS) 1 CWA501463 ← O

10 DISCHARGE MUFFLER (4 WAY VALVE) 1 CWB121013 ←

11 2 - WAYS VALVE (LIQUID) 1 CWB021464 ←

12 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL 1 ACXG30-08580 ←

13 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL (COMP TOP) 1 CWG302246 ←

14 SOUND PROOF MATERIAL 1 ACXG30-09140 ←

15 SOUND PROOF BOARD 1 CWH151197 ←

16 V - COIL COMPLETE (4 - WAY VALVE) 1 CWA43C2169J ← O

17 V - COIL COMPLETE (EXPANSION VALVE) 1 CWA43C2342 ← O

18 SENSOR - COMPLETE - COMP TEMP 1 CWA50C2185 ← O

19 SENSOR - COMPLETE - AIR & PIPE TEMP 1 CWA50C2517 ← O

20 SENSOR - COMPLETE - DISC TEMP 1 CWA50C2722 ← O

21 SENSOR - COMPLETE - EVA EXIT TEMP 1 ACXA50C14960 ← O

22 CONTROL BOARD CASING 1 CWH102360 ←

23 TERMINAL BOARD ASS’Y (1, 2, 3) 1 CWA28K1076J ← O

24 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER - NF 1 ACXA73-31180 ← O

25 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER (MAIN) 1 ACXA73C54730R ACXA73C54740R O

26 REACTOR 1 G0C203J00008 ← O

27 TERMINAL COVER 1 CWH171039A ←

28 NUT - TERMINAL COVER 1 CWH7080300J ←

29 CONTROL BOARD COVER 1 CWH131333 ←

30 FAN MOTOR BRACKET 1 CWD541127 ←

31 SCREW - FAN MOTOR BRACKET 2 CWH551217 ←

32 FAN MOTOR 1 EHDS80C60AC ← O

33 SCREW - FAN MOTOR MOUNT 4 CWH551323 ←

34 PROPELLER FAN ASSY 1 CWH00K1006 ←

35 NUT - PROPELLER FAN 1 CWH561092 ←

36 CABINET SIDE PLATE (R) 1 CWE041799A ←

37 CABINET SIDE PLATE (L) 1 CWE041585A ←

38 CABINET TOP PLATE 1 CWE031083A ←

39 CABINET FRONT PLATE ASSY 1 CWE06K1063 ←

40 HANDLE 1 CWE161010 ←

278
 SAFETY REF. NO. DESCRIPTION & NAME QTY. WH-UD07JE5 WH-UD09JE5 REMARK

41 EXPANSION VALVE 1 CWB051029 ← O

42 STRAINER 2 CWB111063 ←

43 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH 1 CWA101013 ←

44 PLATE - CONTROL BOARD COVER 1 CWH131332 ←

45 CONTROL BOARD COVER - COMPLETE 1 CWH13C1185 ←

46 ACCESSORY - COMPLETE 1 ACXH82C09830 ←

47 ACCESSORY CO. (DRAIN ELBOW) 1 CWG87C900 ←

48 PANASONIC BADGE 1 CWE373439 ←

49 INVERTER BADGE 1 CWE373441 ←

50 BASE BOARD - COMPLETE 1 CWG62C1081 ←

51 SHOCK ABSORBER (R) 1 CWG712879 ←

52 SHOCK ABSORBER (L) 1 CWG712880 ←

53 C.C. CASE 1 ACXG50-48440 ←

54 MODEL LABEL 2 ACXF82-93330 ACXF82-93340

Note:
 All parts are supplied from PAPAMY, Malaysia (Vendor Code: 00029488).
 “O” marked parts are recommended to be kept in stock.

[PAPAMY] Printed in Malaysia

SB0519-0

279